Manual Trans Miss Or Atlas ISDB Series

L

ATLAS ISDB-TTransmitter

TECHNICAL MANUA888-2684-001

Atlas ISDB-TTransmitter

January 2009Rev C

T.M. No. 888-2684-001© Copyright Harris Corporation 2007, 2008, 2009 All rights reserved

Technical Assistance

Technical and troubleshooting assistance for HARRIS Transmission products is available from HARRIS Field Service (factory location: Quincy, Illinois, USA) during normal business hours (8:00 AM - 5:00 PM Central Time). Telephone +1-217-222-8200 to contact the Field Service Department; FAX +1-217-221-7086; or E-mail questions to [email protected] service is available 24 hours a day, seven days a week, by telephone only. Other on-line assistance, including technical manuals, white papers, software downloads, and service bulletins, is available at https://premier.harris.com/broadcast (log-in required). Address written correspondence to Field Service Department, HARRIS Broadcast Communications Division, P.O. Box 4290, Quincy, Illinois 62305-4290, USA. For other global service contact information, please visit: http://www.broadcast.harris.com/contact.NOTE: For all service and parts correspondence, you will need to provide the Sales Order number, as well as the Serial Number for the transmitter or part in question. For future reference, record those numbers here: ___________________/____________________Please provide these numbers for any written request, or have these numbers ready in the event you choose to call regarding any Service, or Parts requests. For warranty claims it will be required, and for out of warranty products, this will help us to best identify what specific hardware was shipped.

Replaceable Parts Service

Replacement parts are available from HARRIS Service Parts Department from 7:00 AM to 11:00 PM Central Time, seven days a week. Telephone +1-217-222-8200 or email [email protected] to contact the Service Parts Department. Emergency replacement parts are available by telephone only, 24 hours a day, seven days a week by calling +1-217-222-8200.

Unpacking

Carefully unpack the equipment and preform a visual inspection to determine if any apparent damage was incurred during shipment. Retain the shipping materials until it has been verified that all equipment has been received undamaged. Locate and retain all PACKING CHECK LISTs. Use the PACKING CHECK LIST to help locate and identify any components or assemblies which are removed for shipping and must be reinstalled. Also remove any shipping supports, straps, and packing materials prior to initial turn on.

Returns And Exchanges

No equipment can be returned unless written approval and a Return Authorization is received from HARRIS Broadcast Communications Division. Special shipping instructions and coding will be provided to assure proper handling. Complete details regarding circumstances and reasons for return are to be included in the request for return. Custom equipment or special order equipment is not returnable. In those instances where return or exchange of equipment is at the request of the customer, or convenience of the customer, a restocking fee will be charged. All returns will be sent freight prepaid and properly insured by the customer. When communicating with HARRIS Broadcast Communications Division, specify the HARRIS Order Number or Invoice Number.

2/24/09 888-2684-001 iii WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

Manual Revision History

ATLAS ISDB--T Transmitter Manual

REV. DATE ECN Pages Affected

A 2007Oct. Eng. Review

A1 2007 Nov. Model numbers in pump trip chart. Minor edits.

B 2009 Jan. 57179 Add the latest models to the manual. KAM

C 2009 Feb P42618 Revised Table 2-6 JPK

iv 888-2684-001 2/24/09 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

2/24/09 888-2684-001 vWARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

vi 888-2684-001 2/24/09 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

Guide to Using Harris Parts List InformationThe Harris Replaceable Parts List Index portrays a tree structure with the major items being leftmost in the index. The example below shows the Transmitter as the highest item in the tree structure. If you were to look at the bill of materials table for the Transmitter you would find the Control Cabinet, the PA Cabinet, and the Output Cabinet. In the Replaceable Parts List Index the Control Cabinet, PA Cabinet, and Output Cabinet show up one indentation level below the Transmitter and implies that they are used in the Transmitter. The Controller Board is indented one level below the Control Cabinet so it will show up in the bill of material for the Control Cabinet. The tree structure of this same index is shown to the right of the table and shows indentation level versus tree structure level.

Example of Replaceable Parts List Index and equivalent tree structure:

Replaceable Parts List Index Part Number Page

Table 7-1. Transmitter 994 9283 001 7-2Table 7-2. Control Cabinet 992 9244 002 7-3Table 7-3. Controller Board 992 8344 002 7-6Table 7-4. PA Cabinet 992 9400 002 7-7Table 7-5. PA Amplifier 994 7894 002 7-9Table 7-6. PA Amplifier Board 992 7904 002 7-10Table 7-7. Output Cabinet 992 9450 001 7-12

The part number of the item is shown to the right of the description as is the page in the manual where the bill for that part number starts. Inside the actual tables, four main headings are used:

• Table #-#. ITEM NAME - HARRIS PART NUMBER - this line gives the information that corresponds to the

• Replaceable Parts List Index entry;

• HARRIS P/N column gives the ten digit Harris part number (usually in ascending order);

• DESCRIPTION column gives a 25 character or less description of the part number;

• REF. SYMBOLS/EXPLANATIONS column 1) gives the reference designators for the item (i.e., C001, R102, etc.) that corresponds to the number found in the schematics (C001 in a bill of material is equiva-lent to C1 on the schematic) or 2) gives added information or further explanation (i.e., “Used for 208V operation only,” or “Used for HT 10LS only,” etc.).

Inside the individual tables some standard conventions are used:

• A # symbol in front of a component such as #C001 under the REF. SYMBOLS/EXPLANATIONS col-umn means that this item is used on or with C001 and is not the actual part number for C001.

• In the ten digit part numbers, if the last three numbers are 000, the item is a part that Harris has pur-chased and has not manufactured or modified. If the last three numbers are other than 000, the item is either manufactured by Harris or is purchased from a vendor and modified for use in the Harris product.

• The first three digits of the ten digit part number tell which family the part number belongs to - for example, all electrolytic (can) capacitors will be in the same family (524 xxxx 000). If an electrolytic (can) capacitor is found to have a 9xx xxxx xxx part number (a number outside of the normal family of numbers), it has probably been modified in some manner at the Harris factory and will therefore show up farther down into the individual parts list (because each table is normally sorted in ascending order). Most Harris made or modified assemblies will have 9xx xxxx xxx numbers associated with them.

The term “SEE HIGHER LEVEL BILL” in the description column implies that the reference designated part number will show up in a bill that is higher in the tree structure. This is often the case for components that may be frequency determinant or voltage determinant and are called out in a higher level bill structure that is more customer dependent than the bill at a lower level.

Transmitter994 9283 001

Control Cabinet 992 9244 002

Controller Board 992 8344 002

PA Cabinet992 9400 002

PA Amplifier992 7894 002

PA Amplifier Board 992 7904 002

Output Cabinet 992 9450 001

2/24/09 888-2684-001 vii WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

! WARNING:THE CURRENTS AND VOLTAGES IN THIS EQUIPMENT ARE DANGEROUS. PERSONNEL MUST AT ALL TIMES OBSERVE SAFETY WARNINGS, INSTRUC-TIONS AND REGULATIONS.

This manual is intended as a general guide for trained and qualified personnel who are aware of the dangers inherent in handling potentially hazardous electrical/electronic circuits. It is not intended to contain a complete statement of all safety precautions which should be observed by personnel in using this or other electronic equipment.

The installation, operation, maintenance and service of this equipment involves risks both to personnel and equipment, and must be performed only by qualified personnel exercising due care. HARRIS CORPORATION shall not be responsible for injury or damage resulting from improper procedures or from the use of improperly trained or inexperienced personnel performing such tasks. During installation and operation of this equipment, local building codes and fire protection standards must be observed.

The following National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) standards are recommended as reference:

- Automatic Fire Detectors, No. 72E- Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Portable Fire Extinguishers, No. 10- Halogenated Fire Extinguishing Agent Systems, No. 12A

! WARNING:ALWAYS DISCONNECT POWER BEFORE OPENING COVERS, DOORS, ENCLO-SURES, GATES, PANELS OR SHIELDS. ALWAYS USE GROUNDING STICKS AND SHORT OUT HIGH VOLTAGE POINTS BEFORE SERVICING. NEVER MAKE INTERNAL ADJUSTMENTS, PERFORM MAINTENANCE OR SERVICE WHEN ALONE OR WHEN FATIGUED.

Do not remove, short-circuit or tamper with interlock switches on access covers, doors, enclosures, gates, panels or shields. Keep away from live circuits, know your equipment and don’t take chances.

! WARNING:IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ENSURE THAT POWER HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED.

! WARNING:IF OIL FILLED OR ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS ARE UTILIZED IN YOUR EQUIPMENT, AND IF A LEAK OR BULGE IS APPARENT ON THE CAPACITOR CASE WHEN THE UNIT IS OPENED FOR SERVICE OR MAINTENANCE, ALLOW THE UNIT TO COOL DOWN BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE THE DEFEC-TIVE CAPACITOR. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE A DEFECTIVE CAPACITOR WHILE IT IS HOT DUE TO THE POSSIBILITY OF A CASE RUPTURE AND SUBSE-QUENT INJURY.

viii 888-2684-001 2/24/09 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

2/24/09 888-2684-001 ixWARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

FIRST-AID

Personnel engaged in the installation, operation, maintenance or servicing of this equipment are urged to become familiar with first-aid theory and practices. The following information is not intended to be complete first-aid procedures, it is a brief and is only to be used as a reference. It is the duty of all personnel using the equipment to be prepared to give adequate Emergency First Aid and there by prevent avoidable loss of life.

Treatment of Electrical Burns

1. Extensive burned and broken skin

a. Cover area with clean sheet or cloth. (Cleanest available cloth article.)

b. Do not break blisters, remove tissue, remove adhered particles of clothing, or apply any salve or ointment.

c. Treat victim for shock as required.

d. Arrange transportation to a hospital as quickly as possible.

e. If arms or legs are affected keep them elevated.

NOTE:If medical help will not be available within an hour and the victim is conscious and not vomiting, give him a weak solution of salt and soda: 1 level teaspoonful of salt and 1/2 level teaspoonful of baking soda to each quart of water (neither hot or cold). Allow victim to sip slowly about 4 ounces (a half of glass) over a period of 15 minutes. Discontinue fluid if vomiting occurs. (Do not give alcohol.)

2. Less severe burns - (1st & 2nd degree)

a. Apply cool (not ice cold) compresses using the cleanest available cloth article.

b. Do not break blisters, remove tissue, remove adhered particles of clothing, or apply salve or ointment.

c. Apply clean dry dressing if necessary.

d. Treat victim for shock as required.

e. Arrange transportation to a hospital as quickly as possible.

f. If arms or legs are affected keep them elevated.

REFERENCE:ILLINOIS HEART ASSOCIATIONAMERICAN RED CROSS STANDARD FIRST AID AND PERSONAL SAFETY MANUAL (SECOND EDITION)

x 888-2684-001 2/24/09 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

Table of Contents

Section 1Introduction

Purpose of This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1General Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Atlas ISDB-T Transmitter Models . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Atlas ISDB-T Dual Transmitter Configurations. 1-3System Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3Transmitter Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Control System Communications . . . . . . . . . . 1-9In-System Programming or ISP . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

PA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Module Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Transmitter Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Cooling System Control Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Pump Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Transmitter PA Module and Combiner Cold Plates1-15

Apex ISDB-T Exciter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16General Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Section 2Installation /

Initial Turn-OnIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Installation Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Installation Checkboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Transmitter Cabinet Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Cooling System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Cooling Control Panel and H.E. Wiring . . . . . . . 2-7Continue Cooling System Installation . . . . . . . 2-10

Transmitter AC Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Signal and Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Intercabinet Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14External Interlock Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Fault-Off External Interlocks (J18) . . . . . . . . . 2-14RF Mute External Interlock Connections (J18) 2-15RF Mute External Interlock Connections (J11) 2-16

1

Patch Panel Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Initial Cooling System Turn ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Venting Air from Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20Starting the Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Heat Exchanger Fan Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Initial System Leak Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24Initial System Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Initial System Flushing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Final Cooling System Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

Install PA Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Initial Turn-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30

Final Cooling System Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Setting the Transmitter Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . .2-32Setting the Water Cooled Test Load Flow Switch Trip Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

Setting the Heat Exchanger Fan Turn ON Tempera-tures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34

Verifying Pump Switching. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-34Normal Pump Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

Setting Exciter Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35RF Initial Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

Parallel Remote Control Connections. . . . . . . . . .2-38Transmitter Control Functions, J13 and J14 . . .2-38

Remote Status Outputs, J15 & J16 . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Remote Power Metering, J17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42

Section 3Operation

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1Transmitter Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1

Main Menu "Quick" Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2Graphical User Interface (GUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3

Global Status and Navigation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3GUI Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Drive Chain Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7

Drive Chain Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8Drive Service (RFU Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8

Power Amp Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10PA Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11PA Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12PA Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14

PA Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14PA Module Alignment - "Auto Bias" . . . . . . .3-15

Output Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17

Table of Contents (continued)

Output Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Output Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Output Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

PA Reject Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Forward Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Reflected Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Power Supply Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21PS Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22PS Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

System Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23Control System Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Cooling System Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Cooling System Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25Cooling Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26Cooling Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Cooling Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28System Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29

System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Control Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31Touch Screen Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Software Revisions (SW REVs). . . . . . . . . . . 3-34Hardware Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

GUI Menu Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Section 4Theory of Operation

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Active Logic Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Block Diagram Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Transmitter Control System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Micro Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3CPLD, Complex Programmable Logic Device. . 4-4

I/O Expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Life Support Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus . . . . . . . . . 4-5System Control Bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6

Parallel Control Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Main Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

Transmitter Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Graphical User Interface (GUI) . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

Serial Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Life Support Mode, Main Controller . . . . . . . . 4-9

Manual Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

2

Manual RF MUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10External I/O Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

. . . . . . . . . . External Interlocks (J18 and J11)4-12Fault-Off Interlocks (J18). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13RF Mute Interlocks (J18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14RF Mute Interlock (J11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

Transmitter RF System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Apex Exciter(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15RF Unit (RFU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15RF Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16

RF Detectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Cabinet Reject Load RF Detector (Relative) . 4-17PA Module Reject Load Protection . . . . . . . . 4-17PA Module Phase Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Normal Mode / Life Support Mode . . . . . . . . 4-19

Backplane Interface Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20RF Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Control Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Low Voltage Power Supply Distribution . . . . 4-20

PA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Phase and Gain Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

Automatic Level Control (ALC) . . . . . . . . . 4-23RF Pallets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23

Auto Bias Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Pallet Splitters and Combiner. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25Module Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25PS Front End Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26Power Supply Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

PA Module Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27Combiner Isolation Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29

Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29AC Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29Autotransformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29MOV Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29Overvoltage (OVP) Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30Power Block Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

S2, Power Block Controller Board Configuration Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30

LVPS Interface and Cabinet ID . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31AC Line Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31Cabinet Cooling System Sensors . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Fan Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32Coolant Temperature - Inlet & Outlet . . . . . 4-33Coolant Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33Leak Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

Low Voltage Power Supplies (LVPS). . . . . . . . 4-35


Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37Pump Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37Heat Exchanger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38Transmitter Cold Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38Pump Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39

Transmitter Interconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40Cooling Control Panel LED’s . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Transmitter Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Pump Module Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43Heat Exchanger Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46Cooling Controller Board Circuit Descriptions4-46

PUMP/MODE LATCH CIRCUITS . . . . . . 4-46PUMP CONTACTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT 4-48PUMP STATUS SIGNAL CHAIN . . . . . . . 4-49HEAT EXCHANGER DRIVER CIRCUITS4-50HEAT EXCHANGER STATUS CHAIN . . 4-51

Section 5Maintenance and Alignments

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1PA Module Removal and Replacement. . . . . . . . . 5-1

PA Module Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Installing a PA Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Operation With Inoperative PA Modules . . . . . . 5-5

PA Module Auto Bias Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5PA Module Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Phase Control Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Module Phasing Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Automatic Module Phasing Procedure . . . . . . . . 5-8

Power Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Forward Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Calibrate Forward Total Power: . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Calibrate Forward Cabinet Power:. . . . . . . . . 5-12

Reflected Calibrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12Calibrate Reflected Total Power . . . . . . . . . . 5-13Calibrate Reflected Cabinet Power . . . . . . . . 5-14

RFU Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Miscellaneous Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Cooling System Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Pump Module Strainer Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Water Filter Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Coolant Tank Level Management: . . . . . . . . . 5-18

3

Cooling System Maintenance Notes . . . . . . . .5-19Changing Pumps: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Pump Module Operation Without Transmitter 5-21Air Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23LCD Contrast Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Touch Screen Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24

Apex Exciter Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Section 6Diagnostics

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1GUI System Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Atlas Three-Strike Fault Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Reflected Power Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3Module Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3

Fault Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5

Section 7Parts List

Replaceable Parts List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1

Appendix-aCutting & Soldering Transmis-

sion LineSuggested Cutting And Soldering Procedure . . . . .a-1Line Cutback and Flange Soldering Procedure . . .a-2Cutting The Transmission Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .a-4Soldering Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .a-8

Soldering Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .a-8Cleaning The Soldered Joint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .a-9

Alternate Cleaning Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .a-10

Appendix-bCooling System Help

Coolant and Water Recommendations . . . . . . . . . .b-1Plumbing System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .b-3

Pipe Sizing and Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .b-3Standard Coolant Plumbing Practices . . . . . . . . .b-4

Routine System Operation and Maintenance. . . . .b-6


Reserve Coolant Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b-7Clean-Up Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b-7Operating Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b-7Measuring Specific Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b-7Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b-9

Determining Percent of Ucartherm . . . . . . . . . b-9Heat Transfer Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b-9

Ethylene Glycol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . b-9

Appendix-cGrounding, Surge & Lightning

ProtectionSurge and Lightning Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-1System Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-2

Ground Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-2AC Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-2DC Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-3Earth Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-3RF Ground. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . c-4

Appendix-dLightning Protection Recommen-

dationIntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . d-1Environmental Hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . d-3What Can Be Done? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . d-6AC Service Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . d-7Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . d-8

4

Section 1Introduction

2/24/09 888-2684-001WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior

1
1.1 Purpose of This Manual
This technical manual contains the information pertaining to the Atlas ISDB-T solid-state UHF TV transmitter. The various sections of this technical manual provide the following types of information.

• Section 1, Introduction, provides general manual layout, frontispiece, equipment description, block diagram and general specifications.

• Section 2, Installation/Initial Turn-On, provides physical and electrical installation procedures for the transmitter, cooling and RF systems and basic remote control con-nections.

• Section 3, Operation, provides operation and navigation information for the Graphi-cal User Interface or GUI as well as identification and functions of all external panel controls and indicators.

• Section 4, Theory of Operation, provides detailed theory of operation for the trans-mitter and sub-assemblies.

• Section 5, Maintenance and Alignments, provides preventative and corrective main-tenance information and all field alignment procedures.

• Section 6, Diagnostics, provides detailed fault information and diagnostic procedures to the board level.

• Section 7-10, Parts List, provides a parts list for the overall transmitter as well as individual modules.

1-1 to servicing.

Section 1 Introduction ATLAS ISDB-T

1.2 General Description

This section contains a general description of the Atlas ISDB-T series television transmitters. Included in this section will be descriptions of the Control System, Power Amplifier, block diagrams of the different models and system specifications.

Figure 1-1 DVI3400 Front & Rear Views

RFU

CONTROL PANEL & GUI

APEX EXCITERS

8 PA MODULES

POWER SUPPLY

eCDi

A

B

RF Sample I/O

COOLANT SENSOR FLOW

LIQUID COOLED PA MODULE COMBINER

MID DECK PA BREAKERS

PA COOLANT CONNECTIONS

AIR INTAKE FILTER

LV POWER SUPPLY BREAKERS

1-2 888-2684-001 2/24/09 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

Section 1 IntroductionATLAS ISDB-T

1.2.1 Atlas ISDB-T Transmitter Models

The Atlas ISDB-T transmitter is available in 8 liquid cooled power levels. The available models are listed below in Table 1-1.

1.2.2 Atlas ISDB-T Dual Transmitter Configurations

Atlas ISDB-T transmitters can also be configured for dual operation. Dual systems have DVID model numbers and consist of a center dual control cabinet with DVI transmitters as power blocks on each side of the control cabinet. In dual configurations the exciters are located in the center dual control cabinet. See the ISDB-T Dual Transmitter Cabinet Manual for additional information on dual systems.

1.2.3 System Block Diagram

Figure 1-2 below is the System block diagram showing the basic signal flow and configuration for a Atlas ISDB-T Transmitter, single cabinet system, with up to 8 PA modules.

Table 1-1 Atlas ISDB-T Transmitter Models

Tx Models Cabinets PA Modules Output Power

DVI850 1 2 850W

DVI1700 1 4 1.7kW

DVI2500 1 6 2.5kW

DVI3400 1 8 3.4kW

DVI5000 2 6+6 5.0kW

DVI6800 2 8+8 6.8kW

DVI7500 3 8+8+4 7.5kW

DVI9000 3 8+8+8 9.0kW

NOTE: All power levels given in average power. Power measured at output of the mask filter.

2/24/09 888-2684-001 1-3 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


Figure 1-2 Atlas ISDB-T Single Cabinet Transmitter Block Diagram - Sheet 1



Figure 1-3 Atlas ISDB-T Single Cabinet Transmitter Block Diagram - Sheet



Figure 1-4 Atlas ISDB-T 3-Cabinet Transmitter Block Diagram - Sheet 1



Figure 1-5 Atlas ISDB-T 3-Cabinet Transmitter Block Diagram - Sheet 2



1.2.4 Transmitter Control System

The transmitter uses a distributed architecture control system. This means that each transmitter sub-system is responsible for its own monitoring and protection and simply reports back to the Main Controller for display on the GUI (Graphical User Interface) or to a remote interface. The heart of the system is the 376 Micro Module which is used in all of the transmitter systems for control, monitoring and protection. The Micro Module is used on each of the following controllers and sub-systems:

a. Main Controller Board - This board is responsible for transmitter control and monitoring. However, with the distributed control architecture, it is not directly responsible for protection of the individual transmitter components. It merely gathers all status and fault data from the individual sub-systems and reports that information to the operator. The Main Controller is responsible for system level control (issues which effect multiple systems) since it is the only part of the con-trol system which can monitor the entire transmitter.

b. Module Controllers (1 in each module) - Responsible for protection and control of the PA Module. Report directly to the Main Controller Board.

c. Power Block Controller Board - Responsible for control and monitoring of the power supplies and distribution of the low voltage. Also responsible for monitor-ing the cooling system, including temperature, flow and leaks. Monitors tempera-ture of combiner reject loads. Reports directly to the Main Controller.

d. External I/O Board - Provides all customer interface connections including paral-lel remote control and serial remote control. Reports directly to the Main Control-ler.

e. RFU - Interfaces with the controller to monitor and select exciter inputs, provide cabinet VSWR protection, and monitor output power

1.2.4.1 Graphical User Interface

The front panel user interface is a 1/4 VGA, LCD touchscreen display. The touchscreen display uses software buttons to monitor the transmitter. Hardware buttons for the primary transmitter functions such as ON, OFF, RAISE and LOWER are provided on the overlay panel next to the display.



Figure 1-6 Front Control Panel

1.2.4.2 Control System Communications

The control system uses a serial communications system called a CAN bus. CAN stands for Controller Area Network. The CAN bus is a closed loop serial network operated by the Main Controller Board. Each circuit board and module connected to the CAN bus is considered a node and therefore has a specific address. This allows the Main Controller to gather information from all parts of the transmitter and display it on the GUI. One big advantage of the CAN bus is that it requires only 2 wires of the system control ribbon cable, eliminating a large amount of discrete wiring which would otherwise be required.

For redundancy, the CAN bus is backed up by parallel hardwired control lines that allow the transmitter to stay on the air even if the CAN bus fails. The parallel control lines also provide the instantaneous OFF and RF MUTE commands necessary for transmitter protection.

1.2.4.3 In-System Programming or ISP

The use of the CAN bus for communication between the various Micro Modules in the transmitter also allows for easy updating of the software used in each transmitter sub-system via a serial port connection to an external computer. This is referred to as In-System Programming or ISP.

NOTE:Software does not need to be loaded into the transmitter unless new components are installed or an update is sent from Harris. The transmitter, as shipped from the factory, is preloaded and ready to run.

All software can also be upgraded remotely via the web network interface: eCDi.



1.2.4.4 Remote Control

The Atlas ISDB-T transmitter has the basic discrete wired parallel remote control with the standard connections for control, status and analog monitoring.

eCDi™ is an optional Transmitter Network Interface appliance that provides comprehensive remote control and monitoring of every data point within the transmitter. It includes an SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) manager which allows integration with most Control Systems via the Internet or LAN.

1.2.5 PA Module

The Atlas ISDB-T PA Module utilizes LDMOS (laterally diffused metal oxide semi-conductor) amplifiers to produce up to 465W average power output. Each module weighs approximately 23.6kg and can be removed while the transmitter is running. A single cabinet Atlas ISDB-T transmitter can have 2, 4, 6, or 8 PA modules to achieve the various power levels shown in Table 1-1. A block diagram of the PA module is shown in Figure 1-7.

Each PA module consists of the following components:

a. PA Module Controller Board - Responsible for all monitoring and protection of the module. Reports to the transmitter Main Controller via the CAN bus but is also connected to the parallel control lines in case the CAN bus is not operational.

b. Phase and Gain Board - Provides for module phase and gain adjustments to mini-mize module combiner reject power. Also provides for cabinet phasing in multi- cabinet transmitters to minimize cabinet combiner reject power.

c. Pre-driver Pallet - Provides enough power to drive the 2 way splitter and the 2 driver pallets.

d. Two (2) LDMOS Driver Pallets - Provide enough power to drive the 4 way split-ters and the inputs to the power amplifier pallets.

e. Pallet Splitter and Combiner - Actually two 4-way splitters and one 8-way com-biner.

f. Eight (8) LDMOS Amplifier Pallets - When combined, they provide up to 465 watts of average power at the output of the module.

g. Liquid Cooled Cold Plate - Mounted directly to the 8 LDMOS power amplifier pallets and power supplies for cooling.

h. RF Output Directional Coupler - Samples both Forward and Reflected power for metering, module automatic level control (ALC) and module VSWR protection.



i. Integrated Power Supply.

Each Atlas ISDB-T PA Module is a self-contained 465W amplifier including the power supply with its own internal control, monitoring and protection. The modules only receive basic On/Off, Mute, Restart, Phase and Gain commands from the transmitter control system. This means that each module will protect itself without relying on the system controller.



1.2.5.1 Module Control

The primary method for control and monitoring of the PA Modules is by the serial CAN (Controller Area Network) Bus. It is used for control, status and monitoring of all PA Module parameters and for the reporting of Module faults. As a backup to this serial control network, each PA Module has dedicated hardware control lines for functions such as On, Off, Restart and RF Mute.

Figure 1-7 PA Module Block Diagram



1.2.6 Transmitter Power Supplies

The control system in the transmitter is powered by two low voltage power supplies (LVPS).

An autotransformer provides 260VAC to each PA module’s integrated power supply. There it is rectified to 350VDC then applied to an array of DC/DC converters. Depending on the channel frequency, the DC/DC converter’s output is approximately 28Vdc - 32Vdc (30V typical) drain voltage.

1.2.7 Cooling System

The Atlas ISDB-T transmitter uses a 50/50 water/glycol liquid cooling system to remove the majority of the heat away from the transmitter but also has cabinet flushing fans to remove residual cabinet heat. A simplified block diagram of the liquid cooling system is shown in Figure 1-9. A simplified diagram of the liquid cooling system inside the transmitter cabinet is shown in Figure 1-10. The cooling system basically consists of:

a. Cooling System Control Panel

b. Pump Module

c. Heat Exchanger

d. Transmitter Cold Plates

1.2.7.1 Cooling System Control Panel

The cooling system control panel controls the pump module and the heat exchanger and is the interface to the transmitter control system. The cooling system control panel is connected to the External I/O board in the Atlas Transmitter for monitoring and control. It also supplies AC power to the pump module and interfaces the fault and status information from these units to the transmitter.

The cooling system control panel, shown in Figure 1-8 below, has local controls on the front which allow manual selection of pump A or optional pump B and selection of Remote/Local control. It also has the following status indicators:



• Remote

• Local

• Interlock

• Fan A ON

• Fan B ON

• *Pump A ON

• *Pump B ON

• Pump A Preset

• Pump B Preset

• *Coolant Fault

• *Coolant Low

• Power

Figure 1-8 Cooling System Control Panel

* These status indications are also sent to the transmitter for display on the GUI and via remote control.

When in Remote mode, the transmitter is responsible for control of the cooling system, including ON/OFF, manual pump selection and automatic pump switching in the case of a failure. Placing the control panel in Local mode allows manual switching of the pumps using the pump select buttons on the cooling control panel.

The lower half of the control panel contains the AC isolation switch which disconnects AC power from the pump module as well as the control circuitry in the control panel itself. The pump control panel is typically mounted on the pump module assembly and normally installed within eyesight of the transmitter (usually next to the transmitter disconnect panel).

1.2.7.2 Pump Module

The pump module is a self-contained unit with a storage tank, pressure and temperature gauges, a strainer filter and optional dual pumps operating in main/standby mode. The pump module is designed for indoor mounting.



Figure 1-9 Simplified Liquid Cooling System Block Diagram

1.2.7.3 Heat Exchanger

The heat exchanger, which is typically installed outside, has 2 or 3 fans depending on transmitter model. The fans are enabled whenever the pump module is activated, but temperature sensors determine when the fans will actually start. The first fan is factory set to turn on when the coolant temperature reaches 32oC with the second one turning on at 38oC; these settings are adjustable.

1.2.7.4 Transmitter PA Module and Combiner Cold Plates

Each PA Module has an attached liquid cooled cold plate which connects to the cooling system with flexible hoses and quick release connectors. There are also cold plates inside the combiner to which all of the internal combiner reject loads are attached. See Figure 1-10 for cabinet coolant routing.



Figure 1-10 Internal Transmitter Liquid Cooling System

(Single Cabinet Shown)

1.2.8 Apex ISDB-T Exciter

The Apex ISDB-T exciter is used with the Atlas ISDB-T transmitter. This exciter is described in a separate instruction book. A second hot standby exciter, and drive chain switcher is available as an option. The Apex exciter communicates with the main controller via the CAN bus (Controller Area Network). Configuration editing, diagnostics and monitoring is possible using the 1/4 VGA graphical user interface (GUI) display or, via RS-232 or Ethernet ports provided with the exciter. The Ethernet ports on the exciters connect to the eCDi unit as shown in the cabinet wiring diagram.



1.3 General Specifications

NOTE:Specifications subject to change without notice.

Figure 1-11 Atlas ISDB-T Specifications - Part I

Item Units Conditions Notes Value

GeneralFrequency Range MHz 470-806

Channel Bandwidth MHz 6

Model Power in kW

DVI850 0.85

DVI1700 1.7

DVI2500 2.5

DVI3400 3.4

DVI5000 5.0

DVI6800 6.8

DVI7500 7.5

DVI9000 10

RF Load Impedance Ohms 50

RF Load VSWRMeasured on any 6MHz channel. Includes

Bandpass Filter, into test load

Meets all published

specifications 1.1:1

RF Load VSWRMaximum permitted for safe transmitter

operation 1.5:1

Model Connector Size

DVI850 3-1/8" EIA Flanged








Data Input 1, Low Priority

Input Rate Mbps w/ buffered monitor out 270

Impedance Ohms 75

Standard DVB-ASI EN 50083-9

Connector BNC Female

Data Input 2, High Priority

Input Rate Mbps w/ buffered monitor out 270

Impedance Ohms 75

Standard DVB-ASI EN 50083-9


External Frequency Reference Input

Frequency MHz 10

Impedance Ohms 50 Ohms

Level dBm Sinusoidal waveform 0 10 dBm


External 1 PPS Input

Impedance Ohms 10k

Level TTL level


Atlas ISDTV Transmitter Specifications

Output Power (after mask filter) kW

Antenna OutputEIA Std.Output Connector



Figure 1-12 Atlas ISDB-T Specifications - Part II

Item Units Conditions Notes Value

PerformanceModulation Error Ratio (MER) dB 32

Shoulder Level dB

Meets or exceeds

specified non-critical, sub-

critical, or critical masks

Occupied Bandwidth MHz < 5.7

Frequency Tolerance (without external reference) Hz 200/month

Frequency Tolerance (with external reference) Hz 1

Stability of Output Power % 2Freq. Offset Rel. to Carrier

Freq. Phase Noise

10Hz -65

100Hz -85

1kHz -85

10kHz -95

100kHz -113

1Mhz -130

>15MHz from band center 60

<15MHz from band center 60

AC LineAC Line Voltage VAC 3-phase 50/60 Hz, WYE or Delta Selected at time order 208, 220, 240, 380, 400, 415

AC Line Voltage Variation % From nominal selected voltage 10

Phase imbalance %Difference of one phase to the average of all

3 phases. 3

Power Factor cos > 0.90

Overall Efficiency (typical) % AC power to RF average power Excludes cooling system 15

Power Consumption (typical) kW Dependent on system power level

26.3kW, 81A per phase for

DVI3400 operating @ 208VAC

EnvironmentalOperational Temperature Range °C Derate 2 degree C per 300m AMSL 0 - 45

Storage Temperature °C -20 +60

Operational Relative Humidity % Non-condensing 0 - 90

Altitude meters AMSL

Derate max temparture 2

degree C per 300m AMSL 0 - 4000

Cooling Method (primary) % Liquid cooling

Ethyle or Propylene Glycol /

Water 50/50

Acoustic Noise dBAMeasured 1m from front of cabinet and 1.5m

up from the floor

Does not include cooling pump

module and heat exchanger < 65

Residual Heat transferred to room kW Maximum per PA Cabinet with 8PAs 1.8kW

PhysicalModel Size

Single Cabinet Transmitter 1 Cabinet Models 645W x 1,996H x 1,222D

Two Cabinet Transmitter 2 Cabinet Models 1,239W x 1,996H x 1,222D

Three Cabinet Transmitter 3 Cabinet Model 1,833W x 1,996H x 1,222D

Model Weight

DVI850 489

DVI1700 540

DVI2500 648

DVI3400 1,040

DVI5000 1146

DVI6800 1254

DVI7500 1752DVI9000 1860

Atlas ISDTV Transmitter Specifications

Phase Noise

Weight Kg

Dimensions

Measured at exciter LO Output

Weight includes all options

mm

Referenced to avg. transmiter

powerdB

Suppression of

Conducted Spurious Radiation

dBc


Section 2Installation /Initial Turn-On


2
2.1 Introduction
This section includes the information necessary for installation and initial turn on of an Atlas ISDB-T solid state, UHF TV transmitter. Due to the modular nature of the Atlas, all models have similar installation and testing procedures.

2.2 Documentation

The following is a list of documentation that ships with the transmitter. Find and save all documentation. The top level Document Package numbers for each transmitter model are shown below:

• DVI850, DVI1700, DVI2500, DVI3400: 988-2004-018

• DVI5000, DVI6800: 988-2004-024

• DVI7500, DVI9000: 988-2004-025

A Document Package includes:

1. This technical manual

2. Drawing Package with a complete set of installation schematics for the transmitter system

2.2.1 Installation Drawings

It is recommended that you look through the drawing package to familiarize yourself with the information available. Although drawings are provided for most assemblies in the transmitter, most of the installation and planning information is given in the following drawings (see Table 2-1 below for model-specific numbers):

2-1 to servicing.

Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-On ATLAS ISDB-T

a. Outline Drawing - Shows connections for AC, control, coolant lines and RF out-put. Also gives cabinet dimensions, required cabinet clearances and a table of basic requirements for all models.

b. AC Power Flow Diagram - Shows overall AC wiring and has information on proper wire, fuse and breaker sizes as well as location of disconnects.

c. RF Equipment Layout - Shows a typical placement of the transmitter RF components based on minimum required clearances.

d. System Interconnect Diagram - Shows interconnect wiring between transmitter and all external systems, including AC connections.

e. Wiring Diagram (Main Cabinet) and Wiring Diagram Additional PA Cabinet (for multi-cabinet models) - Interconnection wiring diagram for all assemblies inside the main transmitter cabinet or additional PA cabinets.

f. Intercabinet Wiring Diagram - Indicates the connections between multiple PA cabinets, and jumper ID settings (for the DVI5000, DVI6800 and DVI10000 models).

g. Cooling System Outline - Shows specifications, dimensions and basic requirements for the Pump Module and Heat Exchanger units.

h. Liquid Cooling System Layout - Shows basic plumbing component locations and connections, flow rate and pressure information as well as simplified cooling diagrams.

i. Cooling System Electrical Diagram - Shows the internal workings of the Cooling Control Panel and all interconnects with transmitter, pump module and heat exchanger, including AC connections.


Section 2 Installation / Initial Turn-OnATLAS ISDB-T

Table 2-1 Model-Specific Documentation Numbers

DE

SC

RIP

TIO

ND

VI8

50

DV

I17

00

DV

I25

00

DV

I34

00

DV

I50

00

DV

I68

00

DV

I75

00

DV

I90

00

Nu

mb

er

of

Ca

bin

ets

(fo

r re

fere

nce

)1

11

22

33

Fo

rma

t B

OM

(fo

r re

fere

nce

)9

94

-99

34

-00

39

94

-99

35

-00

39

94

-99

36

-00

39

94

-99

37

-00

39

94

-99

38

-00

39

94

-99

39

-00

39

94

-99

47

-00

39

94

-99

48

-00

3

Sy

ste

m D

raw

ing

sC

ove

r S

he

et

(Syste

m L

eve

l)

Wirin

g D

iag

ram

Ma

in C

ab

ine

t

Wirin

g D

iag

ram

Ad

ditio

na

l P

A C

ab

ine

t

Ou

tlin

e D

raw

ing

Liq

uid

Co

olin

g S

yste

m L

ayo

ut

RF

Syste

m L

ayo

ut

Syste

m I

nte

rco

nn

ect

AC

Po

we

r F

low

Blo

ck D

iag

ram

Tra

nsm

issio

n L

ine

Le

ng

ths

DP

& M

an

ua

lsD

ocu

me

nt

Pa

cka

ge

, T

ran

sm

itte

r

Sch

em

atic p

acka

ge

Te

ch

Ma

nu

al, T

ran

sm

itte

r

Do

cu

me

nt

Pa

cka

ge

, A

pe

x e

xcite

r

91

7-2

41

6-7

70

98

8-2

00

4-0

24

98

8-2

00

4-0

25

91

7-2

41

6-7

71

82

2-1

34

8-0

86

82

2-1

34

8-0

87

84

3-5

58

5-1

78

84

3-5

27

6-0

84

84

3-5

58

5-1

83

84

3-5

58

5-1

81

84

3-5

27

5-9

96

84

3-5

58

5-1

18

84

3-5

58

5-2

32

88

8-2

68

4-0

01

Atl

as

IS

DT

V N/A

84

3-5

58

5-1

74

83

9-8

13

5-0

78

98

8-2

00

4-0

18

84

3-5

58

5-1

73

N/A

84

3-5

58

5-1

05

84

3-5

58

5-1

46

84

3-5

58

5-1

02

84

3-5

58

5-1

75

94

3-5

58

5-1

73

98

8-2

68

6-0

01

84

3-5

58

5-1

79

83

9-8

13

5-0

99

84

3-5

58

5-1

33

84

3-5

58

5-1

77

84

3-5

58

5-2

34

84

3-5

58

5-1

84

84

3-5

58

5-1

82

83

9-8

13

5-0

79

84

3-5

58

5-2

33



2.3 Installation Checkboxes

Located to the left of each important step in the installation procedure is a checkbox like the one to the left of this paragraph. As each step in the procedure is completed, the box should be checked. This provides a quick confidence check at the end of the procedure that no steps were skipped. The primary goal of each step is indicated by bold letters, with the rest of the paragraph being support information toward that goal.

NOTE:In case of discrepancy between the connections listed in the schematics versus the information given in this installation section, the wiring information in the sche-matics should be considered the most accurate. All connections listed in this sec-tion should be verified with the schematics before initial turn on.

2.4 Transmitter Cabinet Placement

The transmitter cabinet(s) should be placed where it(they) will have approximately 1 meter clearance in the back. The front of the transmitter should have a clearance of at least 1.5 meters to allow access for removal and installation of the PA modules. There are several drawings included in the drawing package to help plan the cabinet placement:

• Outline Drawing

• RF Equipment Layout

• Liquid Cooling System Layout

Remove the bolts or straps holding the transmitter to the wooden pallet and carefully slide the cabinet off the pallet.

Remove the rear door and set it aside in a safe place for the rest of the installation process.

MULTI-CABINET MODELS:

Place cabinets in position and carefully align.

Attach joining brackets.



ALL MODELS:

Install and adjust the leveling feet as necessary to make sure the transmitter is level and solid (not rocking). The feet are necessary if the drip tray is to be installed underneath the transmitter.

Install Drip Tray. If the drip tray is to be installed the leveling feet must first be installed. Slide and center the tray underneath the Atlas transmitter. Be sure drain hose from above exits into the tray.

NOTE:Do not open the packaging for, or install the PA modules at this time. These will be installed just before the initial turn on procedure.

2.5 Cooling System Installation

The standard Atlas ISDB-T transmitter colling system is a hose-based system, but supplied with pre-assembled hard copper components such as manifolds. Soldering is not required.

The major components of the Atlas cooling system include the pump module, cooling control panel, heat exchanger, and plumbing kit. The following procedures will rely heavily on the following documentation:

a. Electrical Installation Diagram

b. AC Power Flow Diagram

c. System Interconnect Diagram

d. Liquid Cooling System Layout

e. Pump Module Outline

f. Heat Exchanger Specification

g. Appendix B Cooling System Help chapter in this manual

When planning the installation, keep the following restrictions in mind:

a. The pump module, heat exchanger and transmitter’s total coolant plumbing cir-cuit must not exceed 40 meters.

b. The cooling control panel is typically mounted on the pump module and should be positioned so the front panel can be readily viewed. Provisions can be made for locating the control panel away from the pump module if required.



NOTE:If any of these restrictions cannot be met, a site-specific modification may be required. Contact your Harris representative for modifications.

! WARNING:DISABLE AND LOCK OUT STATION PRIMARY POWER BEFORE PRIMARY POWER CABLES ARE CONNECTED TO THE EQUIPMENT.

Set the pump module and heat exchanger in place.

The pump module should be installed inside the building and positioned in a manner which will allows access to the front and rear of the unit. A minimum of 2 feet (0.6 meter) clearance in front and back of the pump module is required. The pump module does not require access from the sides.

The heat exchanger assembly should be located outside the building on a level concrete pad and securely fastened with anchor bolts. It should be oriented so that plumbing connections minimize hose length. In addition, the heat exchanger should be oriented so that access to the fans, fan motors and electrical panel can be accomplished. A clearance of 3 ft. (1 meter) on the sides of the heat exchanger unit is required.

! CAUTION:ENSURE THE PROPER EQUIPMENT IS AVAILABLE TO SAFELY INSTALL THE UNIT. EXTREME CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED DURING THE FOLLOWING STEPS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE OR PERSONNEL INJURY.

a. Lift the unit into a horizontal position using manufacturer’s recommended lifting points

b. Install the leg channels and brace angles

c. Carefully place assembled unit onto concrete pad

d. Fasten unit to the concrete pad

Install safety warning labels. Locate and install according to included instructions.

Install all supply and return plumbing. Carefully assemble all pipe assemblies, valves, plugs, meters, elbows, adapters, and hose, to the transmitter, pump module, heat exchanger, reject and test loads according to the drawings (see Appendix B section "B.2 Plumbing System Installation" section for this step).



Install the sidestream filter element. The filter element (it was removed from the canister prior to shipment) should be installed in the canister at this time. The canister should be installed hand tight. Close the filter supply valve. It can be opened after the system is cleaned and flushed.

Connect conduit and route AC to the Pump Module control panel for AC mains supply. Install and wire according to diagram and local wiring codes.

Connect conduit and route AC cabling to heat exchanger for AC mains supply. Install and wire according to diagram and local wiring codes.

Connect one conduit from the control panel to the heat exchanger, for status and control cable. Install and wire according to diagram an d local wiring codes.

! CAUTION:SMALL SIGNAL (CONTROL/MONITORING) WIRES AND THE AC WIRING SHOULD NEVER BE RUN IN THE SAME CONDUIT.

Open (OFF) all Isolator switches on the Pump Module cooling control panel, pump module and heat exchanger. This will allow them to be closed (ON) one at a time later to check for wiring problems.

2.5.1 Cooling Control Panel and H.E. Wiring

Connect the AC mains wiring to the Heat Exchanger (HE). Follow the AC Power Flow Diagrams and Electrical Installation Diagrams mentioned at the beginning of this section. Also refer to manufacturer supplied schematic and connection guide.



Figure 2-1 Cooling Control Panel Terminals

Connect the control and status wires between the cooling control panel and the heat exchanger with the supplied multi-conductor cable. These connections are shown on the System Interconnect Drawing. These low level signals connect from terminals in the heat exchanger to the cooling control panel. Table 2-2 is a connection reference chart.

Figure 2-2 Typical Heat Exchanger Panel Electrical Connections

X1



NOTE:Condensation can occur in the conduit leading to the outside heat exchanger from the control panel. This conduit should be caulked or sealed after the system is tested and operational.

NOTE:Refer to Table 2-2. Zone 1 refers to the first fan in a dual fan heat exchanger. Zone 2 refers to the second fan in a dual fan heat exchanger.

Table 2-2 Heat Exchanger Control and Status Connections

Cooling Control Panel Heat Exchanger #1

X5-1 71 Fan Run Command (source 24VAC)

X5-2 70 Fan Run Command Return

X5-3 80 Fan Status Zone 1 (source +5VDC)

X5-4 81 Fan Status Zone 1 Return

X5-5 82 Fan Status Zone 2 ** (source +5VDC)

X5-6 83 Fan Status Zone 2 Return **

X5-13 Grounding Bar (GND)

Cooling Control Panel Standby Heat Exchanger**

X5-7 71 Fan Run Command (source 24VAC)

X5-8 70 Fan Run Command Return

X5-9 80 Fan Status Zone 1 (source +5VDC)

X5-10 81 Fan Status Zone 1 Return

X5-11 82 Fan Status Zone 2 ** (source +5VDC)

X5-12 83 Fan Status Zone 2 Return **

X5-13 Grounding Bar (GND)

These connections should be verified using Schematic.** indicates not used in all configurations.



2.5.2 Continue Cooling System Installation

Connect the control and status wires between the cooling control panel and the transmitter with the supplied multi-conductor cable. These low level signals connect from terminals X3-1 through X3-12 in the cooling control panel to J12-1 through J12-12 on the External I/O board in the transmitter (pin for pin connection).

Figure 2-3 External I/O Board Cooling Connections: J12 & J18

Connect the test load flow switch to J18-9 and J18-10 on the External I/O board in the transmitter (see the next step for air cooled applications).This will mute the transmitter RF output if there is no coolant flow through the test load (provided the Patch Panel is in position 2, transmitter to test load). Specified wire is 7-2-4C, 4 conductor cable. A closed contact is required to operate the transmitter. Some switches may also use +15V and ground. The connections are as follows:

• J18-9 to flow switch terminal 1 (common)

• J18-10 to flow switch terminal 3 (N.O.)

Depending on the switch the following may also be required:

• J11-1 (+15Vdc) to flow switch terminal 2 (+DC)

• J11-6 (ground) to flow switch terminal 4 (-DC)

J18 - FromLoad Flow Switch

J12 - To/From

Control PanelCooling



If there is a temperature overload switch on the water cooled test load, it can be connected to J18-11 and J18-12. This open interlock contact will mute the transmitter RF output if the test load temperature threshold is exceeded (while the transmitter is operating into the test load). A jumper is installed at the factory which must be removed to use this input. J18-9 and J18-10 must be jumpered if they are not used.

In instances where an air-cooled test load with an over-temp switch is used, connect the two leads to J18-9 (common) & J18-10 (N.C.) and jumper pins J18-11 & J18-12 if not used.

NOTE:Patch Panel status signals will tell the Main Controller to ignore this interlock if the transmitter output is currently routed into the antenna.



2.6 Transmitter AC Connection

For conduit connections to the transmitter refer to the Outline Drawing Top View.

MULTI-CABINET NOTE:AC Connections will be similar across all cabinets in multi-cabinet transmitter models. Be sure to verify all connections using the correct schematic drawings.

! WARNING:DISABLE AND LOCK OUT STATION PRIMARY POWER BEFORE PRIMARY POWER CABLES ARE CONNECTED TO THE EQUIPMENT.

NOTE:The Atlas transmitter uses a 3-phase autotransformer. No neutral connection is required in the cabinet. DO NOT run a neutral connection to the transmitter as there is no connection point and the neutral should not be connected to the cabinet ground. A safety ground wire is required and connects to E2 which is shown in Figure 2-4 on page 2-13.

The Atlas ISDB-T transmitters are 3 phase 208/220/240Vac or 3 phase 380/400/415Vac at 50/60Hz delta or wye. If voltage variations in excess of ±10% are anticipated, the transmitter power input must be equipped with automatic voltage regulators (optional equipment) capable of correcting the mains voltage.

NOTE:It is important that the correct voltage and configuration be specified as the MOV protection components are different for delta or wye configurations.

Connect the Primary AC conduit to the top of the transmitter cabinet.The top of the transmitter cabinet has pre-cut holes for conduit connections as shown in the Outline Drawing.

NOTE:For the following two steps it may be helpful to remove the top access cover of the transmitter.

Connect the AC wires to the primary AC terminal block TB5.The AC input wires will connect to TB5 located beneath an access plate on top of the cabinet (on the ceiling of the transmitter see Figure 2-4, below). It will be necessary to



use a screw driver to insert-and-pry open the terminal block clamp in order to insert the cable. Release the clamp to secure the cable firmly in place.

Connect the safety ground wire to TB5. Connect AC safety ground to smaller terminal located nearest to sidewall.

Figure 2-4 AC Connections to Terminal Block TB5

Verify that the Primary AC line voltage is correct for the installed MOV board. Measure the primary AC line voltage from phase to phase and write it in the blank below. The transmitter was setup in the factory with a 208/220/240 or 380/400/415Vac Delta or WYE 3 phase configured MOV board. Make sure that the transmitter is set up for the same power configuration used at the site by checking the factory test data sheet.

VAC

NOTE:There must be less than a 10% imbalance between any one phase and the average of all three phases to allow the transmitter to operate, however the phase imbal-ance must be 5% or less to meet transmitter specifications.

AC PrimaryConnections

AC Safety GroundConnection Point



2.7 Signal and Ground Connections

NOTE:Control and signal wires should never be run in the same conduit with any AC wiring. A separate conduit should be used for control and signal cables.

Connect the ASI inputs, external reference, and sample cables from the Forward and Reflected directional couplers - including the RTAC sample coupler - at the system output (after the filter). These samples connect to a small I/O panel mounted to the ceiling of the cabinet. If necessary, these samples will be calibrated using the GUI after initial turn-on (see "5.5 Power Calibrations" on page 5-9). These cables are not pre-assembled since the required length is determined at each site.

Connect a ground strap from each cabinet’s E1 ground block to the station ground. A roll of copper strapping is shipped with the transmitter already attached to E1. Roll this strap out and attach to station ground. If any additional copper strap is needed, it must be at least 5cm wide and 0.5mm thick.

2.8 Intercabinet Connections

For multi-cabinet transmitter models DVI5000, DVI6800, DVI7500, and DVI9000, the inter cabinet connections will need to be installed next. See the appropriate System Interconnect Wiring Diagram for reference.

2.9 External Interlock Connections

2.9.1 Fault-Off External Interlocks (J18)

The transmitter has inputs for up to four external Fault-Off interlocks on the External I/O Board. More interlocks may be incorporated by placing 2 or more interlocks in series. The transmitter is shipped from the factory with jumpers in the External Interlock posi-tions which will allow the transmitter to operate with no external interlock connections. The System Interconnect drawing shows that Interlock #1, J18-1 to J18-2, is used by the 3 Port Patch Panel or possibly a motorized switch. The other three are to be used at the customer’s discretion. The External Interlock circuit requires a closed connection on the following External I/O Board terminals to allow the transmitter to turn on:

• J18 pins 1-2 (connected to Output Patch Panel or switch interlocks)

• J18 pins 3-4



• J18 pins 5-6

• J18 pins 7-8

NOTE:Fault-Off interlocks will shut the transmitter off if opened and are provided for use in protection of personnel.

2.9.2 RF Mute External Interlock Connections (J18)

There are 2 additional interlock connections that can be used to apply a temporary RF Mute condition (vs. a Fault OFF condition as discussed above). The transmitter will RF mute when the interlock is open and automatically unmute when the interlock is restored to a close condition. These are:

• J18-9 to J18-10 (for test load flow, or test load thermal interlock)

• J18-11 to J18-12 (for test load flow, or test load thermal interlock)

! WARNING:RF MUTE INTERLOCKS SHOULD NOT TO BE USED IN ANY SITUATION WHERE PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL IS AN ISSUE.

The two RF Mute interlocks associated with J18 (described above) are only active when the transmitter is in the Test Load mode. They are not active when the transmitter is in the Antenna mode. When the transmitter is in the Antenna mode (normal mode), this logic allows the RF test load flow to be turned off without causing an RF mute condition in the transmitter.

While these RF mute interlocks can be used for any purpose where it is desired to mute the RF temporarily, their primary purpose is for use on a flow switch in a water cooled resistive load.

When the transmitter is first turned on there is little or no coolant flow and if a flow switch is interlocked to the Fault OFF interlock (J18, 1-8), the transmitter cannot be turned on. However, by connecting the flow switch to an RF Mute interlock, only the RF output is held off until the coolant flow is present.

The transmitter is shipped from the factory with jumpers in the RF Mute interlock posi-tions on J18 which will allow the transmitter to operate without external interlock con-nected.



2.9.3 RF Mute External Interlock Connections (J11)

Another interlock connection on J11 can be used to apply an RF Mute:

• J11-10 to J11-12 (for water cooled reject load flow, or air cooled reject load thermal protection, in multi-cabinet systems)

! WARNING:NOT TO BE USED IN ANY SITUATION WHERE PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL IS REQUIRED.

The difference between the J11 interlock and the J18 RF Mute interlock is that the J11 interlock is always active – regardless of Load or Antenna mode.

As shown in the Electrical Installation drawing the J11-10 to J11-12 RF Mute interlock should be connected to the reject load flow switch in multi cabinet applications. The RF Mute interlock could also be used for an RF switch changeover or a dummy load ther-mal interlock.

The transmitter is shipped from the factory with a jumper in the RF Mute interlock positions on J11 which will allow the transmitter to operate without an external interlock connected.

2.10 Patch Panel Connections

Refer to the Electrical Installation drawing for Patch Panel connections:

! CAUTION:ALWAYS SHUT THE TRANSMITTER OFF BEFORE REMOVING THE PATCH PANEL TO PREVENT POSSIBLE DAMAGE TO THE CONTACTS.

IMPORTANT: This note only applies to systems without a patch panel or RF switch.

If no patch panel or switch is to be installed in the transmitter RF output line, then a jumper must be placed on the External I/O board from J14-3 (RF_SW_A_STAT) to J14-1 (ground).



2.11 Initial Cooling System Turn ON

NOTE:For further Cooling System start up information see the pump module and heat exchanger manufacturer technical manuals and Appendix B Cooling System Help section.

Verify trip levels for the Pump Module pumps inside the Cooling Control Panel. If necessary, rotate the contactor trip level threshold to match the full load current (FLC) of the corresponding pump or fan motor. The pump load current is given on a metal plate affixed to each motor. See Table 2-3 on page 2-18 for reference.

The contactor switching mode is set to the desired position. Manual position will allow pump contactor to reset on pump failure only when the blue button is pushed by the operator. Automatic will allow a reset to occur a few seconds after an overload without operator action. The recommended mode is MANUAL

Verify contactor trip is set to Manual. If necessary, rotate the trip control to Man for manual reset in the event of a trip.

Figure 2-5 Pump Trip Level Setting

Pump Trip Level

Adjustments



Table 2-3 Typical Pump Trip Level Settings

NOTE:Table 2-3 provides typical reference values only. Values given are for a single pump module. Check the pump motor labels to verify the actual Full Load Cur-rent (FLC) ratings for each setting.

Energize the AC mains supply to the Cooling Control Panel.

Turn ON the AC mains disconnect (isolator) switch on the Pump Module Cooling Control Panel. This will supply AC power to the Pump Module. AC power is supplied to the heat exchanger via a separate mains supply line, fuses and disconnect switch as shown in the cooling system wiring diagram.

Press the Local button on the Cooling Control Panel (LED should illuminate). There are two operational modes for the cooling pumps: Local and Remote. The selection is made on the Cooling Control Panel. In the Remote mode, pump changeover is controlled by the transmitter. In local, the cooling control panel buttons (front) select the pumps. The local mode can be used for start-up, testing and troubleshooting. In either local or remote modes pump operation requires an enable signal from the transmitter or, if the transmitter is not operational, then temporary jumpers may be installed in the cooling control panel to allow operation of the pump without the transmitter connection. The temporary jumper configuration is described in "2.11.1.1 Starting the Pump" on page 2-21

Select Pump A on Cooling Control Panel (LED should illuminate).

Fill the pump module tank with water. The reservoir is filled via the tank vent cap shown in Figure 2-6. See section B.1 Coolant and Water Recommendations in Appendix B for more information.

60 Hz 50 Hz

Atlas Transmitter# of PA

CabinetsPump

HP

208/230 VAC

Mains

460 VAC

Mains Pump

kW

220-240 VAC

Mains

380-415

VAC Mains

DVI850, DVI1700, or DVI2500

1 3 8.2-7.8A 3.9A 2.2 8.25A 4.75A

DVI3400 1 5 12.0A 6.0A 4.4 8.25A 4.75A

DVI5000 or DVI6800, 2 5 12.0A 6.0A 4.4 13.8A 8A

DVI7500 or DVI9000 3 7.5 27.5A 16.0A 5.5 N/A 11.0



Figure 2-6 Tank Vent Cap

! CAUTION:IF FREEZING CONDITIONS EXIST DURING CHECKOUT AND FLUSHING PROCEDURES, THE FLUSHING PROCEDURE AND SUBSEQUENT FILL WITH FINAL GLYCOL/WATER MUST BE FINISHED BEFORE STILL WATER IS ALLOWED TO REMAIN IN HEAT EXCHANGER. IF PROCEDURE CANNOT BE FINISHED, CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO PREVENT WATER FROM FREEZING IN OUTSIDE COOLING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT. SHOULD A DELAY BE ENCOUNTERED DURING THE FLUSHING/CLEANING PROCESS THE HEAT EXCHANGER COULD BE COVERED WITH A TARP AND HEAT APPLIED FROM AN EXTERNAL SOURCE LIKE A PORTABLE HEATER (WITH THE PUMP RUNNING) TO PREVENT THE WATER FROM FREEZING UNTIL FLUSHING CAN BE RESUMED. IF WATER REMAINS IN OUTSIDE EQUIPMENT LONG ENOUGH TO FREEZE, THE UNITS WILL BE DAMAGED. PUMP A MIXTURE OF GLYCOL/WATER INTO OUTSIDE EQUIPMENT TO PREVENT DAMAGE.

NOTE:The system cannot be filled to capacity at this time. Water must be added as pipes and equipment fill up during initial pump turn on. The reservoir tank is equipped with level switches which will issue a warning when the water level is low and shut the pump off if the water level is below the fault level.

Tank Vent Cap



! CAUTION:DO NOT TURN ON THE PUMP VIA THE PUMP ISOLATOR SWITCH AT THIS TIME.

Close cabinet (all cabinets if multi-cabinet Atlas) supply and return line valves. Keep closed until all leak testing, cleaning and flushing steps are completed to keep contaminants out of the PA modules and chiller plates.

Close Test Load supply and return line valves (if water cooled). Keep closed until all leak testing, cleaning and flushing steps are completed to keep contaminants out of the test load.

Close Side stream filter supply valve. Keep closed until all leak testing, cleaning and flushing steps are completed to keep contaminants out of the filter.

Open transmitter input and output manifold bypass valves.

Open the Pump Module and Heat Exchanger supply and return valves. Leave the transmitter supply and return valves closed - along with any reject or test load valves.

2.11.1 Venting Air from Pump

! WARNING:FAILURE TO PERFORM THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE MAY DAMAGE THE PUMP AND CONTAMINATE THE COOLANT AND TRANSMITTER. DO NOT RUN THE PUMP MORE THAN 15 SECONDS WITHOUT NORMAL FLOW OF COOLANT. LONGER RUNNING WITHOUT COOLANT CAN DAMAGE THE PUMP SEALS.

Use this procedure whenever the coolant level in the tank has been below the intake of either of the pumps. This intake is about 1 inch [25 mm] above the bottom of the tank. The procedure must be performed separately on each pump if there are two pumps in a module tank and the coolant has been drained. If a single pump has been removed from a pump module, the procedure need only be performed on the pump which has been removed.

Theory of operation: The check valve at the output of each pump requires about 1 psi pressure to open. When the tank is filled, the closed check valve may not allow the coolant to enter the pump, and the pump will not produce pressure. It may be necessary to vent the air from the pump to allow the level of coolant in the pump to equalize with the level of coolant in the tank.



2.11.1.1 Starting the Pump

In order to start the pump the transmitter must be powered up and connected to the pump module. If the transmitter has not yet been powered up or if it has not been connected to the pump module use the following jumpers to allow independent operation of the pump module for filling and flushing.

The pump module can be operated independently, without being attached to the transmitter. In order to operate properly, without the transmitter connected, jumpers are required on the X3 terminal board inside the Cooling Control Box. Jumper X3-1 to X3-6, X3-2 to X3-3 to X3-9, and X3-9 to X3-10. See jumpers in Figure 2-7.

Figure 2-7 X3 Jumpers in Cooling Control Box

! CAUTION:THE X3 JUMPERS DESCRIBED IN FIGURE 2-7 SHOULD ONLY BE INSTALLED WHEN THE TRANSMITTER I/O PANEL IS NOT CONNECTED TO THE COOLING CONTROL PANEL. INSTALLING THE JUMPERS WITH THE TRANSMITTER ATTACHED TO THE COOLING CONTROL BOX MAY DAMAGE THE TRANSMITTER I/O BOARD OR THE COOLING CONTROLLER.

X3-6X3-1

X3-10



Start the pump. If the pump does not produce pressure and flow within 15 seconds, shut it off. It will be necessary to vent the pump output to the ambient air pressure. With AC power to the pump shut off, remove the vent plug (location shown in Figure 2-8 on page 2-22 or in some instances on the adapter closest to the motor housing) for at least 10 seconds and then replace it. This allows the pump to fill with coolant. Then start the pump and check for normal coolant flow as described above.

If the coolant system is leak free it will be necessary to vent air from the higher parts of the pipework going to the transmitter. This is to avoid air in the return being mixed into the coolant. An air vent valve with a hose connection should be installed in this line. Use a short hose and a bucket to vent the air. When coolant flows from the vent valve, immediately close the valve and collect the coolant in the bucket for return to the pump module tank.

Figure 2-8 Pump Vent Valve/Plug

Turn ON the AC mains (Isolator) switch for the A Pump. Proceed to next step to verify proper pump rotation.

Verify correct pump rotation: Turn OFF pump isolator switch and observe the pump fin rotation through the top of the housing (see picture Figure 2-8 on page 2-22) as the pump spins down.

Vent Valve Location



• If rotation is opposite of arrow, Turn off primary AC power to Cooling Control Panel and swap any two AC phases (of the corresponding pump) inside the Pump Module panel. Restore AC power, and turn the pump isolator ON then OFF to verify pump rotation.

Figure 2-9 Pump Directional Arrows

Select Pump B on Cooling Control Panel (LED should illuminate). Repeat pump priming, turn ON, and rotation checks for Pump B.

Turn ON the AC safety disconnect switches going to the Heat Exchanger.

2.11.2 Heat Exchanger Fan Rotation

Verify correct Heat Exchanger fan rotation - The following steps should be followed to activate the fans and verify the rotation of the heat exchanger fan blades:

1. Open the heat exchanger access panel.

2. Lower thermostat control "A" to a value that is below ambient temperature to activate fan.

3. Observe direction of fan rotation.

4. If the heat exchanger blade rotation is opposite of the arrow indication, Turn off primary AC power to the Cooling Control Panel and to the Heat Exchanger and swap any two AC phases inside the heat exchanger safety disconnect panel. Restore AC power, then switch the heat exchanger isolator on and off to verify fan rotation.

5. Repeat the process for additional fans as required.

DirectionalArrows



Verify remaining Heat Exchanger fan rotation. Repeat above step for 2nd (and 3rd if used) fan.

2.11.3 Initial System Leak Tests

Turn on pump A for several minutes. Upon the establishment of a steady (no air bursts) volume of water throughout the system, begin visual check for leaks. Turn off Pump A after thorough leak checks.

Turn on pump B for several minutes. Upon the establishment of a steady (no air bursts) volume of water throughout the system, continue visual check for leaks. Turn off Pump B after thorough leak checks.

! CAUTION:THE SYSTEM MUST BE TESTED FOR LEAKS AGAIN ONCE THE REQUIRED 50/50 GLYCOL/WATER MIXTURE HAS FILLED THE ENTIRE SYSTEM LATER IN THE INSTALLATION PROCESS.

NOTE:The transmitter is equipped with a leak detector which shuts down the pumps in the event of a leak. The leak detector activates when liquid enters its reservoir. There are four holes in the metal shelf underneath the PA coolant hoses to allow the liquid to enter. These holes must be free of obstructions. If there is tape cover-ing these holes (installed during factory testing), remove the tape.

Check immediately for any leaks at the following cooling system points.

• Transmitter inlet and outlet connections at the manifolds

• Pump module inlet and outlet connections

• Heat exchanger inlet and outlet connections

• Test Load valve connections

• Test Load Flow Switch inlet and outlet connections

• All solder joints, system valves, drain valves, and hose connections

Repair any detected leaks. If leaks have developed, and depending upon the nature of the leak, some water may have to be drained from the system before making repairs.



2.11.4 Initial System Cleaning

Once the cooling system has been determined to be free of leaks it should be cleaned and flushed before continuing the installation.

Create cleansing solution. Using a mixture of water (see section b.1 Coolant and Water Recommendations in Appendix B) and a cleaning solution (a mixture of 4 cups of a trisodium phosphate-based detergent, such as Cascade, in 2 gallons of water), proceed with the following steps.

Strain mixture into tank through a fine filter.

Run the system for 1 hour. Alternate pumps A and B for 30 minutes each.

Drain the system.

NOTE:The pump module reservoir (tank) can be emptied with a hand or powered pump.

To drain the system, open all of the system and cabinet drain valves. Once draining is complete close all cabinet drain valves.

2.11.5 Initial System Flushing

Flush system of cleaning solution. Before the initial transmitter operation the cooling system must be purged of most of the cleaning solution residue left from the cleaning of the system.

The flushing can be accomplished by alternately filling, running, and draining the system, two to four (or more if needed) times using water.

NOTE:The length of flushing time, and number of fill/drain cycles needed to achieve desired water quality will vary with system size. The smaller the system, the shorter length and lesser number of fill/drain cycles. The opposite will be true for larger systems.

Fill system with water (see section b.1 Coolant and Water Recommendations in Appendix B). Water is added via the tank vent cap.

Run system for approximately 20 minutes. Alternate pumps A and B for 10 minutes each.



Drain system.

Repeat above steps. EXCEPT - During the last flushing with water cycle, the cabinet (PA and chiller plates) and test/reject load connections will be opened to the cooling system. Perform the following three steps prior to the last fill, run, and drain cycle.

• Open cabinet (all cabinets if multi-cabinet Atlas) supply and return line valves.

• Open test and reject load supply and return line valves.

• Close input and return manifold bypass valves.

2.11.6 Final Cooling System Fill

! CAUTION:THE SYSTEM MUST BE TESTED FOR LEAKS AGAIN ONCE THE REQUIRED 50/50 GLYCOL/WATER MIXTURE HAS FILLED THE ENTIRE SYSTEM.

Fill pump module tank with equal amounts of coolant and water (see section B.1 Coolant and Water Recommendations in Appendix B). The amount of residual water in the system must be taken into account when adding coolant and water to the system. The amount of residual water (water that remains trapped in the system and can’t be readily removed by emptying the reservoir tank) and will vary from system to system. The amount of residual water can be estimated if the amount of initial fill water is tracked and compared to the amount of re-fill water required. If the residual water is ignored, the concentration of coolant may be less than the specified 50/50 mixture.

Run pumps for several minutes to start refilling the rest of the system. Alternate pumps A and B.

Check and fill pump module tank with amounts of coolant and water as needed to achieve the 50/50 mixture. Use a conventional float hydrometer and jar or a MISCO DFR 200 or equivalent digital refractometer to verify the 50/50 mixture. The hydrometer should be capable of measuring specific gravity in the 1.02 to 1.08 range. Information regarding specific gravity measurement is given in Appendix B.



Repeat above steps until coolant level has stabilized at the 110 liter (30 gallon) Normal Level indication in the sight glass.

NOTE:Please note that capacities shown include all system components such as trans-mitter w/contents, pump module, heat exchanger, test load (w/connection), cabi-net bypass, and multiple cabinet interconnections where used. The values do not include the main interconnection plumbing lines between the transmitter, pump module, and heat exchanger.

Table 2-5 Line Length to Capacity Conversion Factors

To approximate the volume of interconnection plumbing line use Table 2-5 on page 2-27 to determine the corresponding factor needed. Then multiply total of all line lengths by factor to derive tubing volume. Add this volume to the corresponding volume given in Table 2-4 to determine approximate "Total" System Coolant Capacity.

Table 2-4 Cooling System Capacities

Transmitter Model Approximate System Capacity(less plumbing lines)

DVI850 48 gallons (182 liters)





DVI7500/DVI9000 83 gallons (314 liters)

Nominal Type M Copper Tube Size

Feet to Gallons Feet to Liters Meters to Gallons

Meters to Liters

1½"(ID) 0.092 0.348 0.301 1.140

2"(ID) 0.163 0.618 0.535 2.027

2½"(ID) 0.255 0.965 0.837 3.167

42 mm (OD)39.6 mm (ID)

.099 .375 .325 1.232

54 mm (OD)51.6 mm (ID)

.168 .637 .552 2.091

66.7 mm (OD)64.3 mm (ID)

.261 .990 .858 3.247



2.12 Install PA Modules

Be sure the PA power supply breakers (on the mid deck in rear) are in the OFF position.

! WARNING:THE PA MODULES ARE LARGE AND RELATIVELY HEAVY, WEIGHING SLIGHTLY LESS THAN 25KG. CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE MODULES.

Remove the shipping foam packing surrounding the hose connectors in rear PA cabinet by performing the following procedure.

a. Carefully pull each top hose from foam

b. While lifting and holding foam, pull remaining bottom hoses from foam

c. Remove foam piece from cabinet

d. Vacuum foam remnants from the cabinet

Unpack and install the PA modules into the front of the transmitter cabinet. Be sure to position the module so the hose connections are near the bottom.

NOTE:The PA Modules should be placed into the same slot in which they were tested at the factory. Each module has a serial number tag. This serial number is recorded on the factory test data sheet along with the appropriate slot number. Placing the module in a different slot will not cause any harm to the transmitter but will require more time for module phasing.

Connect the Coolant hoses to the rear of the PA Modules. Return hoses are on the bottom and supply hoses on the top. Push the hose coupling on to the module nipple until it locks into place. Make sure the coolant valves on the couplers are in the open position as shown here. Turning the valve at a right angle to the hose shuts off flow to the module.

NOTE:It is helpful to have an assistant maintain pressure on the module from the front of the transmitter as the coolant hoses are being attached in the rear.

CoolantValve

(shownopen)



Reapply pressure from the front of module. To make sure all the connections are made, return to the front of the transmitter and again press each of the modules toward the rear, being sure that the module is fully seated and the front panel latch is securely engaged.

! CAUTION:FAILURE TO CONNECT THE COOLANT HOSES TO THE MODULE AND THEN OPEN THE VALVES COULD RESULT IN A POSSIBLE MODULE FAILURE SHOULD POWER BE APPLIED.

! WARNING:THE ATLAS PA MODULES ARE DESIGNED TO HANDLE VERY HIGH TEMPERA-TURES AND MAY BE EXTREMELY HOT, UP TO 32O C (90O F) ABOVE ROOM TEM-PERATURE. DO NOT TOUCH THE MODULES WITH BARE HANDS AFTER THE TRANSMITTER HAS BEEN RUNNING. SPECIAL GLOVES HAVE BEEN PROVIDED IN THE REAR OF THE CABINET OR CAN BE OBTAINED FROM HARRIS, PART #0990006483 OR GRAINGER ITEM #4JF36.

Verify all drain valves are closed and make sure all coolant system gate valves are open before proceeding with the initial turn on.



2.13 Initial Turn-On

Read and understand the entire initial turn-on procedure before starting. Detailed use of all GUI screens is given in Section 3 Operation.

Shut off the front panel breaker.Apply 3 phase primary power to the transmitter. Be ready to quickly disconnect the power if necessary.

Engage the primary AC breaker switch, CB9 on the front breaker panel of each transmitter cabinet.

At the rear of Cabinet #1, turn on the LVPS1 and LVPS2 (Low Voltage Power Supply) circuit breakers, CB11 and CB12. This will activate LVPS1 and LVPS2 and power up the transmitter control system. The GUI display should show the Home (default) screen shown in Figure 2-10. Try using the touchscreen buttons on the right side of the GUI display (not the hardware buttons to the right of the GUI). If they do not seem to be working or only work when pressed outside the button graphic, then go to "5.6.4 Touch Screen Calibration" on page 5-24 before continuing. If the buttons are working then proceed on to the next step.

Figure 2-10 Home Page

Check the Low Voltage power supplies and AC Mains voltage. Press the POWER SUPPLY button then PS METERS to access the PS metering screen. Check for +15, -15 and +7.5 volts on LV PSU 1 and LV PSU 2, with the BUS voltage slightly lower. The



AC Mains should read close to your measured AC voltage. Press BACK to return to the Power Supply screen.

Figure 2-11 Power Supply Metering

Press the PS FAULTS button to check for power supply faults. There should be NO red indications or faults present. If a fault is present, see Section 6, Diagnostics for more information.This screen is shown in Figure 3-21 on page 3-22.

NOTE:A COMMON FAULT IS A 3 PHASE SEQUENCE FAULT, INDICATING THE 3 PHASES HAVE BEEN CONNECTED IN THE WRONG SEQUENCE. IF THIS IS PRESENT, REMOVE ALL PRIMARY POWER TO THE TRANS-MITTER AND SWITCH ANY 2 WIRES ON TRANSMITTER TERMINAL BLOCK TB5.

Customize the transmitter System Setup. Press the SYSTEM button then enter the default password - (1). Then press SYSTEM SERVICE and SYSTEM SETUP. The System Setup screen displays the settings for station name, model number, licensed output power, etc. Touch the screen at each field to enter the data pertinent to the site. Once all the correct information in this screen has been entered, press the CONFIG button. This screen is shown in Figure 3-31 on page 3-31.

Check and set the transmitter configuration. Here, it is possible to set the number of exciters. Fully redundant transmitters will have two exciters, two cooling pumps and two low voltage power supply units (LV PSU). The second exciter is optional. Press the BACK button to return to the System Setup screen.

Any Power Supplyfaults would causethis icon to turn red



Set the Date, Time and LCD screen contrast. Press the CONTROL SET UP button. Touch the screen at each field to enter the correct data for Date, time and contrast. There is also a time entry for the LCD screen saver feature. For more information on this screen see "3.9.4.1 System Setup" on page 3-30.

Repeat above steps, beginning at "2.13 Initial Turn-On" on page 2-30, for each additional cabinet. Note that the additional cabinets’ LVPS status, and AC Mains status will be displayed on the cabinet #1 GUI display.

2.13.1 Final Cooling System Turn ON

Follow the remaining steps to complete the cooling system turn on.

2.13.1.1 Setting the Transmitter Flow Rate

Check the transmitter flow rate. Press SYSTEM, SYSTEM COOLING and COOLING METERS. The first line shows the transmitter flow rate.

Adjust the Flow Rate if necessary. Adjust the inlet valve for the transmitter until the flow rate indicated in the GUI matches the nominal flow rate of the transmitter model as as shown in the table below or indicated in the Liquid Cooling System Layout drawing.

NOTE:If the pump is unable to deliver the required flow rate, check for correct wiring of the 3 AC phases. Incorrect wiring of the 3-phase sequence would cause the

Table 2-6 Cooling System Flow Rates:LPM = liters per minute; GPM = gallons per minute

MODEL TRANSMITTER FLOW RATE TEST LOAD FLOW RATE

DVI850 17.0LPM / 4.49GPM 15.1LPM / 4.0GPM










pumps to operate but with much degraded performance. If this is the case, see Section 2.11.1.1 section above.

2.13.1.2 Setting the Water Cooled Test Load Flow Switch Trip Level

Prepare to set the flow meter switch trip point. See documentation included with flow meter for procedure details.

! CAUTION:DURING TESTING OF THE FLOW SWITCH RF SHOULD BE MUTED.

Adjust the test load coolant supply valve until the meter reads the correct flow rate shown in Table 2-6, or as indicated in Layout, Liquid Cooling System drawing.

NOTE:Adjusting the flow rate of either the test load or the transmitter will, to some extent, have an affect on the flow rate of the other. Several iterations of adjusting one, then the other, may be necessary to attain the exact flow rates for both.

! CAUTION:IN ORDER TO PROTECT THE TEST LOAD, THE LOAD FLOW INTERLOCK SWITCH MUST BE SET TO OPEN (FAULT OFF TRANSMITTER) IF ADEQUATE COOLANT FLOW IS NOT PROVIDED TO THE LOAD.

Upon completion of adjustment of flow to the cabinets and load, note the operating pressure and then open the sidestream filter valve. Adjust the sidestream filter valve to achieve a 1 psi drop in system pressure. This will allow adequate water flow through the filter while maintaining adequate flow through other components. If opening the sidestream filter valve decreases flow below recommended levels then readjustment of system flow may be required. Flow through the cabinets and loads can be increased slightly to regain nominal values.

Check the Load interlock. Once the flow rate is correct, press OUPUT to go to the RF Output screen. This screen displays status of the load interlock (open or closed).

Adjust the flow switch trip level until the GUI displays Load Interlock: Closed.



Verify that the flow switch operates correctly by decreasing the amount of flow through the load. The interlock should OPEN.

NOTE:This open interlock is designed to mute the transmitter RF while the transmitter is operating into the test load. Patch Panel status signals will tell the Main Control-ler to ignore this interlock if the transmitter output is currently routed into the antenna.

Go back to the nominal flow rate recommended for the test load. The interlock should close.

2.13.1.3 Setting the Heat Exchanger Fan Turn ON Temperatures

The two thermostats that control the heat exchanger fan turn on temperatures were factory set for 32o C (Fan A) and 38o C (Fan B).

Verify the control settings and adjust if necessary. Inside the Heat Exchanger panel, verify that the control setting for the left (Fan A) and right (Fan B) thermostats are set at 32oC and 38ºC, respectively, which will switch fan A on when the coolant temperature reaches 32o C, and Fan B on if the temperature raises to 38o C.

The +/- adjustment controls the differential when the fans will switch off, which is factory set to 4o C for both. This will switch Fan A off when the temperature cools to 28o C, and Fan B will turn off when the coolant temperature reaches 34o C.

2.13.1.4 Verifying Pump Switching

Verify that both pumps operate properly by switching pumps back and forth using the GUI screen. Also verify that correct flow rate is achieved with either pump active.

• Press SYSTEM then SYSTEM COOLING. This screen is shown in Figure 3-25 on page 3-26.

• Select manual pump switching. Button should display MANUAL ENABLED.

• Press pump select button for PUMP A ON then PUMP B ON. The pumps should switch. This is indicated in the transmitter GUI screen, as well as in the Cooling Control Panel status LED indicators.



2.13.1.5 Normal Pump Operation

In normal operation (Cooling Control Panel set for Remote), the transmitter commands the pump selection. If there is a need for operating the pump module independently from the transmitter, the Local button on the Cooling Control Panel should be activated.

Check coolant level status. Verify the coolant level indicator LEDs are not lit. If they are, there is insufficient coolant in the system. Add coolant to the tank until no alarms are shown on the cooling control panel or GUI.

Press the Remote button on the Cooling Control Panel (green LED should illuminate). With testing completed, this will be the normal operating mode.

2.13.2 Setting Exciter Parameters

See Apex Exciter manual to set exciter parameters.

NOTE:The exciters are located below the control panel. If there are two exciters Exciter A is always factory installed as upper unit (located immediately below the trans-mitter control panel. The optional exciter B is installed beneath exciter A.

2.13.3 RF Initial Turn ON

Perform this section for each of the power amplifier cabinets.

! CAUTION:THE TRANSMITTER SHOULD BE INITIALLY POWERED INTO THE TEST LOAD.

Check and Set the ALC (Automatic Level Control). Press POWER AMP, then PA METERS. The ALC number that controls the power output level of the transmitter is seen at the upper right corner. Press the transmitter Power up/down buttons (arrow-shaped buttons) until the ALC number reads 80.



Figure 2-12 PA Meters Screen

Switch ON the two, four, six or eight PA circuit breakers (CB1 - CB8 depending on transmitter model) on the mid deck in the rear of the transmitter.

Press the transmitter ON button.

Verify that the reflected power at each PA module is under 50 watts. The PA Meters screen shows the forward and reflected power for each PA Module. Press the BACK button.

All PA modules should show a green (OK) status indication on the GUI (Power Amp screen).

Press OUPUT then OUTPUT METERS. This page shows the forward and reflected powers for the Cabinet and Total System power. The VSWR is also indicated.

Slowly bring up the transmitter power by pressing the RAISE button on front panel to the nominal value, as indicated by the bar graphs. Monitor the cabinet forward and reflected powers, as well as the VSWR reading. A large VSWR (above 1.1) is indicative of a bad RF connection to the test load.

Check PA Module (and multi-cabinet) Phasing. See "5.4 PA Module Phasing" on page 5-6 for steps to observe the below screen. If any of the PA Module (or cabinet) reject load temperature levels are more than 3 degrees C. above coolant temperature, proceed to "5.4.2 Module Phasing Procedure" on page 5-7 for details on adjusting levels.



NOTE:Those cabinets with 6 PA modules installed do not the capability of adjusting module-to-module phasing. However, adjustment of cabinet-to-cabinet phasing is still possible as described in STEP 6 of the procedure "5.4.2 Module Phasing Pro-cedure" on page 5-7 of this manual.

Figure 2-13 Module Phasing Screen (except 6-module cabinets)

Verify that the transmitter meter readings are close to the factory test data meter readings, mainly all of the current and voltage readings.

Perform an Auto Bias procedure. See "5.3 PA Module Auto Bias Procedure" on page 5-5 for more information. Due to natural drift of LDMOS devices with age, periodic re-biasing of the pallets within the modules is recommended. However, this procedure has been automated and is done with the press of a button, and only takes a few seconds.

NOTE:This procedure should initially be done every 2 weeks for the first 2 months of operation. Then it should be done once a month for the next 4 months after that, and then once every 6 months of operation from then on.

Verify power output on GUI corresponds with the external power meter. If there is a discrepancy, perform the power calibration procedure "5.5 Power Calibrations" on page 5-9 in this manual.

Temperature levelin degs. C. without

PA Module PhaseControl Voltage0000 - 1023

GOAL: To get the temperature level readings as low as possible (typically about 3 degrees above coolant temperature).Module Group

select buttons

Reject Loads

decimal. 23.6oshown.

Auto PhasingOn or Off



2.14 Parallel Remote Control Connections

Once proper operation of the transmitter has been initiated, remote control connections can be made. The following tables list the connectors and their corresponding signal names and functions.

NOTE:To access the External I/O board connections, turn the knob on the right side of Control Panel counter clockwise. This will allow the panel to swing open right-to-left. There is knob on the chassis that the External I/O board is mounted on. Pull this knob upwards and pull the I/O board towards you, being watchful of all cables as the chassis slides forward.

External Parallel remote control units can interface at the External I/O Board. J13 through J17 are for remote Control, Status and ISDB-T readings. The connectors are organized as follows:

• J13 and J14 - Remote Transmitter Control Functions

• J15 and J16 - Remote Status Outputs

• J17 - Remote ISDB-T Metering Outputs

NOTE:The forward slash ( / ) in front of a signal name means active low. The signal named "/INPUT 1" for example is activated by momentarily bringing that input low. Signal names without the forward slash are considered active high. This con-vention is used throughout the schematics.

2.14.1 Transmitter Control Functions, J13 and J14

All control inputs use opto-isolators for surge protection. The opto-isolators are powered by an internal +5Vdc from an isolation protection circuit, U54.

All transmitter control functions (except Remote RF Mute, RF Switch Position A and RF Switch Position B, which are active LOW or HIGH level input states) are momentary ground switching and require the remote control equipment to sink at least 15mA to activate the function. The Pinouts of J13 and J14 are listed in Table 2-7



.

Table 2-7 J13 & J14, External I/O Board, Remote Control Connectors

Connector and pin #

Schematic Label

Function Command Type and Polarity

J13-1 GND GROUND

J13-2 /INPUT 1 Remote ON Pulsed LOW

J13-3 /INPUT 2 Remote OFF Pulsed LOW

J13-4 /INPUT 3 Remote RAISE Power Pulsed LOW

J13-5 /INPUT 4 Remote LOWER Power Pulsed LOW

J13-6 GND GROUND

J13-7 GND GROUND

J13-8 /INPUT 5 Remote Drive Chain A/B Select Pulsed LOW to toggle

J13-9 /INPUT 6 Remote RF Mute ON L= RF Muted H= RF NOT Muted

J13-10 /INPUT 7 Remote Pump A/B Select Pulsed LOW to toggle

J13-11 /INPUT 8 Spare

J13-12 GND GROUND

J14-1 GND GROUND

J14-2 /INPUT 9 Remote External RF Switch A/B Select Pulsed LOW to toggle

J14-3 /INPUT 10 RF Switch Position A Status from switch L= POSITION A H= NOT POSITION A

J14-4 /INPUT 11 RF Switch Position B Status from switch L= POSITION B H= NOT POSITION B

J14-5 /INPUT 12 Remote Drive AUTO/MANUAL Select Pulsed LOW to toggle

J14-6 GND GROUND

J14-7 GND GROUND

J14-8 /INPUT 13 Remote Pump AUTO/MANUAL Select Pulsed LOW to toggle

J14-9 /INPUT 14 SPARE



J14-12 GND GROUND



2.15 Remote Status Outputs, J15 & J16

All of the remote status outputs are open collector and will sink 100mA at up to +24Vdc to provide an indication status is active. The pull up supply voltage for the status indications can be supplied via J15 & J16 or can be supplied by an external voltage source. The status output connections are listed in Table 2-8.

Table 2-8 J15 & J16, External I/O Board, Remote Status Outputs

Countermand pin #

Schematic Label Status Output Status Type and Polarity

J16-1 GNDB Isolated Ground

J16-2 +5VDC ISOLATED Output: Install jumper to J16-11 to use this internal supply for status pull ups. Otherwise an external supply will have to be connected to J16-11.

J16-3 /OUTPUT 1 OFF/ON Status L=ON H=OFF

J16-4 /OUTPUT 2 Drive A/B Status L= Drive A H= Drive B

J16-5 /OUTPUT 3 Drive AUTO/MANUAL Status L= Auto H= Manual

J16-6 /OUTPUT 4 Pump A/B Status L= Pump A H= Pump B

J16-7 /OUTPUT 5 Pump A/B AUTO/MANUAL Status

L= Auto H= Manual

J16-8 /OUTPUT 6 Remote Enabled L= Enabled H= Disabled

J16-9 /OUTPUT 7 External Interlock Open L= Interlock OPEN H= Interlock CLOSED

J16-10 /OUTPUT 8 RF Muted L= RF Mute ON H= RF Mute OFF

J16-11 +VDC EXT SUPPLY Input For External Pull Up Supply Voltage





J15-2 +5VDC_ISOLATED Output: Install jumper to J15-11 to use internal supply for status pull ups. Otherwise an external supply will have to be connected to J15-11.

J15-3 /OUTPUT 9 VSWR Foldback ON L= Foldback ONH= Foldback OFF

J15-4 /OUTPUT 10 Transmitter Faulted OFF L= Fault OFFH= TX OK

J15-5 /OUTPUT 11 Drive Chain Fault L= FAULTH= OK

J15-6 /OUTPUT 12 Cooling Fault L= FAULTH= OK

J15-7 /OUTPUT 13 Summary Fault L= FAULTH= OK

J15-8 /OUTPUT 14 Transmitter OFF and not Faulted L= TX OFF not faultedH=TX ON

J15-9 /OUTPUT 15 RF Switch A/B Status L= POSITION AH= POSITION B

J15-10 /OUTPUT 16 RF Switch Drive A/B to motorized switch

L= POSITION AH= POSITION B

J15-11 +VDC EXT SUPPLY Input For External Pull Up Supply Voltage


Table 2-8 J15 & J16, External I/O Board, Remote Status Outputs

Countermand pin #

Schematic Label Status Output Status Type and Polarity



2.15.1 Remote Power Metering, J17

Each analog metering output will provide 0 - 4.096Vdc output into a 400 ohm load (where 3Vdc = Full Scale). The connections for J17 are listed in Table 2-9.

Table 2-9 J17, External I/O Board, Remote Power Metering

Connection Schematic Label Metered Parameter

J17-1 GND Ground

J17-2 VOUTA Total Forward Power (after filter)

J17-3 VOUTB Total Reflected Power (after filter)

J17-4 VOUTC Forward Power Cabinet #1 (before filter)

J17-5 VOUTD Reflected Power Cabinet #1 (before filter)

J17-6 GND Ground

J17-7 GND Ground

J17-8 VOUTE Forward Power Cabinet # 2(before filter)

J17-9 VOUTF Reflected Power Cabinet #2 (before filter)

J17-10 VOUTG Forward Power Cabinet #3 (before filter)

J17-11 VOUTH Reflected Power Cabinet #3 (before filter)

J17-12 GND Ground


Section 3Operation


3
3.1 Introduction
This section gives detailed operational information for the Atlas ISDB-T Solid-State UHF TV transmitter. Information will pertain mostly to the operation and navigation of the Graphical User interface (GUI) Touchscreen display.

NOTE:Operation of the Apex ISDB-T exciter is covered in a separate manual which came with the transmitter.

3.2 Transmitter Control Panel

The front panel user interface is a 1/4 VGA, LCD touchscreen display. This touchscreen display uses software buttons to monitor the transmitter. Hardware buttons for the primary transmitter functions such as ON/OFF, RAISE/LOWER and Remote Enable/Disable are provided on the overlay panel next to the display as shown in Figure 3-1.

NOTE:When the transmitter is turned off using the OFF button under normal conditions, the Pump Module pump will continue to run for approximately 3 minutes.

3-1 to servicing.

Section 3 Operation ATLAS ISDB-T

Figure 3-1 Transmitter Control Panel

NOTE:A similar set of GUI screens is available via web browser with an ethernet net-work connection and the optional eCDi hardware interface.

3.2.1 Main Menu "Quick" Buttons

Just to the right of the touchscreen, there are 5 hardware buttons which are part of the front panel overlay. Located next to each button is a Status LED which illuminates green under normal, no fault conditions. These buttons provide quick access to each of the 5 main transmitter groups, namely:

a. Drive Chain

b. Power Amp

c. Output

d. Power Supply

e. System

The Status LED next to the button will turn red if there is a warning or fault condition in that section of the transmitter. It will be green if the sub-system is normal. This provides quick access to the required and relevant diagnostics information, without having to be familiar with a menu structure.

SYSTEM


Section 3 OperationATLAS ISDB-T

NOTE:To differentiate these buttons from the ones which show up on the LCD display, these will be referred to as "Quick" buttons in the manual text.

3.3 Graphical User Interface (GUI)

The GUI ("Gooey") was designed to provide an intuitive interface into the transmitter control system. Once you know what information is available, finding the information you want is simply a matter of following the screens to the desired section of the transmitter. Menu Trees of all available screens are given at the end of this section, see "3.10 GUI Menu Structures" on page 3-35.

For the most part, all navigation through the GUI screens is done via the touchscreen and softkeys (software buttons). The exceptions are the 5 hardware buttons mentioned above. The touchscreen display is also divided into an active display area, which will change with each screen, and the global areas which are present on all screens.

3.3.1 Global Status and Navigation

The top 2 sections of the touchscreen display are considered global because they show up on all screens. The top line indicates the transmitter name and model number.

Figure 3-2 Global Display Header

Power (Avg.) Bar graphTransmitter Model Number

Operation and FaultStatus Power Output

Main Menu Symbolswith Color Status

100% Mark - Based on Nominal Power Output setting in System Setup screen



The second line of the display has operational and status information including:

a. ON, Standby, Fault OFF, ON/FB (transmitter foldback), PS MUTE, and RF MUTE status indication.

• ON: Normal operating mode

• Standby: Transmitter turned off manually or remotely

• Fault OFF: Transmitter forced off due to fault condition

• ON/FB: Transmitter power folded back. Conditions causing the foldback may by temporary and could possibly be cleared by pressing the ON button. If, after pressing the ON button to reset the foldback, the ON/FB indication resumes the malfunction will need to be determined and the transmitter repaired (see Section 6 for fault log listings).

• PS MUTE: A temporary fault condition caused by a power supply related fault. If underlying fault clears, the mute condition will be lifted and the transmitter returned to normal operating mode. If the mute continues, the underlying fault will need to be determined and the transmitter repaired (see Section 6 for fault log listings).

• RF MUTE: A temporary fault condition caused by an RF related fault. If underlying fault clears, the mute condition will be lifted and the transmitter returned to normal operating mode. If the mute continues, the underlying fault will need to be determined and the transmitter repaired (see Section 6 for fault log listings).

b. Transmitter Forward power output reading in numerical format (for multiple cabinet transmitters this would be a system power reading and not for a single cabinet). It is important to note that this is the power output after the filter.

c. Transmitter Forward power output reading in a Bar graph format. The 100% mark is based on the nominal power level or TPO (Transmitter Power Output) entered into the configuration screen. The barograph will also turn yellow if the power level is more than 10% higher or lower than the nominal 100% level.

d. Main Menu Symbols which are basically status for the 5 main transmitter sections. If illuminated red, that section of the transmitter has one or more faults. These status indicators correspond to the 5 hardware buttons to the right of the display.

The top bar in Figure 3-2 should be all green under normal (no fault) operating conditions. A yellow or red symbol or status indication should be investigated by the station engineer.



3.4 GUI Home Page

The HOME screen shown in Figure 3-3 is the primary operator screen and the default screen after boot up. The HOME screen contains the most important general operator information such as:

a. System Forward and Reflected power

b. Drive chain selection

c. Cabinet Forward power

d. AC line voltage. This is an average of all 3 phases. To see the individual 3 phase line voltages press the Power Supply button.

e. Transmitter Channel and System Standard

Figure 3-3 DVI 3400 Home Screen

It also has the global status and operation information at the top of the screen which shows the transmitter status and if there are any faults present.

The HOME button is a software button located in the lower right-hand corner of all 5 main menu screens for quick navigation to the HOME screen in Figure 3-3 (if any submenu screen is currently shown on the GUI, the lower right-hand button will typically be the BACK button; use this to go back up a level). This screen can only be accessed using the software buttons on the touchscreen (there is no hardware HOME button).

To Figure 3-4 on page 3-7







The quickest way to access the HOME screen is to press any of the 5 hardware buttons to the right of the display as there is a HOME button on each of those main menu screens,

There are always five touchscreen navigation buttons on the right side of the display. These are different on almost every screen and, with the exception of the HOME screen, do not relate to the hardware buttons on the front panel just to the right of the display. These can also act as status indicators and turn red if a fault condition is detected.

There is a navigation button (shown to the right) to allow access to information specific to the PA cabinet. Pressing this button will take you to the Power Amp screen shown in Figure 3-7 on page 3-10.

This button is also a metering and status indicator for the PA cabinet as it shows forward power (before the filter) and will change from OK to Fault, if a problem is detected in that cabinet as shown to the right.

NOTE:To simplify the discussion of GUI navigation, the following will navigate and describe all of the screens under each of the 5 main menu buttons located to the right of the touchscreen display (and on the right side of the GUI Home page).



3.5 Drive Chain Main Menu

If you press the Drive Chain button on the control panel overlay, or the Drive Chain button on the HOME screen, it will take you to the screen shown in Figure 3-4. The Drive Chain Menu structure is shown in Figure 3-37 on page 3-36.

Figure 3-4 Drive Chain Screen

The Drive Chain screen is basically an exciter control and monitoring screen. It has a power reading for each exciter output and allows the operator to select AUTO or MANUAL switching mode for the drive chain when the optional dual drive system is installed. Specifically it includes:

a. The operational and on-air status of 1 or 2 exciters (the second exciter is optional).

NOTE:The standard Apex exciter has dual inputs.

b. The RFU (RF Unit) status of Drive A and Drive B. The RFU is also an exciter switcher and a directional coupler to monitor exciter power.

c. A Dual Drive Chain Control box (located at the bottom of the screen). This section will be grayed out for single exciter systems. For dual exciter systems this box has 2 switches:

To Figure 3-5

To Figure 3-6

To Figure 3-3



1. Auto/Manual - This toggle button should always be in the Auto position for normal operation. Placing it in Manual mode prevents an autoswitch to the alternate drive chain. In AUTO mode, if the on-air drive chain drops below 50% of nominal power, or if the on-line exciter experiences a fault, the controller will automatically switch to the backup drive chain (if available). Manual mode could be used if an exciter or driver has been removed for service or for any application where an automatic switch to the alternate drive chain is not desired.

2. Drive Chain A/B - This is the manual drive chain switch. To use this button, place the Auto/Manual button to Manual, then press this button to change the on-air drive chain.

3.5.1 Drive Chain Faults

When the "Drive Faults" button in Figure 3-4 is pressed, it will bring up the screen shown in Figure 3-5. This screen is basically a fault display for 1 or 2 exciters. For more information on these faults and what to do if one should occur, refer to the Apex exciter manual.

Figure 3-5 Drive Chain Faults Screen

3.5.2 Drive Service (RFU Setup)

When the "Drive Service" button in Figure 3-4 is pressed, it will bring up the screen shown in Figure 3-6. This screen is used to calibrate the display readings.

To Figure 3-4



NOTE:This screen is used for a procedure described in "5.5.3 RFU Calibration" on page 5-14, and is to be performed only by qualified service personnel if necessary.

Figure 3-6 RFU Setup Screen

NOTE:Exciter A is factory installed, just below the control panel. The optional exciter B is installed in the rack under exciter A.

To Figure 3-4



3.6 Power Amp Main Menu

If you press the Power Amp button on the control panel overlay, or the Power Amp button on the HOME screen, it will take you to the screen shown in Figure 3-7. The Power Amp Menu structure is shown in Figure 3-38 on page 3-36.

Figure 3-7 Power Amplifier Screen(PA Cabinet 1 of DVI3400 shown)

This screen shows the Forward and Reflected power for a particular PA cabinet. Each of the amplifier select buttons in the middle of the screen are for navigation to Module Status screens which have detailed fault status information on each module. These buttons are also status indicators with 4 different states:

a. OK - The icon is green as shown

b. Fault - The icon turns red

c. OFF - The icon turns black

d. Disconnected - When a module is unplugged its icon turns gray

NOTE:For multi-cabinet Atlas ISDB-T transmitters (DVI5000, DVI6800 and DVI10000) the cabinet select buttons are located at the bottom of the screen. The DVI5000 and DVI6800 will have two cabinets to select from, and the DVI10000 will have three. Once the desired cabinet is selected, all submenus will be navi-

To Figure 3-8

To Figure 3-10

To PA Faults screen, Figure 3-8

To Figure 3-12

To Figure 3-3

PA CabinetSelect



gated in the same way as the others cabinets’.Always be sure that you are accessing the desired cabinet number.

To get detailed information on a particular PA Module, press the desired amplifier button in the middle of the screen. Any of these buttons will take you to the PA Faults screen shown in Figure 3-8.

3.6.1 PA Faults

This screen is basically a list of all of the faults monitored in each PA Module.

• An active fault will be highlighted in RED• A warning condition will be highlighted in YELLOW.

The PA Faults screen in Figure 3-8, shows that PA Module #1, in PA Cabinet #1 has no faults. The NEXT and PREVIOUS buttons are used to access fault information on each module. Since all of the possible fault status will not fit on the one screen, pressing MORE will take you to the screen in Figure 3-9.

NOTE:For a detailed explanation of all PA Faults in Figure 3-8 and Figure 3-9, refer to Section 6, Diagnostics.

Figure 3-8 PA Faults Screen (PA Module 1 Selected)

To Figure 3-9



Figure 3-9 More PA Faults Screen

The left column indicates current faults. The center indicates transistor faults.

3.6.2 PA Meters

This screen is accessed by pressing the "PA Meters" button in Figure 3-7. This screen gives detailed PA metering by PA Cabinet.

A complete set of PA Meter readings is given in the Factory Test Data. The Factory Test Data readings are taken at nameplate power unless otherwise specified by the customer. A full set of readings should also have been taken when the transmitter was installed if the nominal operating power does not match the factory tested power level.

NOTE:For more information on PA Meter Readings see Section 6, Diagnostics.



Figure 3-10 PA Metering Screen

PA Module will fault off at 100W "Prefld(W)" reflected power. Also, it will fault off at 70° C temperature.

NOTE:The PA output powers displayed under the PA Meters heading are average pow-ers. Peak power is obtained by multiplying the average power by a factor of 6-10x.

Figure 3-11 More PA Meters Screen

To Figure 3-11

When takingreadings, be sureto note the PAModule Numberand CabinetNumber



PA Module will fault off with any of the following maximum temperatures shown under the Module Temperatures heading: "Heatsink" @ 70°C; "PS Bd" @ 95°C; "Control Bd" @ 95°C

3.6.3 PA Service

This screen is accessed by pressing the "PA Service" button in Figure 3-7. This screen allows individual PA modules to be turned on or off. The primary purpose of this screen is to turn off a PA module for removal. It will also allow only a single module to be turned on for troubleshooting purposes. The 8 PA Module buttons in the middle of the screen are toggle switches. Press it once and the PA module shuts off. Press it again and the module turns on. The front panel ON button can also be used to reactivate a module, but should only be used when you want all modules on.

Figure 3-12 PA Service Screen

3.6.3.1 PA Module Removal

This screen is simply intended as a quick reference of the proper way to remove and install a PA module.

NOTE:The actual mechanical removal procedure is discussed in Section 5, Maintenance (see "5.2.1 PA Module Removal" on page 5-2).

To Figure 3-13

To Figure 3-14

To Figure 3-7



Figure 3-13 PA Module Removal Screen

3.6.3.2 PA Module Alignment - "Auto Bias"

This screen is accessed by pressing the "PA Align" button in Figure 3-12. This screen allows the bias on the individual PA module pallets to be optimized. This procedure should only be done after the transmitter has been operating at nominal power output, in an average ambient temperature, for at least one hour.

NOTE:Transmitter carrier power will be removed for about 5 seconds. However, lock up times on receivers may be as much as 3-5 seconds after that. Therefore, it is not recommended that this procedure be done during regular broadcast hours.

This procedure should be initially be done every 2 weeks for the first 2 months of operation. Then it should be done once a month for the next 4 months after that, and then once every 6 months of operation from then on. See "5.3 PA Module Auto Bias Procedure" on page 5-5 for more information



Figure 3-14 PA Module Alignment Screen

NOTE:Some PA Bias warnings (yellow PA LED and fault log listing) may occur when first turning the transmitter on from a cold start. These warnings will be indicated by yellow LED indication on PA modules. These warnings can be disregarded as they are due to the fact that the LDMOS devices have not yet reached the nomi-nal operating temperature. To clear warnings press the ON button again to reset.If a PA Bias warning occurs well after the transmitter has attained normal operat-ing temperature it may be an indication that the PA Module Alignment needs to be performed.



3.7 Output Main Menu

If you press the Output button on the control panel overlay, or the Output button on the HOME screen, it will take you to the screen shown in Figure 3-15. The Output Menu structure is shown in Figure 3-39 on page 3-37.

Figure 3-15 Output System Screen

This screen is broken into 3 main areas:

• RF Output System - This panel gives the total system Forward and Reflected power, measured after the filter. It also has a status indication which will say OK or Fault.

• Power Amplifier Cabinet - This panel has a button that gives a status indication of OK or Fault along with cabinet Forward and Reflected power (before the filter) for each cabinet.

• Output Control - The control area at the bottom of the screen is used to control an external RF switch so that the transmitter can be switched from Antenna to the Test Load. It also reads out the position of the RF switch based on micro-switches located on the switch. Lastly, it shows the condition of the Test Load interlock.

NOTE:If the load interlock is open and the transmitter is switched to the "Test Load" position, the transmitter output will be muted. If a test load interlock is not used

To Figure 3-16

To Figure 3-17

To Figure 3-18

To Figure 3-3

External RF Switch Control

To Output Faults Screen, Figure 3-16



the appropriate connection on the External I/O board must be jumpered. For more information see "2.9 External Interlock Connections" on page 2-14.

3.7.1 Output Faults

This screen shows faults which are considered Cabinet or System level such as VSWR, Power High, foldback etc....

• An active fault will be highlighted in RED

• A warning condition will be highlighted in YELLOW

A detailed explanation of each of these faults is given in Section 6, Diagnostics.

Figure 3-16 Output Faults Screen(Foldback condition shown - Note "ON/FB" in header display)

3.7.2 Output Meters

This screen is dedicated for the metering of:

• Total Forward and Reflected Power and also gives the VSWR.

• PA Cabinet Forward, Reflected and VSWR for the cabinet.

To Figure 3-15



Figure 3-17 Output Metering Screen

3.7.3 Output Service

This screen is accessed from the Output System screen in Figure 3-15. It is an intermediate menu screen which explains the purpose of the PA Reject Service and Output Setup screens.

Figure 3-18 Output Service Screen

To Figure 3-15

To Figure 3-15



3.7.3.1 PA Reject Service

This screen shows the relative temperature of each of the PA module combiner reject loads.

This screen should only be accessed by engineering personnel. For the proper phasing sequence refer to "5.4 PA Module Phasing" on page 5-6.

Figure 3-19 PA Reject Service Screen

3.7.3.2 Forward Calibrate

See "5.5.1 Forward Calibrate" on page 5-10 in Section 5 of this manual for the procedure that utilizes this screen.

3.7.3.3 Reflected Calibrate

See "5.5.2 Reflected Calibrate" on page 5-12 in Section 5 of this manual for the procedure that utilizes this screen.

To Figure 3-18



3.8 Power Supply Main Menu

If you press the Power Supply button on the control panel overlay, it will take you to the screen shown in Figure 3-20. The Power Supply Menu structure is shown in Figure 3-40 on page 3-37.

This is the overall Power Supply metering screen for both the Low Voltage Power Supply Units or LV PSU and the AC Mains. It also allows access to all other Power Supply screens:

• PS Faults - Fault list and status

• PS Meters - Detailed metering

The Icon to the right is an example where the second unit has a fault. Pressing this button will take you to the PS Faults screen in Figure 3-21, as will the AC Mains button.

Figure 3-20 Power Supply Screen

To Figure 3-21

To Figure 3-22

To Figure 3-3



3.8.1 PS Faults

This screen is the Power Supply status screen which lists of all of the monitored power supply faults for the AC Mains and Low Voltage Power Supplies. An active fault will be highlighted in RED, while a warning condition will be highlighted in YELLOW. For a detailed explanation of these faults, refer to Section 6, Diagnostics.

Figure 3-21 PS Faults Screen

3.8.2 PS Meters

This is the detailed metering screen for the AC Mains and LV PSU.

Figure 3-22 PS Metering Screen

To Figure 3-20

To Figure 3-20



3.9 System Main Menu

If you press the System button on the control panel overlay, it will take you to the screen shown in Figure 3-23. The System Menu structure is shown in Figure 3-41 on page 3-38.

Figure 3-23 System Main Menu

This screen is basically a System Main Menu which gives overall status information about the screens which can be accessed from here. This includes:

a. Control System - For more in-depth information press "Control System"

1. External Interlocks - Can read Open or Closed

2. Communications - Can read OK or Fault. This could be a problem with any of the serial communication links inside the transmitter.

b. Cooling System - For more in-depth information press "Cooling System"

1. Cooling Pump - Can read A or B for dual pump systems

2. Coolant - Monitors coolant level, temperature and flow

3. Air - Monitors cabinet air temperature

c. System Log - For more in-depth information press "System Log"

1. Gives the current date and time (DD/MM/YYYY and HH/MM/SS)

2. Faults Logged - Total of fault list including Active and Inactive Faults

3. Active - Shows how many Active faults are present

SYSTEM

To Figure 3-24

To Figure 3-25

To Figure 3-29

To Figure 3-30

To Figure 3-3



d. System Service - Gives center frequency and selected channel number. Pressing "System Service" gives access to configuration, touchscreen calibration, software and hardware revisions, time and date setting, screen saver timeout and LCD display contrast.

3.9.1 Control System Main Menu

The Control System screen is a fault and status screen for the transmitter communication and control system. System control is divided into:

• System Bus - These indicators give the status of each of the 5 hard-wired parallel control lines which are distributed to all transmitter controllers.

• Serial Communications - This section is monitoring the CAN (Controller Area Net-work) which is distributed to all transmitter controllers.

For more information on Control System and Communication faults refer to Section 6, Diagnostics.

Figure 3-24 Control System Screen

To Figure 3-23



3.9.2 Cooling System Main Menu

The following screen is the Cooling System Main Menu. It shows status, metering and faults for the cooling system. It also provides for automatic or manual control of pump switching and tells which pump is active.

3.9.2.1 Cooling System Control Panel

At the bottom of the screen is the Pump Control Panel. This panel would be grayed out (inactive) for single pump systems. For dual pump systems there are only 2 choices to be made:

1. Auto/Manual - This button should always be pressed as shown placing the pump control in auto-switch mode. In this mode a pump failure will auto-matically cause a switch to the redundant pump. Manual mode disables the automatic pump switching.

2. Pump A/B - This is the manual pump switch control. Press it to switch pumps.

NOTE:Pump switching from this control screen will only work if the Pump Control Panel is in the REMOTE control mode. Placing the Pump Control Panel in LOCAL mode disables the transmitter pump switching commands. To switch pumps with the Pump Control Panel in LOCAL mode, press the Pump A or Pump B switches which are physically located on the Pump Control Panel. For more information on the Pump Control Panel see "4.6.4 Pump Control Panel" on page 4-39.



Figure 3-25 Cooling System Screen(DVI3400 Shown)

3.9.2.2 Cooling Faults

This screen is accessed by pressing either of the Cooling Faults buttons on the System Cooling screen. An active fault condition is highlighted in RED while a warning condition is highlighted in YELLOW.

For more information on these faults refer to Section 6, Diagnostics.

Figure 3-26 Cooling Faults Screen

To Figure 3-26

To Figure 3-27

To Figure 3-28

To Figure 3-23

Press button to accessCooling Faults screen

(Press desired cabineticon for multi-cabinettransmitters)

To Figure 3-25



3.9.2.3 Cooling Meters

This screen is accessed by pressing the Cooling Meters button on the System Cooling screen. It reads out Coolant flow, Coolant Inlet and Outlet temperature, and Cabinet air temperature. Units given are typical for a DVI3400.

Figure 3-27 Cooling Meters Screen

3.9.2.4 Cooling Service

This screen is accessed by pressing the Cooling Service button on the Cooling System screen. It is a cooling system maintenance checklist and reminder. The screen has no other functionality.

To Figure 3-25



Figure 3-28 Cooling Service Screen

3.9.3 System Log

This screen is accessed by pressing the System Log button on the System screen in Figure 3-23 on page 3-23. It is a complete listing of all transmitter and system faults in the order in which they occurred. It can hold up to 99 faults and then becomes a FIFO (First IN - First Out) memory buffer, with the latest fault entry on top. Active Faults will be highlighted and cannot be reset. All other faults will be cleared when the RESET button is pressed. Use the NEXT and PREVious buttons to view the entire list.

A complete listing of all faults which can show up in this log, along with a brief explanation of each fault, is given in the following tables in Section 6, Diagnostics.

• Table 6-1, “Atlas Transmitter Fault List,” on page 6-5

• Table 6-2, “Atlas PA Module Fault List,” on page 6-10.

These tables are a quick reference list and in most cases all that is required for advanced user to diagnose the problem. However, detailed information on each of these faults is also given in context with the fault page where it originated, also in Section 6.

To Figure 3-25



Figure 3-29 System Log Screen

3.9.4 System Service

This screen is accessed by pressing the System Service button in Figure 3-23 on page 3-23. This screen simply provides information concerning the use of the sub-menus accessed from this point. These are:

• System Setup

• SW REVS (Software Revisions)

• HW REVS (Hardware Revisions)

To Figure 3-23

Note:Date format isDD/MM/YY

Press to clear all faults



Figure 3-30 System Service Screen

3.9.4.1 System Setup

This screen provides a way to change 3 important pieces of information which are then used throughout the GUI.

• Station Name: This can be up to 24 characters and will appear at the top of every GUI screen

• Model Number: This value is selected from a pull down list by touching the white box. The model number chosen must match the transmitter name plate. It is used to gray out portions of the GUI screens which are not used by some models.

• Nom. Power Output: This is typically the nominal licensed power after all system filters, and used for a couple of things:

• It is used to set the 100% mark on the power bar graphs at the top of every GUI screen

• It is used as part of the calculation of the VSWR foldback and fault thresholds, see "5.5 Power Calibrations" on page 5-9 of this manual

The rest of the information on this page includes:

• Serial Number: (cannot be changed by user) - Please note this for reference before calling for support

• Nominal AC Line: This number should reflect your nominal AC line voltage (VAC) as measured at the disconnect

• AC Line Frequency: Should reflect your line frequency - 50Hz or 60Hz

To Figure 3-31

To Figure 3-35To Figure 3-36

To Figure 3-23



• Exciters: Select number of exciters for this system

• Output Switch: Selects Manual or Motor output switching

• Cooling Pumps: Select number of cooling pumps for this system

Figure 3-31 System Setup Screen

3.9.4.1.1 Control Setup

• Date: This screen allows the user to set the Date which will be used for reporting and for the fault log

• Time: This screen allows the user to set the Time which will be used for reporting and for the fault log

• LCD Contrast: For adjustment of the contrast of the GUI LCD display (see "5.6.3 LCD Contrast Adjustment" on page 5-23). The display contrast will adjust dynami-cally as the number is changed to allow for room lighting.

• Screen Saver: It allows the user to select how long it will take for the screen to blank out due to inactivity

• Password: Allows user password setup

NOTE:If the password is forgotten, enter 1895 to unlock the system ("backdoor" pass-word).

• Touch Cal. - This button navigates to the Touch Screen Calibration screens

To Figure 3-32

To Figure 3-30



Figure 3-32 Control Setup Screen

3.9.4.1.1 Touch Screen Calibration

If the touch screen soft buttons on the GUI are working and seem to be accurate, then this procedure is not required. If the soft buttons on the touch screen do not seem to work or can only be activated by pressing outside the button graphic, then a simple touch screen calibration will have to be done as follows:

STEP 1 Go to the touch screen calibration setup screen by pressing the Touch Cal button in Figure 3-32.

NOTE:If you are not able to get to the screen, open the control panel and press and hold the Remote Enable and Disable buttons at the same time and momentarily press the reset button on the Main Controller. Keep the Enable and Disable buttons pressed until the display is up and running. After the micro resets, the Main Con-troller will prompt the operator to calibrate the touch screen.

STEP 2 Once you see the screen in Figure 3-33(a), simply touch the X in the first 2 screens. This will get you to the first screen in Figure 3-34.

STEP 3 To test the calibration simply touch the screen in several places to make sure an X shows up where you touched (Figure 3-34b).

STEP 4 If the calibration is good, then press ACCEPT. If not, press CANCEL and the cal procedure will be started over.

To Figure 3-33

To Figure 3-31



NOTE:The procedure can be aborted by pressing any of the 5 hardware Quick keys on the control panel.

Figure 3-33 Touchscreen Calibration Screens

Figure 3-34 Touchscreen Calibration Test Screen

(b)(a)

(b)(a)



3.9.4.2 Software Revisions (SW REVs)

This screen shows the software revision for all transmitter controllers and PA module controllers. This information should be known before calling for technical support.

Figure 3-35 Software Revisions Screen

3.9.4.2.1 Hardware Revisions

This screen shows the hardware revisions for all of the transmitter control boards and PA Module controllers. This information is read from each board and is set using jumpers at the factory. This information should be known before calling for technical support.

To Figure 3-30



Figure 3-36 Hardware Revisions Screen

3.10 GUI Menu Structures

The following figures are simply showing all of the possible screens which can be accessed on the GUI. This is mainly helpful when learning to navigate. The shaded block at the top of each menu tree represents the Main Menu which is accessed using the Quick navigation hardware button on the Control Panel or one of the 5 software buttons on the right side of the HOME Page. Each successive level represents the software buttons which will show up on the right side of the GUI.

NOTE:Multi-cabinet Atlas ISDB-T transmitters will require an extra button press at the top level menu to select the desired cabinet.

To Figure 3-30



Figure 3-37 Drive Chain Menu Structure

Figure 3-38 Power Amp Menu Structure

DRIVECHAIN

DriveFaults

DriveMeters

DriveService

ExciterStatus

Main Menu

RFUSetup

POWER AMP

PAFaults

PAMeters

PAService

More PAFaults

More PAMeters

PA ModuleRemoval

PA ModuleAlignment

Main Menu

(Auto-Bias)



Figure 3-39 Output Menu Structure

Figure 3-40 Power Supply Menu Structure

OUTPUT

OutputFaults

OutputMeters

OutputService

PA RejectService

REFLCAL

Main Menu

FWDCAL

POWERSUPPLY

PSFaults

PSMeters

Main Menu



Figure 3-41 System Menu Structure

SYSTEM

SystemControl

SystemCooling System

LogSystemService

SystemSetup

SoftwareRevision

Control

HardwareRevision

CoolingFaults

CoolingMeters

CoolingService

Touch ScreenCalibration

Main Menu

Setup


Section 4Theory of Operation


4
4.1 Introduction
This section contains detailed descriptions of the Atlas Series transmitter and its internal sub-assemblies and any pertinent information regarding the external assemblies such as the pump module and heat exchanger.

The rest of this section will be broken up into 4 main topics:

• Control System

• RF System

• Power Supplies

• Cooling System

4.1.1 Active Logic Symbols

Each logic signal has an active and inactive state and a unique name within the system. To differentiate between active high or active low logic states on the schematics, a forward slash (/) is placed in front of an active LOW signal name such as /RF_MUTE. This means that if this logic line is pulled low, the transmitter RF will be muted. By the same logic, the signal RF_MUTE_LED (an active high signal with no forward slash) will turn on the RF mute LED when it goes high.

In some cases, a logic signal may act as a toggle with both states active, as with the signal /ON_OFF, where LOW = ON and a HIGH = OFF. If this signal is inverted it would be ON_/OFF.

4-1 to servicing.

Section 4 Theory of Operation ATLAS ISDB-T

4.2 Block Diagram Descriptions

See Figure 1-2 on page 1-4 through Figure 1-5 on page 1-7 for a basic block diagram of the ISDB-T transmitter system. There is also an overall transmitter block diagram at the front of the schematic package that came with the transmitter. As a standard practice, the first page of a PC board schematic is also a block diagram of that board. Table 4-1 gives the basic Atlas ISDB-T model numbers and configurations.

4.3 Transmitter Control System

The Atlas Series transmitters utilize a very advanced but simple to use control system. It is a microprocessor, serial communication based software control system but uses backup Life Support logic circuitry and hard wired control lines, allowing the transmitter to be on the air even if the main control system fails.

Figure 4-1 shows a simplified block diagram of the transmitter control system. The left side of the diagram shows the external connections to the transmitter or more specifically the External I/O Board. The right side of the diagram shows the internal control system inter-connections from the Main Controller to the various sub-systems inside the transmitter cabinet.

Table 4-1 Atlas ISDB-T Transmitter Models

Tx Models Cabinets PA Modules Output Power

DVI850 1 2 850W

DVI1700 1 4 1.7kW

DVI2500 1 6 2.5kW

DVI3400 1 8 3.4kW

DVI5000 2 6+6 5.0kW

DVI6800 2 8+8 6.8kW

DVI7500 3 8+8+4 7.5kW

DVI9000 3 8+8+8 8.0kW

NOTE: All power levels given in average power. Power measured at output of transmitter, ahead of filter.


Section 4 Theory of OperationATLAS ISDB-T

Figure 4-1 Control System Simplified Block Diagram

NOTE:eCDi™ is an optional Transmitter Network Interface appliance that provides completely comprehensive remote control and monitoring of every data point within the transmitter. It includes an SNMP (Simple Network Management Pro-tocol) manager, and allows integration with most Control Systems via the Inter-net or LAN.

4.3.1 Micro Module

All of the control boards in the transmitter use the 376 Micro Module. The micro module is a daughter board with a standardized interface which is plugged into a motherboard. It contains Flash memory for storage of its programming and SRAM for program execution. The programming in the flash memory can be re-programmed or upgraded using In-System Programming or ISP (no hardware needs to be changed) via serial connection. In general the micro modules are responsible for control, monitoring and reporting, but have very little to do with transmitter protection which is handled mainly by the CPLD (see "4.3.2 CPLD, Complex Programmable Logic Device" on page 4-4).



Features of the 376 module include:

a. Built-in CAN (Controller Area Network) bus controller

b. 16 A/D inputs for analog metering

c. A serial EEPROM for non-volatile memory storage

d. A built in clock running at 4.194MHz which will let the micro run at 16-25MHz

e. Power failure detection

f. A watchdog which will reset the micro if it is not triggered at least every 1.6 seconds (this time interval will change depending on the application). A discrete logic device or CPLD is almost always provided on the motherboard to act as an I/O expansion device and in some cases as life support if the micro module fails.

g. Multiple I/O lines whose direction of signal flow is based on the flash memory programming. These could be control or status, inputs or outputs, depending on the particular use.

The main responsibility of the micro module is control of the CPLD and the reporting and receiving of information over the CAN bus. This means that the CPLD will continue to monitor and protect the systems to which it is connected even if the micro module fails. However, there will be no reporting of information to the rest of the transmitter system since access to the CAN bus is gone without the micro module.

4.3.2 CPLD, Complex Programmable Logic Device

The transmitter control boards with the micro module also incorporate a CPLD (Complex Programmable Logic Device) with the exception of the module controllers. The CPLD is not a microprocessor but is actually just programmed discrete logic and is therefore very stable and reliable. The CPLD’s in the transmitter perform two vital functions in terms of control and transmitter monitoring:

a. I/O Expansion

b. Life Support Backup

4.3.2.1 I/O Expansion

Each Micro Module only has a limited number of Input/Output or I/O lines available. The CPLD’s provide a way to easily expand the available I/O ports on each control board. Basically, the CPLD’s are actually controlling and monitoring the I/O for each control board. The micro module is taking that information and relaying it, via the CAN bus, to the Main Controller for display on the front panel control screen or a remote



control system. If the micro module wants to send a control command, it simply addresses the correct I/O line on the CPLD and it then sends out the command.

4.3.2.2 Life Support Backup

The CPLD monitors the watchdog circuit or more specifically the RESET line on the micro module. If the micro module stops executing its program, the watchdog circuit will activate the micro reset line and the control board in question is considered to be in "Life Support Mode". Since all metering and status is done via the CAN bus, the CPLD will still monitor and protect the systems to which it is connected, but there will be no information reporting to the rest of the control system, the front panel display or a remote control. Control and protection are now limited to the hardwired control lines on the system control bus and any protection circuits built into the CPLD or the control board itself.

For more information on specific functionality of each control board in a life support mode, see the individual control board descriptions later in this section.

4.3.3 Controller Area Network (CAN) Bus

The Controller Area Network or CAN bus is a high speed serial communications link which is used between the transmitter control boards for transmission of control, status, fault and metering information. The CAN bus is distributed as part of the System Control Bus (ribbon cable). The CAN bus can operate at speeds up to 1Mbps and is designed to operate in hostile industrial environments. The transceivers feature cross wire, loss of ground, over voltage and over temperature protections. A CAN transceiver connected to the CAN bus is considered a Node. There can be up to 110 nodes on the bus with a maximum bus length of about 40 meters for 1Mbps operation.

In a CAN system, data is transmitted and received using Message Frames. Message Frames carry data from a transmitting node to one or more receiving nodes. The messages transmitted from any node on a CAN bus do not contain addresses of either the transmitting node or of any intended receiving node.

Instead, the content of each Message Frame (e.g. ON, OFF, PS 1 Voltage, Coolant Flow OK etc.) is labeled by an identifier that is unique throughout the network. All other nodes on the network receive the message and each performs an acceptance test on the identifier to determine if the message, and thus its content, is relevant to that particular node. If the message is relevant, it will be processed; otherwise it is ignored.

The micro modules have a built in CAN controller which connects to a CAN Transceiver which becomes a node on the CAN bus. The CAN transceiver interfaces



the single ended CAN controller to the differential CAN bus for high common mode noise immunity, as shown in Figure 4-2. All of the control boards can send and receive information over the differential CAN bus, however the Main Controller determines what information is sent and when it is sent for this application.

NOTE:There is an LED on the Main Controller, DS24, which will flicker on and off at a random rate indicating that there is activity on the CAN bus. If the LED is off or always on, then the CAN bus is most likely not communicating.

Figure 4-2 CAN Transceiver Diagram

All fault reporting and status and metering information displayed on the GUI is sent on the CAN bus to the Main Controller and to the External I/O board for remote monitoring. Transmitter control signals are also sent via CAN but are also sent over hardwired parallel control lines.

4.3.4 System Control Bus

The System Control Bus is a multi-conductor ribbon cable which distributes the CAN (Controller Area Network) bus and several parallel control lines to all micro-controllers in the system. System Control Bus connection points include:

1. Main Controller

2. Backplane Interface Board

3. PA Module Controllers (via the Backplane Interface Board)

4. RF Controller Board

5. Power Block Controller Board

6. External I/O Board

1

8

7 6

5

4

32

StandbyControl Reference

Voltage

Transmitter Receiver

VREF

RXDTXD

RS

CANH CANL

GND VCC

TXD and RXDconnect to theCAN controllerbuilt into theMicro Module

(Differential CAN Bus)



4.3.4.1 Parallel Control Lines

The parallel control lines are used for quick actuation of critical functions, such as ON, OFF, RF mute, PS mute, AC_Low and Fault Off. These lines are also the backup control lines in Life Support mode when the Main Controller (and therefore the CAN bus) is not operational. Each board in the control system can independently activate some or all of the parallel control lines to protect the transmitter in case of a fault or other condition that may adversely affect the transmitter. These parallel control signals are duplicated in the CAN messages. The following is a brief explanation of each of the parallel control lines included in the system control bus.

a. ON_/OFFThis command corresponds to the transmitter operator pushing the "ON" or "OFF" button, thereby turning the transmitter on or off respectively. This signal is high for ON and low for OFF. This is driven only by the Main Controller and is a sense only line for the rest of the control boards.

b. /RESTRIKE (reset)This command is monitored by all of the control boards but is driven only by the Main Controller board. When the transmitter is already turned ON and the operator presses the "ON" button again, this line will be pulsed low for a minimum of 100ms. This will cause all of the controller boards to reset any faults and status and try to return to normal operation. This line is a sense only line for the rest of the control boards.This command is basically a RESET pulse which will try to turn on any transmitter components which have faulted off due to a critical fault condition. If they are still faulty, this will be detected and the component will simply be shut off again. This will not reset or clear the Fault Log.

c. /FLT_OFFThis command is initiated whenever a fault occurs that requires all RF to be shut off and the PA supplies to be disabled. This is a latching type signal that requires user input to clear the fault and turn the transmitter back on. This signal is active low. The Main Controller, Power Block Controller, External I/O and RF Controller Board monitor this line and have the ability to activate it if necessary.

d. /RF_MUTEThe /RF_MUTE line shuts down all RF output temporarily until the fault condition is cleared. This is a non-latching signal. The Main Controller, Power Block Controller, External I/O, and RF Controller boards monitor this line and have the ability to activate it if necessary.



e. /PS_MUTEThe /PS_MUTE line shuts down the output of the 32 Volt PA module supplies temporarily until the fault condition is cleared.This is a non-latching signal. The Main Controller, Power Block Controller, External I/O and RF Controller Boards monitor this line and have the ability to activate it if necessary.

f. /AC_LOWThis signal is an early warning of impending loss of control voltage. When the AC line voltage that powers the LVPS(s) drops below an acceptable threshold the board will pull this open collector line low. Phase samples L3-L1 (C-A) are continuously monitored. The other boards in the control system will use this indication as an advanced warning to save any data and prepare for loss of power.The Power Block Controller board is the only control board with the ability to drive this signal and it will affect the Main Controller, External I/O and RF Controller Boards.

g. ALC - Automatic Level Control. The ALC signal is used to control the transmitter power output and is normally sent digitally over the CAN bus. This line carries a voltage from the Main Controller to the PA Modules which is an analog version of the digital ALC signal sent over the CAN bus. It is a backup signal only used by the modules if the CAN bus fails and the modules lose communication with the Main Controller. If the CAN bus is operational, this signal is not used.

4.3.5 Main Controller

The Main Controller is the primary interface between the transmitter and the operator via the front panel Graphical User Interface or GUI. It is connected to all transmitter subsystems, both internal and external to the transmitter, through the CAN (Controller Area Network) bus and dedicated parallel control lines. The CAN bus and the parallel control lines are distributed on a single multi-conductor cable called the System Control Bus.

The Main Controller is mounted directly behind the front control panel. It is directly connected to the front panel switchboard which is considered a "Mezzanine" board. The front panel switchboard uses a CPLD to serialize the I/O (the control lines and status signals) to and from the Main Controller.

4.3.5.1 Transmitter Control

The Main Controller is the central point for all system control, metering and diagnostics. It reports this information to the operator via the Graphical User Interface or GUI and through several remote control options.



4.3.5.1.1 Graphical User Interface (GUI)

The GUI is a touchscreen LCD display which is equivalent to 1/4 of a VGA display. This is the primary local interface for the operator but is not required to operate the transmitter. The primary operator controls, ON, OFF, RAISE, LOWER are located on the front panel next to the GUI. Operation and navigation of the GUI is covered in Section 3 of this manual.

4.3.5.1.2 Remote Controls

There are 3 remote control and monitoring options which can all access information gathered by the Main Controller via the External I/O Board. These options are shown on the left side of Figure 4-1.

a. Standard Parallel Remote Control System - The External I/O Board has con-nections for dedicated remote control systems with the standard parallel control inputs, status outputs and analog metering outputs.

4.3.5.2 Serial Connections

The Main Controller has 5 serial ports (these are not for remote control applications):

a. 2 RS-485 serial ports, J5 and J6.

b. 1 serial port (part of ribbon cable J11) is connected to the External I/O Board but is not used at present.

c. 1 serial port, J90, is available for operator connection to run the In-System Programming or ISP software, supplied by Harris, to update the software for the Main Controller and/or any other micro in the transmitter.

d. 1 serial port, J7, is used by the optional eCDi interface.

4.3.5.3 Life Support Mode, Main Controller

The CPLD handles most of the inputs and outputs or I/O to the Main Controller. It also allows the CPLD to be able to maintain the transmitter on the air in a limited protection mode called "Life Support" in case the micro module fails. In this mode, the main function of the CPLD is to monitor the primary transmitter control and status lines and interface the front panel controls (ON/OFF, Raise/Lower, Remote Enable/Disable) to the rest of the transmitter.



In Life Support Mode, there is also limited remote control input available from the External I/O Board via J11 on the Main Controller, including:

• Remote ON and OFF• Remote Drive Chain Select• Remote Pump Select• Remote Raise and Lower• External Interlock

Transmitter power will be controlled by the analog ALC (Automatic Level Control) voltage sent over a discrete line on the System Control Cable to all of the PA modules (normally the ALC value is sent over the CAN bus to control transmitter power).

4.3.5.3.3 Manual Switching

There are 3 momentary switches on the Main Controller board, 2 of which are primarily for use in a life support mode when the micro module has failed and the GUI is therefore not available. These switches are for:

• Micro RESET, S2

• RF SEL, S4 - Not used in Atlas ISDB-T transmitter

• Pump Select, S5. This switch is labeled PUMP SEL. This will select the alternate coolant pump in the pump module.

These switches can be used at any time to reset the microprocessor or switch to the alternate coolant pump, but are meant for use during a life support mode when the GUI is not operational. Note the corresponding LED will illuminate for the pump selected.

Under normal operating conditions, the GUI or a remote control should be used to switch pumps. Also keep in mind that pump switching is an automatic function should there be a loss of coolant flow.

NOTE:To switch between the A or B RF Drive chain, press the Drive Switch (blue but-ton) on the front panel of the RFU. The corresponding LED will illuminate.

4.3.5.4 Manual RF MUTE

The Main Controller has a toggle switch, S3 which can be used to mute the transmitter RF output without shutting it off. This switch is primarily used for initial turn on and troubleshooting but can be used for any purpose which requires the RF output to be



muted. When activated, the LED (DS13) next to S3 will illuminate and the GUI will indicate an RF MUTE is present.

4.3.6 External I/O Board

The primary function of the External I/O Board is exactly as its name implies. It is the interface between the internal transmitter control system and all external or peripheral devices. Input/Output or I/O ports on the External I/O Board include:

a. System Control Bus connection to the Main Controller which includes the CAN bus and parallel control lines.

b. External I/O Control Cable which connects to the Main Controller. This cable has an RS-232 connection and several discrete remote control and status lines which will be used in the event of a failure of the CAN bus. These remote control and status lines include:

1. On and OFF

2. Raise and Lower

3. Driver A / Driver B Select

4. Pump 1 / Pump 2 Select

5. Driver A / Driver B Status

6. Pump 1 / Pump 2 Status

7. External Interlock

NOTE:These 7 lines represent the basic remote control functions and status indications that will be available if the CAN bus is not functioning.

c. Four (4) RS-232 communications ports.

1. One (1) is connected directly to the serial port on the micro-module and is used for VT-100 diagnostics and for ISP (In-System Programming).

2. Two (2) are for connection to an external computer or modem for serial remote control applications (applications provided by customer).

3. The last one is part of the External I/O Control cable which connects to the Main Controller, but is not used at present.

d. Five (5) parallel remote control connections.

1. Two (2) Remote Control Input Connectors (J13 and J14)

2. Two (2) Remote Status Output Connectors (J15 and J16)



3. One (1) Remote Metering Output Connection (J17)

NOTE:A complete listing of the parallel remote control connectors is given in Table 2-7, Table 2-8, and Table 2-9 starting on page 2-39.

e. External Interlock Terminal Block which gives a connection point for up to 6 external interlocks.

f. Pump Module Control Cable connection.

g. External System I/O Cable (J11) which is the connection point for an N+1 controller as well as Isolation load connections.

4.3.6.1 External Interlocks (J18 and J11)

J18 is designed to allow connection of up to 6 serially connected external interlock con-tacts. Four are used for Fault-Off activation and two are used for RF Mute activation. The transmitter is shipped with 6 jumpers installed on J18; bypassing all of the J18 external interlocks. The External Interlock circuit requires a closed contact between J18-1 and ground. This activates the External interlock relay K1 and allows the trans-mitter to turn on.

To use any one of the interlocks simply remove a jumper and connect the terminals to the interlock contacts of the external device. If the device opens the contact, the trans-mitter will be shut off. If the external interlock is not going to be used, all 6 jumpers must be installed, effectively connecting J18-1 to ground to allow the transmitter to turn on.

The External Interlock circuit uses relay K1 to directly drive the parallel control lines on the System Control Bus. If an interlock circuit is opened, relay K1 will relax to the posi-tion shown on the schematic. This will apply an RF Mute, PS Mute and most impor-tantly Fault-Off. During a Fault-Off condition the transmitter is shut off and cannot be turned on again until the external interlock circuit is closed and a new ON command is given locally or by remote.

J11 also provides an external interlock contact that will produce an RF Mute condition designed for use with a water cooled reject load or air cooled reject load thermal protec-tion. The transmitter is shipped with a jumper across this interlock connection.

Additional information regarding the interlock connections for J18 and J11 are provided in the Electrical Installation drawing (sheets 1 and 2).



4.3.6.2 Fault-Off Interlocks (J18)

There are four External Interlock terminals provided on J18 which will shut the trans-mitter off when the circuit is opened. These are primarily to be used for the protection of personnel. The Fault-Off jumpers are installed as follows:

• J18 pins 1-2 (connected to 3 Port Patch Panel or switch)

• J18 pins 3-4

• J18 pins 5-6

• J18 pins 7-8

NOTE:Fault-off interlocks will shut the transmitter off if opened and are provided for use in protection of personnel.



4.3.6.3 RF Mute Interlocks (J18)

There are two interlock connections on J18 which can be used to apply an RF Mute con-dition while in Test Load mode. These are:

• J18-9 to J18-10 (for test load flow, test load thermal protection)

• J18-11 to J18-12 (for test load flow, test load thermal protection)

! WARNING:NOT TO BE USED IN ANY SITUATION WHERE PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL IS AN ISSUE.

The two RF Mute interlocks associated with J18 (described above) are not active when the transmitter is in the Antenna mode. They will be active when the transmitter is in the Test Load mode. When the transmitter is in the Antenna mode, flow to the RF test load can be turned off without causing an RF mute condition in the transmitter. By connecting a flow switch to an RF Mute interlock, only the RF output is held off until the coolant flow is present.

Control of the J18 RF Mute interlocks is accomplished via connections at J12 on the External I/O board. Closed contacts S1A on the patch panel status switch connected across J12-1 and J12-3 cause the transmitter to be in the Antenna mode (disabling the RF Mute interlocks on J18). Closed contacts S2A on the patch panel status switch con-nected across J12-1 and J12-4 cause the transmitter to be in the Test Load mode (enabling the RF Mute interlocks on J18).

When the transmitter is first turned on there is little or no coolant flow and if a flow switch were to be connected to a Fault OFF interlock (J18, 1-8), the transmitter cannot be turned on. However, by connecting a flow switch to the RF Mute interlock, only the RF output is held off until the coolant flow is present.

While the J18 RF Mute interlocks can be used for any purpose where it is desired to mute the RF temporarily (with transmitter in Test Load mode), the primary purpose is for use on a flow switch in a water cooled resistive test load.

The RF Mute interlocks on J18 can also be used for a dummy load thermal interlock. To use either of the interlocks simply remove a jumper and connect the terminals to the



interlock contacts of the external device. If the transmitter is in the Test Load mode and a device opens the contact, the RF will mute. If the RF Mute external interlocks are not going to be used, jumpers must be installed.

4.3.6.4 RF Mute Interlock (J11)

Another interlock connection on J11 can be used to apply an RF Mute:

• J11-10 to J11-12 (for water cooled reject load flow, or air cooled reject load thermal protection, in multi-cabinet systems)

The difference between the J11 interlock and the J18 RF Mute interlock is that the J11 interlock is always active – regardless of Load or Antenna mode.

! WARNING:NOT TO BE USED IN ANY SITUATION WHERE PROTECTION OF PERSONNEL IS AN ISSUE.

As shown in the Electrical Installation drawing the J11-10 to J11-12 RF Mute interlock should be connected to the reject load flow switch in multi cabinet applications. The interlock is active in both Antenna and Test Load modes.

4.4 Transmitter RF System

4.4.1 Apex Exciter(s)

The Atlas transmitter comes standard with a single Apex exciter. A second, standby exciter is available as an option along with an exciter changeover switch in the RF Unit (RFU). Operation and information about the Apex exciter is contained in the instruction manuals shipped with the exciter. The output of the exciter(s) are connected to the RFU.

4.4.2 RF Unit (RFU)

The RF Unit or RFU is a configurable unit which will have different components and uses depending on the transmitter power level and the number of exciters. It is a 2 RU device mounted in the front of the transmitter just above the exciters. Its basic function is to house the exciter changeover switch when required, and provide for exciter and



cabinet power metering. The RFU in cabinet 1 for multi-cabinet systems also provides for total power metering, and drive power splitting to feed each of the PA cabinets. The following examples cover the different configurations which are shown on the RFU Wiring Diagram, 843-5585-003:

Configuration 1: With Single Exciter

• For this configuration the RFU contains of the RFU Controller for monitoring of the drive and power outputs. In multi-cabinet configurations it will also contain a two or 3 way splitter.

Configuration 2: With Dual Exciters

• For this configuration the RFU will include the RFU controller, and an RF drive switch with a dummy load for the off-air exciter. This allows for RF monitoring of the output power, and of both exciters and automatic (or manual) changeover in case the output of the on-air exciter fails. In multi-cabinet configurations it will also contain a two or 3 way splitter.

The RF output(s) of the RFU connect to the Backplane Interface Boards for distribution to the PA Modules in each cabinet.

4.4.3 RF Controller Board

The RF Controller board is located inside the RFU subassembly towards the top of the cabinet rack. The RF Controller is responsible for the following:

a. Communicating with the System Controller via the internal Controller Area Net-work bus

b. Monitoring system and cabinet forward RF power

c. Monitoring cabinet reflected RF power

d. Maintaining hardware trip points for reject loads and forward and reflected power sense ports to generate an exception on the transmitter parallel bus in the event of a fault while in Life Support mode

e. Calculation of VSWR based on Forward and Reflected power samples (Not applicable in Life Support mode)

While this board utilizes the micro module, it is basically just responsible for communicating information from the CPLD to the Main Controller.



4.4.3.1 RF Detectors

There are 2 types of RF detectors used on the RF Controller board:

• Relative - Used to monitor the reject load power levels. These detectors are very accurate at a calibrated power level, but are not linear across a wide dynamic range.

• Precision - Used for metering of critical (metered) forward and reflected power levels of the cabinet and the system. These are true RMS detectors that are linear at all power levels, giving the accurate readings required for metering and VSWR protection.

Parameters monitored by the RF detectors include:

a. Precision RF power measurement #1 Cabinet Forward Power

b. Precision RF power measurement #2 Cabinet Reflected Power

c. Precision RF power measurement #3 System Forward Power

d. Precision RF power measurement #4 System Reflected Power

e. Precision RF power measurement #5 Drive Chain A Power

f. Precision RF power measurement #6 Drive Chain B Power

4.4.3.2 Cabinet Reject Load RF Detector (Relative)

The cabinet reject load RF detectors are a diode based envelope detector. These detectors are intended to provide relative readings only, not accurate absolute power measurements. The inputs for these detectors come from the customer I/O panel.

The reject load RF detector samples are used for 2 purposes:

• Overload protection of the reject loads

• Cabinet RF phase alignment

4.4.3.3 PA Module Reject Load Protection

The PA module reject loads, located inside the module combiner, are sized with enough margin to allow operation under any imbalance condition that may be encountered, with only one exception. In cases where four consecutive PA modules (1 thru 4 or 5 thru 8)



are off or missing the reject load in the final stage of the combiner will see maximum power. The transmitter will continue to operate in this condition for for one minute before the transmitter shuts down to protect the combiner reject loads. When shutdown occurs the error screen shown in Figure 4-3 will appear as a reminder to relocate PA modules.

When four consecutive PA modules are inoperative they will need to be repositioned so that there are no longer four failed modules in either postions 1 thru 4 or 5 thru 8. Any combination of four failed modules is acceptable except for locating them all in 1 thru 4 or 5 thru 8.

Figure 4-3 Fault-Off Message Screen

4.4.3.4 PA Module Phase Alignment

NOTE:The 6-way combiner (for 6 PA module cabinets) is not equipped to individually phase each module, nor is it capable of supporting the "Auto Phase" mode. Therefore, the individual phasing adjust buttons or the Auto Phase button will not appear on the GUI screens as described in the following section.

The outputs of the reject load temperature sensors are multiplexed into a 10bit ADC (Analog to Digital Converter) on the micro module. The ADC output will correspond to the reject load temperature in degrees Centigrade. This temperature value shows up on the "PA Reject Service" screen on the GUI. A value of 0234 would correspond to a reject load temperature of 23.4 degrees C. A higher level of green in the bars indicates



an increased reject load temperature. For a detailed PA Module and Cabinet phasing procedure refer to "5.4 PA Module Phasing" on page 5-6.

Figure 4-4 PA Module and Cabinet Phasing ScreenTo access press: OUTPUT, OUTPUT SERVICE, PA REJ SERVICE

If all of the modules have the correct insertion phase, the reject loads temperatures will be mininum on the PA Reject Service screen, and the temperature levels for each reject load will be similar and approximately 3 degrees above coolant temperature.

The reject load phasing can be done manually by selecting the module button and then adjusting the + or - buttons while monitoring reject load temperature or autophasing can be selected which will automatically minimize the temperature of each reject load. The automated process takes approximately 15 minutes to complete.

4.4.3.5 Normal Mode / Life Support Mode

The RF Controller operates in one of two modes, Normal and Life Support (micro module failure). Normal Mode differs from Life Support mode only in that reporting capability back to the Main Controller is lost in Life Support mode. All other fault handling functions, including comparator thresholds, are maintained by the CPLD even though the micro module is not functioning.

Temperature level indegs. C without


GOAL: To get the temperature level readings as low as possible (typically about 3 degrees above coolant temperature)

Module Groupselect buttons

Reject Loads


decimal. 23.6o here.



4.4.4 Backplane Interface Board

The Backplane Interface Board is accessed from the rear of the transmitter and is located just above the PA Module compartment. Its function is to distribute low voltage and control signals to the PA modules.

4.4.4.1 RF Splitter

The output of the RFU drives the 8-way, in phase, splitter located behind the backplane interface board in the rear of the transmitter. This type of splitter is broadband, covering the entire UHF range. When fewer than 8 PA modules are installed, the unused splitter outputs are terminated with a 50 Ohm element.

4.4.4.2 Control Distribution

The System Control Bus is also distributed to all of the PA Modules from here. The control bus includes both dedicated parallel control lines and the CAN (Controller Area Network) bus.

4.4.4.3 Low Voltage Power Supply Distribution

The LVPS is distributed to all of the PA Modules and includes:

• +7.5Vdc

• +15Vdc

• -15Vdc

For more information on the Low Voltage Power Supplies or LVPS, see "4.5.6 Low Voltage Power Supplies (LVPS)" on page 4-35

4.4.5 PA Module

The Atlas ISDB-T PA Module is a wide band, high gain, liquid cooled RF amplifier. Each PA module has a maximum RF output of 465W average power with a liquid cooled heat sink. The number of PA modules is determined by the transmitter power level or model and is given in Table 4-1. A fully populated cabinet has 8 PA Modules. Each PA module has a smart controller which interfaces via the CAN and parallel



control bus to the transmitter Main Controller. Any faults in the module will be reported to the Main Controller for diagnostics via the CAN bus. A simplified block diagram of the PA module is shown in Figure 4-5.

Figure 4-5 PA Module Simplified Block Diagram

The PA Module is made up of the following components:

a. Phase and Gain Board

b. Predriver pallet (actually 1/2 of an amplifier pallet)

c. Two driver pallets

d. Two 4-way RF splitters

e. Eight (8) Power Amplifier pallets

f. Eight (8) way pallet combiner (not to be confused with the 8-way Module combiner)



g. Directional Coupler for Forward and Reflected power metering and protection

h. Liquid cooled heatsink or cold-plate

i. PA Module Controller board (this includes a micro module)

j. Power Supply board

k. Power Supply Front End board

4.4.5.1 Phase and Gain Board

The RF enters the module and is routed directly to the Phase and Gain Board. This board provides several functions which are key to operation of the module:

a. It acts as a gain block to increase the RF input to a level that is sufficient to drive the predriver pallet.

b. It has an RF input switch which is used to mute and un-mute the RF through the module.

c. Input power sampling for metering and Input over-drive detection.

d. Receives I and Q vector control signals from the Module Controller Board which are used for module insertion phase and gain. This allows all of the modules to be adjusted for best phase and gain by the Main Controller in order to reduce the reject power in the module combiner and optimize PA efficiency. For 2 cabinet systems, all modules in a cabinet can be adjusted at the same time to permit cabinet phase and gain adjustment to minimize the cabinet combiner reject power. All phase and gain adjustments are done from the GUI.

e. Automatic Level Control or ALC to keep the power output of the module constant.

The RF output from the Phase and gain board connects to the Predriver pallet



Figure 4-6 Phase and Gain Board Block Diagram

4.4.5.1.1 Automatic Level Control (ALC)

Each PA module uses an Automatic Level Control or ALC circuit to keep the module power output constant. The Module Controller receives an ALC control signal from the Main Controller via the CAN bus. This signal is driven by the raise and lower buttons on the control panel. A backup analog ALC voltage is also sent to each module via one of the parallel control lines. This analog voltage will only be used if CAN communications are lost.

The forward power output of the module is based on the factory calibration of the forward power sample from the pallet combiner inside the module. The ALC circuit on the Phase and Gain board will increase or decrease the drive level to the predriver to keep the module output constant. However, if a pallet were to fail, the PA Module Controller will reduce output RF signal so that the pallets are not over-driven and pre-correction requirements do not change significantly.

4.4.5.2 RF Pallets

The PA module utilizes several LDMOS RF amplifier pallets. The pallet is actually made up of 2 push-pull amplifiers with a hybrid splitter on the input and a hybrid combiner on the output. Eight (8) pallets are used as the main power amplifiers or PA

-3 dB

Stage 1 Clamp

2-way splitter

EnvelopeDetector

Comparator

Mean Square circuit

RF Mute Vector Modulator

Stage 2 J3 RF OUT

J2 RF IN

J1-4 INPUT POWER OVERDRIVE

J1-2 INPUT POWER SAMPLE

J1-8 ALC_REF J1-10

PHASE_REF

J1-5 RF_ON

J1-6 RF_Off

Back Porch level detector

J1-19 Back Porch pulses

J1-17 Digital/Analog

J1-3 INPUT OVERDRIVE

REFERENCE



pallets, two (2) are used as Driver Pallets and 1/2 of one pallet is used for a Predriver. A simplified diagram of the pallet is given in Figure 4-7.

Figure 4-7 Pallet Simplified Diagram

4.4.5.2.2 Auto Bias Circuit

As LDMOS devices age, their biasing requirements change. To account for this, the module controller has the ability to automatically re-bias the pallets for the correct idle current by adjusting the gate bias voltages. This Auto Bias procedure should be done at regularly scheduled intervals and is initiated manually using the GUI.

NOTE:When the biasing procedure is initiated, the module will be muted and transmitter RF output will be affected. This procedure takes about 5 seconds.

The pallets get their gate bias voltages from 10 bit DAC’s (Digital to Analog Converters) on the Module Controller. Each pallet is divided into a Side A and Side B with each side having one Push-Pull Pair (PPP) LDMOS device. Each PPP has its own bias signal from a DAC output, but there is only one current sensor for each pallet. Therefore, the Auto Bias adjustment will be carried out on one side of all 8 pallets at a time, then it will do the other side to assure that each half is drawing its share of the idle current.

To bias the module, the controller will disable the ALC and mute the RF by opening the RF switch on the Phase and gain board. Then it will zero the bias currents for one side of all the pallets and adjust the bias for the desired idle current on the other half of each pallet. Then it will store these settings and repeat the procedure for the other half of the pallets.

Side A

Side B



If during the bias procedure, one or more of the pallet currents does not fall within the acceptable margin of error, the procedure will be aborted and a warning of "Auto Bias Failure" will be sent to the Main Controller and the Fault Log.

For information about running the Auto Bias procedure refer to "5.3 PA Module Auto Bias Procedure" on page 5-5.

4.4.5.3 Pallet Splitters and Combiner

The two 4-way drive splitters and the 8-way pallet combiner are stripline hybrid circuits. The pallet combiner also has a directional coupler to sense forward and reflected power at the output of the module. The forward power sample is used for power monitoring and module ALC (Automatic Level Control). The reflected sample is used to protect the module from excessive VSWR.

4.4.5.4 Module Controller

The Module Controller uses the 376 micro module and is responsible for the following:

• Communicating with the Main Controller via the CAN bus.

• Monitoring drain current to each of eight RF pallets (from internal +32V PA power supply), driver, pre-driver and phase and gain board in the module for over-current conditions and for pallet biasing.

• Monitoring the coldplate temperature at the pre-driver, and PA Power Supply board temperature.

• Control and monitoring of PA power supply, including over and under voltage fault warnings.

• Executing phase adjustment commands from the Main Controller by generating I and Q control signals for the Phase and Gain Board.

• The Module Controller receives an output power reference level from the Main Con-troller via the CAN bus. This signal is used by the Module Controller ALC circuit to control the module output power by adjusting the level of I and Q signals to the Phase and Gain board.

• Fault monitoring and alarm generation, and control of module 3 Strike process.

• Monitoring RF input and output power to/from the module.

• Determining when to use the backup analog Automatic Level Control or ALC volt-age.



NOTE:For a complete listing of all faults handled by the Module controller see Table 6-2 on page 6-10.

4.4.5.5 PS Front End Board

The main function of the PS Front End board is to rectify the 3 phase AC entering the module to high voltage DC used by the DC/DC converters. This board also serves to filter the power source of common mode noise.

Figure 4-8 Front End Block Diagram

4.4.5.6 Power Supply Board

The Power Supply Board is designed to connect the 5 DC/DC converters in parallel in order to provide sufficient DC power for one Atlas ISDB-T PA module. This board accepts high voltage DC as an input from the Front End board which converts the three phase mains voltage to DC with a three-phase, full-wave bridge rectifier. The high voltage DC is passed through a fuse to each converter. The primary or high-voltage side of the converters is floating with respect to earth ground. The converter outputs are low-voltage, ground referenced DC and are connected to a common bus through OR-ing diodes. This low voltage is used to supply the drain voltage requirements of the RF transistors on the PA pallets, drivers, predriver and phase/gain boards.

The Power Supply Board provides input short-circuit protection for each DC/DC converter. It provides status monitoring for each converter and a single temperature sample for the circuit board. The Power Supply Board provides a means to electronically adjust the converter output bus voltage, and provides current monitoring for each load with the ability to turn off any converter independently.



4.4.6 PA Module Combiner

The module combiner is a compact set of Wilkinson combiners optimized to work across the entire UHF frequency band from 470MHz to 860MHz. There are several combiner configurations depending on the number of PA modules. Figure 4-9 shows a full 8-way PA module combiner assembly. All four combiner sizes are designed for equal phase relationships of each input.

NOTE:All of the systems use the 8-way Backplane Interface board with any un-used splitter outputs terminated as in the case of the 2, 4 or 6 module systems (6-way RF system is not shown).

Figure 4-9 8-Way RF System - DVI 3400



Figure 4-10 4-Way RF System - DVI1700

Figure 4-11 2-Way RF System - DVI900

1

2

3

4

5

50 Ohm

50 Ohm

50 Ohm

50 Ohm

50 Ohm

50 Ohm



4.4.6.1 Combiner Isolation Loads

The combiner isolation loads are located inside the modular combiner. Except for the 6-way combiner, the reject load temperatures are monitored by the power block controller board and then minimized by adjusting the module Phase and Gain from the control panel. The isolation loads are mounted on the water cooled heatsinks (or Cold Plates) inside the combiner.

4.5 Power Supplies

This section covers both the AC and DC portions of the power supply as well as control, protection and monitoring. Actual sub-assemblies involved include:

a. MOV Board

b. OVP Board

c. Low Voltage Power Supplies or LVPS

d. Power Block Controller Board

4.5.1 AC Input

The AC mains input comes into the transmitter and attaches to TB5 on the cabinet ceiling, then is internally routed to CB9, the AC Mains breaker in the front of the transmitter. This is tied into terminal block TB1 which gives the necessary tie points for distribution to the 3 phase auto-transformer.

4.5.2 Autotransformer

Nominal 3 phase input voltage is 208, 220, 240, or 380, 400, 415VAC. Tolerable AC line variation is ±10%.

Nominal 3 phase output is 260VAC to supply the PA modules, and it also provides a 230VAC secondary output to power the LVPS units and the exciter(s).

4.5.3 MOV Board

The MOV board supplies a scaled AC current sample of each of the phases to the Power Block Controller board. The phase samples are an AC rms value such that 400VAC rms primary = 16.7milliamps AC rms. This AC rms signal is averaged to generate a scaled



DC representation for metering and protection. Table 4-3 on page 4-33, shows the analog metering sample levels and scaling factors used for the metering display.

The MOV board also provides four discrete lines to the Power Block Controller Board to indicate when a fuse is open on the MOV board.

4.5.4 Overvoltage (OVP) Board

The OVP board protects the auto-transformer output via fuses and polysistors. The status of these circuits is sent to the Power Block Controller board along with the temperature signal from the auto-transformer thermal sensor.

4.5.5 Power Block Controller Board

The Power Block Controller board monitors and controls the various power supplies and monitors the internal transmitter cooling. It uses the 376 micro module and is interfaced to the Main Controller via the CAN bus and the parallel control lines (System Control Bus). As is standard with all of the control boards, a CPLD is used for processing the digital I/O and interfaces with the micro-module. This allows the CPLD to be able to provide control and status monitoring in the event that the CAN bus or micro-controller fails. The following paragraphs give a detailed description of the individual Power Block Controller Board functions.

4.5.5.1 S2, Power Block Controller Board Configuration Switches

Dipswitch S2 has 8 switches, 3 of which are used to set the cabinet IDs. Table 4-2 shows the settings for the Cabinet ID sections of S2 (3-cabinet shown).

Table 4-2 S2, Switch Settings, Power Block Controller Board

Function S2-1 S2-2 S2-3 S2-4 S2-5 S2-6 S2-7 S2-8

CABINET 1 OFF OFF OFF

CABINET 2 OFF OFF ON

CABINET 3 OFF ON OFF



4.5.5.2 LVPS Interface and Cabinet ID

The Power Block Controller Board controls the low voltage power supplies and acts as the distribution point for the low voltage to the rest of the system. The 2 supplies will be diode OR’ed on this board to provide redundancy should one supply fail. The CAN bus is then used to send the fault status of the failed supply to the Main Controller to alert the operator.

There are 2 Power Bus cables, J8 and J9, which carry the +7.5Vdc and +/-15Vdc from the LVPS, and the Cabinet ID (Identification) from dipswitch S2. J9 connects to the Backplane Interface board for distribution of low voltage and Cabinet ID to the PA modules. J8 distributes low voltage and cabinet ID to the RF Controller Board (in the RFU), External I/O Board, and the Main Controller. This allows one dipswitch to set the cabinet ID for all other sub-assemblies in the PA cabinet reducing the possibility of an error in setting the cabinet ID on each board.

4.5.5.3 AC Line Monitoring

The Power Block Controller board monitors the condition of the incoming 3 phase AC lines and provides status updates to the main controller via the CAN network. Upon detecting certain conditions, the Power Block Controller can activate the /FLT_OFF, /RF_MUTE, /PS_MUTE, or /AC_LOW command based on the fault. The following AC line conditions are monitored:

• AC line voltage

• Phase imbalance

• Phase sequence (rotation)

4.5.5.4 Cabinet Cooling System Sensors

The Power Block Controller connects to five sensors which are monitoring the cabinet cooling system.

• Ambient Temperature (Control Enclosure)• Fan Tachometer• Coolant Temperature - inlet & outlet• Coolant Flow• Coolant Leak



Four of the sensors are located off the board with the ambient air temperature sensor physically mounted on the Power Block Controller Board. Sensor levels and the scaling used for the display metering are shown in Table 4-3.

4.5.5.4.1 Ambient Temperature

A temperature sensor is installed on the Power Block Controller board. This sensor outputs a voltage that is directly proportional to the temperature in degrees Celsius. The micro-controller monitors this reading and reports it to the main controller. A warning message will be sent when the temperature is >= 50 degrees C. When the temperature is >= 65 degrees C, the CPLD will illuminate the air temperature LED.

Figure 4-12 Cabinet Airflow Diagram

4.5.5.4.2 Fan Tachometer

The five flushing air fans are brushless, DC fans and each have a tachometer output to indicate the RPM of the fan. The Power Block Controller board controls and monitors the fan tachometers in the transmitter cabinet. The fans will be turned on only when the transmitter is in the ON state. If the fan is enabled and the fan tachometer reading is



below the trip point (default 1500 RPM or 25 Hz.) a fan warning message will be issued and the Fan LED will be illuminated (but the transmitter continues to operate). The micro-controller will monitor its status and report it to the Main Controller.

4.5.5.4.3 Coolant Temperature - Inlet & Outlet

The Power Block Controller board monitors the liquid coolant temperature at the inlet and the outlet of the cabinet. The sensors output a voltage that is directly proportional to the temperature in degrees C. The micro module will monitor these readings and report to the Main Controller. The CPLD will monitor the output of both comparator circuits which are calibrated to trip when the coolant temperature exceeds 65oC (a GUI Warning is issued at 55ºC). If either of the coolant temperatures exceeds 65oC the transmitter will mute, but the pump module will be allowed to continue running. The most likely cause of this fault would be a loss of one or more fans (or AC power) to the heat exchanger.

4.5.5.4.4 Coolant Flow

The Power Block Controller board also monitors the coolant flow. The coolant flow sensor, mounted on the coolant outlet pipe, provides a pulsed output signal whose frequency is proportional to the amount of flow through the device. The micro then scales the frequency of the signal from the sensor to coolant flow in liters per minute (lpm). If the coolant flow drops below 50% for more than 5 seconds, the transmitter will switch pumps (only in optional dual pump systems). If after 5 more seconds the flow is still not sufficient the transmitter will be muted.

4.5.5.4.5 Leak Detector

A leak detector is installed inside the transmitter cabinet to detect if a cooling system leak has occurred. It is mounted in the bottom center of the cabinet. The Power Block Controller board will monitor this leak detector to alert the system should a leak occur. The micro-controller will monitor its status and report it to the main controller. A leak detection will cause the transmitter and the pump to be shut off.

Table 4-3 Power Block Controller, Analog Measurements and Scaling

Ref. # Signal Scale Description

1 Phase A 400vac = 3.0vdc AC Primary voltage

2 Phase B 400vac = 3.0vdc AC Primary voltage

3 Phase C 400vac = 3.0vdc AC Primary voltage

4 Average AC 400vac = 3.0vdc (AB+BC+CA)/3



5 REV_VOLT Rev A = 0v0.25v increment/Rev

Micro Module Revision

6 PS1_+7.5v 7.5vdc = 3.0vdc PS1 +7.5v output

7 PS1_+15v 15vdc = 3.0vdc PS1 +15v output

8 PS1_-15v -15vdc = 3.0vdc PS1 -15v output

9 PS2_+7.5v 7.5vdc = 3.0vdc PS2 +7.5v output

10 PS2_+15v 15vdc = 3.0vdc PS2 +15v output

11 PS2_-15v -15vdc = 3.0vdc PS2 -15v output

12 SPARE

13 SPARE

14 +7.5v 7.5vdc = 3.0vdc Or'ed output of PS1 & PS2

15 +15v 15vdc = 3.0vdc Or'ed output of PS1 & PS2

16 -15v -15vdc = 3.0vdc Or'ed output of PS1 & PS2

17 +3.3v 3.3v = 3.3vdc 3.3 volt regulator output

18 +5v 5v = 3.0vdc 5 volt regulator output

19 +12v 12v = 3.0vdc 12 volt regulator output

20 -12v -12v = 3.0vdc -12 volt regulator output

21 Vref 4.096v = 3.0vdc Output of on board reference

22 Air Temperature 32mv / Deg C0 Deg C = 1.6v

Ambient temperature sensor located on Power Block Controller board

Table 4-4 Power Block Controller, LED Indicators

LED Number Function Condition Color1 FLT_OFF Faults Present RED

2 RF_MUTE Mute RED

3 PS_MUTE Mute RED

4 AC_LOW AC line voltage low RED

5 SPARE_1 Active RED



Table 4-3 Power Block Controller, Analog Measurements and Scaling

Ref. # Signal Scale Description



4.5.6 Low Voltage Power Supplies (LVPS)

The standard cabinet configuration comes with two Low Voltage Power Supplies or LVPS. The supplies are located near the middle of the cabinet and are accessed from the rear of the transmitter. The outputs from the LVPS are connected to the Power Block Controller Board.

The outputs from the 2 supplies are diode OR’ed together on the Power Block Controller Board. Should one supply fail, the low voltage will still be available throughout the transmitter. The failure will be reported via CAN to the main controller in order to alert the transmitter operator.

The Power Block Controller Board also acts as a distribution point for low voltage to the rest of the transmitter. The outputs from the LVPS are:

• +7.5Vdc @ 100W (13.3A) - This voltage is used to drive all the logic contained on the various control boards throughout the Atlas transmitter. The 7.5 volt output will be regulated on each board with a linear regulator to step down the voltage to 5Vdc and/or 3.3Vdc as needed.

12 +3.3V ON GRN

13 +5V ON GRN

14 +12V ON GRN

15 -12V ON GRN

16 +7.5V FUSE Open RED

17 +15V FUSE Open RED

18 -15V FUSE Open RED

19 AIR TEMP Air Temperature High RED

20 FAN TACH Fan Tach is low RED

21 COOLANT TEMP Coolant Temperature High RED

22 COOLANT FLOW Coolant Flow Low RED

23 COOLANT LEAK Coolant Leak RED

24 AC MAINS HIGH Average Voltage High RED

25 AC MAINS LOW Average Voltage Low RED

26 PHASE IMBALANCE Phase Imbalance RED

27 PHASE SEQ FLT Phase out of Sequence RED

28 FUSE OPEN 1 to 4 Fuses Open on MOV RED

29 CPLD PROGRAMMING LED flashed by micro when programming CPLD

RED

Table 4-4 Power Block Controller, LED Indicators

LED Number Function Condition Color



• +15Vdc and -15Vdc @ 75W (5A) each - These voltages are used as the supply for biasing op-amps and other analog circuitry for each board.

Each of the three output voltages of the LVPS will be monitored by the Power Block Controller Board. The +7.5V output is fused with a 10Amp fast acting fuse while both the +15V and -15V outputs are fused with a 5Amp fast acting fuse for each polarity. The AC supply input is auto ranging and will accept 180-264Vac at a frequency of 47 to 63 Hz.



4.6 Cooling System

The Atlas ISDB-T liquid cooling system consists of:

a. Pump Module with dual pumps in main/standby mode for redundancy and the coolant reserve tank.

b. Heat exchanger (mounted outside).

c. Cooling plates or heatsinks in the transmitter.

d. Cooling system control panel which interfaces the transmitter control system and AC power to the pump module.

4.6.1 Pump Module

The pump module is a 50/50 glycol/water pump system with the following components:

a. Dual pumps used in a main/standby mode for redundancy.

b. An isolating valve on each pump and an electrical isolator switch for each pump to allow one pump to be changed while the other is still operating.

c. A reserve tank for the coolant.

d. Two (2) coolant level switches

1. Coolant Warning - Indicates low coolant level - Alarm only, system contin-ues to operate.

2. Coolant Fault - Tank is empty, system is shut off.

e. An in-line coolant strainer and a filter with isolating valves to allow the filter to be changed while the pump module is operating.

f. Output pressure gauge and coolant temperature gauge both visible from the front of the unit.

For the following refer to the Cooling System Electrical Diagram. The pump module receives its AC inputs from the cooling system control panel contactors K1 and K2. K1 activates Pump A while K2 activates Pump B. Each pump has an electrical isolator switch that can be used to remove AC from the pump for servicing. The pump status lines for the control panel pass through the 4th pole on the isolator switches S1 and S2 which prevents an active status LED on the control panel if the isolator switch is open. For detailed pump module and cooling system control information see "4.6.4 Pump Control Panel."



4.6.2 Heat Exchanger

The heat exchanger is a simple multiple fan radiator system divided into two control zones. Zone A contains the first fan which comes on at a specified coolant temperature. Zone B contains the second (and third, if so equipped) fan(s) which come on at a higher specified temperature. The heat exchanger receives AC for the fans from the AC mains distribution panel and should be equipped with separate fusing and an emergency disconnect box located near the heat exchanger unit. The heat exchanger has an electrical isolator switch which can be used to manually remove AC from the motors for servicing.

4.6.3 Transmitter Cold Plates

There are up to 10 cold plates in a single Atlas PA cabinet, depending on the number of PAs included. Eight (8) module cold plates which are physically mounted to the PA modules and must be removed with the module and two (2) cold plates to which the PA module combiner reject loads are mounted. The reject load cold plates are mounted inside the combiner.



.

Figure 4-13 Internal Transmitter Liquid Cooling System

4.6.4 Pump Control Panel

The Pump Control Panel is a logic control box which switches the AC to the pump module and interfaces control commands and status to and from the heat exchanger and transmitter. It also has a primary disconnect or isolator switch, local pump select buttons and several local status LED’s for maintenance and troubleshooting. Refer to the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box and the System Cooling Wiring Diagram for the following Pump Control Panel descriptions.

The Pump Control Panel is separated into 2 parts;

a. Those parts mounted on the Control PC board and

b. The parts which are simply mounted inside the Control Box.



NOTE:It is important to note that there are contactors mounted inside the box while the other small relays are mounted on the PC board. The wiring diagram shows dashed lines enclosing those parts not on the PC board (labeled Control Box).

4.6.4.1 Transmitter Interconnect

The pump control panel connects to the transmitter External I/O board. The X3 connector on the Pump Control Box is a pin for pin connection to the J12 connector on the External I/O board.

4.6.4.2 Front Panel Controls

The Pump Control Panel has the following controls:

a. Primary AC disconnect or Isolator switch, S1 - This disconnects the AC from the pump module. It also disconnects the single phase power to the step-down trans-former T1 which provides voltages to the pump control circuitry. The heat exchanger should be outfitted with a separate emergency disconnect switch. The heat exchanger also has an isolator switches in the heat exchanger unit.

b. Local/Remote Switches

1. Remote - Remote is the normal operating mode. Pressing the Remote but-ton puts the Cooling Controller into Remote mode. While in Remote mode, the transmitter will have control over the pumps and the pumps can be switched using the GUI. Pressing the pre-select buttons (Pump A or Pump B) will only determine what pump the Cooling Controller will switch to when switched to Local mode. If power is lost while in Remote Mode, the mode will be restored as remote when the power is restored.

2. Local - This button is used to put the Cooling Controller into Local mode. While in Local mode, the transmitter will not be able to switch pumps. The transmitter will only be able to enable or disable the pumps via the interlock signal. The Cooling Controller will switch to the pre-selected pump (determined by which button has been pressed, Pump A or Pump B) when the Local button is pressed. While in Local mode, the pumps can be switched using the cooling control panel pre-select buttons labelled Pump A or Pump B. If power is lost while in Local Mode, the mode will be restored as local when the power is restored.

3. Pump A - This button is used to pre-select Pump A. When the cooling controller is switched from Remote to Local control, the unit will automatically switch to Pump A.



4. Pump B - This button is used to pre-select Pump B. When the cooling controller is switched from Remote to Local control, the unit will automatically switch to Pump B.

4.6.4.3 Cooling Control Panel LED’s

COOLANT FAULT – Lights when Coolant Tank is empty.

REMOTE – Lights when Cooling Controller is in Remote Mode.

PUMP A – Lights when Pump A has been pre-selected by pressing the Pump A button.

LOCAL – Lights when Cooling Controller is in Local Mode.

PUMP B – Lights when Pump B has been pre-selected by pressing the Pump B button.

POWER – Lights when power is on within the Cooling Controller Box.

PUMP A ON – Lights when the Pump A contactor is closed.

PUMP B ON – Lights when the Pump B contactor is closed.

EXCHANGER 1 ZONE A ON – This LED lights when Exchanger 1 Zone A fan contactor is closed.

EXCHANGER 1 ZONE B ON – This LED lights when Exchanger 1 Zone B fan contactor is closed.

EXCHANGER 2 ZONE A ON – This LED lights when Exchanger 2 Zone A fan contactor is closed. NOTE: Not used in all configurations.

EXCHANGER 2 ZONE B ON – This LED lights when Exchanger 2 Zone B fan contactor is energized. NOTE: Not used in all configurations.

COOLANT LOW – This LED lights when Coolant is low in the Coolant Tank.

INTERLOCK – This LED lights when the Interlock line is inactive. When active, the pumps are enabled for use either remotely or locally. If inactive, neither pump can be used no matter which mode is selected.

D0-D7 – Eight LED’s found on the back of the Cooling Control board used for diagnostics. During normal operation, D7 will blink at a 1Hz rate to show that the CPLD (U3) is working properly. D6-D0 will show the current firmware version in the



CPLD in binary. For example firmware version 0002 will show as 000010 on the LED’s with D6 being the MSB.

CPLD PROGRAMMED – Located on the back of the Cooling Control board. It is lit when the CPLD is programmed. If this is not lit, then the cooling control box will not operate and the CPLD needs to be programmed.

4.6.4.4 Transmitter Interfaces

INTERLOCK – Active High. This line is controlled by the transmitter. It is used to enable or disable the Cooling Controller. The line is active when the transmitter needs to have the pumps running. This signal is REM_INTERLK_SW on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box page 2.

REMOTE PUMP A COMMAND – Active High. This line is controlled by the transmitter. It is used to signal that Pump A is to be turned on while in Remote mode. This signal is REM_PUMP_A_SW on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

REMOTE PUMP B COMMAND – Active High. This line is controlled by the transmitter. It is used to signal that Pump B is to be turned on while in Remote mode. This signal is REM_PUMP_B_SW on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

REMOTE COOLANT FAULT STATUS – Active Low. This line is controlled by relay K5 on the Cooling Controller board. This signal is active when the Coolant Tank is empty. This signal is /REM_COOLANT_FLT_OUT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

NOTE:The transmitter will shut off the pumps and go off the air when this line is active.

REMOTE COOLANT LOW STATUS – Active Low. This line is controlled by relay K6 on the Cooling Controller board. This signal is active when the coolant level in the Coolant Tank is low. This signal is /REM_COOLANT_LOW_OUT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

REMOTE PUMP A STATUS – Active Low. The line is active when the Pump A service switch is closed and the Pump A contactor is energized. This signal is used to signal the transmitter that Pump A should be running. This signal is REM_PUMP_A_STAT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

REMOTE PUMP B STATUS – Active Low. The line is active when the Pump B service switch is closed and the Pump B contactor is energized. This signal is used to



signal the transmitter that Pump B should be running. This signal is REM_PUMP_B_STAT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

REMOTE/LOCAL STATUS – This line is controlled by the latching relay, K3. It is used to inform the transmitter whether the Cooling Control Box is in Local or Remote mode. The signal is active low when in Remote. This signal is /REMOTE_SELECT_OUT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

4.6.4.5 Pump Module Interfaces

PUMP A CONTACTOR SOURCE – A +24VDC source that is connected to Terminal A1 of Pump A’s contactor coil. This signal is PUMP_A_ON_OUT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

PUMP B CONTACTOR SOURCE – A +24VDC source that is connected to Terminal A1 of Pump B’s contactor coil. This signal is PUMP_B_ON_OUT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

PUMP A CONTACTOR STATUS – Active Low. When Pump A contactor is energized, the contacts will close. This will cause PUMP A CONTACTOR STATUS to be connected to ground via contact K1.4. This signal is PUMP_A_CONT_STAT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

PUMP B CONTACTOR STATUS – Active Low. When Pump B contactor is energized, the contacts will close. This will cause PUMP B CONTACTOR STATUS to be connected to ground via contact K2.4. This signal is PUMP_B_CONT_STAT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

PUMP A CONTACTOR COMMAND – Active Low. This signal is controlled by Q1 on the Cooling Controller board. This will pull the Pump A Contactor Command line down to ground completing the circuit needed to energize the Pump A contactor. This signal is PUMP_A_ON_IN on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

PUMP B CONTACTOR COMMAND – Active Low. This signal is controlled by Q4 on the Cooling Controller board. This will pull the Pump B Contactor Command line down to ground completing the circuit needed to energize the Pump B contactor. This signal is PUMP_B_ON_IN on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.



4.6.4.6 Heat Exchanger Interfaces

HEAT EXCHANGER 1 ZONE A STATUS – Active High. This signal is controlled by the contactor for Heat Exchanger 1 Zone A. When this contactor is energized, this signal is connected to +5VDC. . This signal is FAN_A_STAT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

HEAT EXCHANGER 1 ZONE B STATUS – Active High. This signal is controlled by the contactor for Heat Exchanger 1 Zone B. When this contactor is energized, this signal is connected to +5VDC. . This signal is FAN_B_STAT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

PUMP A STATUS – Active Low. This signal is controlled by the Pump A service switch on the Pump Module and the Pump A contactor. While the service switch is closed and the Pump A contactor is energized closing contact K1.4, the Pump A Status line will be low. This signal is REM_PUMP_A_STAT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

PUMP A CONTACTOR STATUS – Active Low. This signal is just the return of the Pump A Status from the service switch on the Pump Module. This signal is PUMP_A_CONT_STAT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

PUMP B STATUS – Active Low. This signal is controlled by the Pump B service switch on the Pump Module and the Pump B contactor. While the service switch is closed and the Pump B contactor is energized closing contact K2.4, the Pump B Status line will be low. This signal is REM_PUMP_B_STAT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

PUMP B CONTACTOR STATUS – Active Low. This signal is just the return of the Pump B Status from the service switch on the Pump Module. This signal is PUMP_B_CONT_STAT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

TANK COOLANT EMPTY – Active Low. This signal is controlled by the Tank Empty float switch in the coolant tank. When coolant level drops below this switch, the switch will open. This will disrupt the +5VDC signal fed to the switch causing the Tank Coolant Empty signal to be pulled down by R97. This signal is /COOLANT_FLT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

TANK COOLANT LOW – Active Low. This signal is controlled by the Tank Low float switch in the coolant tank. When coolant level drops below this switch, the switch will open. This will disrupt the +5VDC signal fed to the switch causing the Tank Coolant Empty signal to be pulled down by R98. This signal is /COOLANT_LOW on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.



HEAT EXCHANGER 1 ON SOURCE – A 20-24VAC source that is provided by a step-down transformer built into the heat exchanger. This signal is HEAT_EX_1_ON_SRC on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

HEAT EXCHANGER 1 ON RETURN – This is the return for the HEAT_EX_1_ON_SRC signal. It is controlled by K1 on the Cooling Controller board. When the pumps are on, Q7 is turned on. This will then complete the circuit that energizes the coil for K1 causing the contacts to close completing the circuit to energize the Heat Exchanger Fan Contactors. This signal is HEAT_EX_1_ON_RTN on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

HEAT EXCHANGER 2 ZONE A STATUS – Active High. This signal is controlled by the contactor for Heat Exchanger 2 Zone A. When this contactor is energized, this signal is connected to +5VDC. . This signal is FAN_C_STAT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

HEAT EXCHANGER 2 ZONE B STATUS – Active High. This signal is controlled by the contactor for Heat Exchanger 2 Zone B. When this contactor is energized, this signal is connected to +5VDC. . This signal is FAN_D_STAT on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

HEAT EXCHANGER 2 ON SOURCE – A 20-22VAC source that is provided by a step-down transformer built into the heat exchanger. This signal is HEAT_EX_2_ON_SRC on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

HEAT EXCHANGER 2 ON RETURN – This is the return for the HEAT_EX_2_ON_SRC signal. It is controlled by K2 on the Cooling Controller board. When the pumps are on, Q8 is turned on. This will then complete the circuit that energizes the coil for K2 causing the contacts to close completing the circuit to energize the Heat Exchanger Fan Contactors. This signal is HEAT_EX_2_ON_RTN on the Wiring Diagram Cooling Control Box.

4.6.4.7 Power Supply

VAC - The voltage supplied to the Cooling Control Box will be one of the following 3-phase supply voltages: 208/240/380/480.

To ensure that the Pump Contactor Driver circuits provide enough power to quickly turn on the contactors and to hold them on without damaging the drivers, the transformer T1 needs to be tapped appropriately. The output of T1 should be between 19VAC and 24VAC.



+24VDC – While this would lead one to believe that the voltage after rectification and filtering would be a nominal +24VDC, the fact is that the voltage will be between +25.4VDC and 32.4VDC. The maximum value is set to ensure that the power dissipated in the series resistance of the contactor driver circuit does not exceed the rating of 1W per resistor and to ensure that the input voltage to the 5VDC power supply does not exceed its maximum input voltage. The minimum value is set to ensure that the current flow through the contactor coil is above 150mA.

+5VDC – This voltage is produced by using a switching power supply. The minimum input voltage for this circuit is 18.2 VDC and the maximum is 32.5 VDC. This power supply is capable of handling a load as high as 7.5W.

+3.3VDC – This voltage is produce by using a simple 3.3v LDO regulator. The input is from the +5v power supply. It’s capable of handling a load as high as 1W.

4.6.4.8 Logic

CPLD – The purpose of the CPLD (Complex Programmable Logic Device) is to consolidate a large number of small logic circuits into a single package. The logic determines which buttons are being pressed, determines what LED’s are to be lit, deciphers the commands from the transmitter, informs the transmitter of any coolant faults, determines whether it’s in Local or Remote mode and what mode it will start up in after a power reset, determines what pumps are to run after a power reset, determines which pump to turn on, and determines when the heat exchangers are to be turned on.

RELAYS – There are 6 relays on the Cooling Controller board. Two relays are latching relays. The remaining relays are general purpose relays. They all are +5V relays. The general purpose relays are used to switch the control voltages for the heat exchangers and to isolate the CPLD from the transmitter for the Coolant Fault and Coolant Low signals. The latching relays are to assist the CPLD to determine what state it was in prior to a power reset.

4.6.4.9 Cooling Controller Board Circuit Descriptions

The following are descriptions of key circuits on the Cooling Controller board. They are each followed by a figure showing a sample circuit.

4.6.4.9.1 PUMP/MODE LATCH CIRCUITS

The latch circuits for the pumps and the mode work the same. They were designed to retain the pump and mode settings in case of power outage. Once the power is restored,



the CPLD will read the latch signals and initialize itself to the state it was in prior to the power loss.

The circuit is an H-bridge circuit using IGFET transistors acting as switches. The transistors are controlled by the signals that turn on the status Led’s. The pump latch circuit is controlled by the Pump A ON and the Pump B ON status LED signals. The mode latch circuit is controlled by the Local and the Remote status LED signals. Only one transistor can be on at a time due to the logic in the CPLD. The transistors control the direction of current flow through the coil of the latching relay.

In Figure 4-14, the latching relay is shown in a ‘reset’ state. This means that Pump A is latched on. To latch pump B, the relay must be put into the ‘set’ state. This is done when the Pump B ON LED is lit. The signal that turns on that LED will turn on Q12. Current will then flow from the +5V power supply, through R81 to Ground through Q12.

To latch pump A, Q12 must be turned off and Q11 must be turned on. This will cause the current to flow the other direction placing the relay in a ‘reset’ state.

The mode latch circuit works exactly the same way. The only difference is that the mode latch circuit also controls /REMOTE_SELECT_OUT which is used to let the transmitter know what is the current mode of the Cooling Controller.

Figure 4-14 Cooling Control Board Pump Latch Circuit

1K 1K

+5VDC +5VDC

+5VDC

PUMP_B_ON_LEDPUMP_A_ON_LED

LATCHED_PUMP



4.6.4.9.2 PUMP CONTACTOR DRIVER CIRCUIT

The purpose of this circuit shown in Figure 4-14 on page 4-47 is to ensure that the desired pump is turned on and that only one pump can be on at a time. The circuit can be divided into three sub circuits: control logic, pump A driver, and pump B driver.

The control logic circuit is used to ensure that only one pump is on at a time. If pump A is selected, then PUMP_A_ON will be a ‘1’ and PUMP_B_ON will be a ‘0’. The PUMP_A_ON signal is sent to the pump A AND gate. It is also inverted before being sent to the pump B AND gate. The PUMP_B_ON signal will be sent to the pump B AND gate and will also be inverted before being sent to the pump A AND gate. This will put ‘1’s on both inputs of the pump A AND gate and ‘0’s on both inputs of the pump B AND gate.

The pump A AND gate will output a ‘1’ to be sent to a circuit formed by Q3 and Q2. The output of this circuit will be approximately 15 volts, limited by the zener. This is to ensure that Vgs of Q1 does not exceed its maximum rating. With approximately 15v on the gate, Q1 will turn on and saturate to allow maximum current to flow. This will cause current to flow through the coil of K1. This current is limited by the coil resistance and the series resistance. The series resistance consists of four 267 1W resistors that are in parallel to create essentially a 67 4W resistor. The +24V power supply will actually be somewhere between 25V and 33V depending on which AC power source is used at the transmitter site and how the transformer T1 in the Cooling Control box is tapped. Based on this power supply, the series resistance and the coil resistance of the Contactor, the current flow through the contactor coil will be between 170mA and 225mA. This will energize the contactor allowing pump A to be turned on.

The pump B AND gate will output a ‘0’ to be sent to a circuit formed by Q6 and Q5. The output of this circuit will be approximately 0 volts since Q6 will be turned on effectively placing ground potential on the gate of Q4. This will force Q4 off, stopping current flow through the coil of the pump B contactor. This will cause pump B to turn off.



Figure 4-15 Cooling Control Board Pump Contactor Drivers

4.6.4.9.3 PUMP STATUS SIGNAL CHAIN

The purpose of the pump status LED is to show that a pump should be running. This can only happen when the contactor is closed and the service switch is in its normal operation position. When this is true, a path for current flow will exist. The current source is from the +15V power supply located on the External I/O board in the transmitter. The current will flow through an opto-coupler and shunt resistor on the External I/O board. The opto-coupler is used to inform the transmitter that the pump should be running. The current flows past the service switch and the closed contacts of the pump contactor. It then flows through another opto-coupler and shunt resistor on the Cooling Controller board. This opto-coupler lets the CPLD know that the pump should be running. The CPLD will then light either the Pump A ON or the Pump B ON status LED’s depending on which contactor is energized.

10K

+24VDC

10K

1K

67

100

K2

10K

+24VDC

10K

1K

67

100

PUMP_B_ON

PUMP_A_ON

J3-2

J4-2

COOLING

CTRL BOX

K1

J3-1

J4-1

COOLING

CTRL BOX

PUMP_A_ON_OUT

PUMP_B_ON_OUT

PUMP_A_ON_IN

PUMP_B_ON_IN



Figure 4-16 Cooling Control Board Pump A Status

4.6.4.9.4 HEAT EXCHANGER DRIVER CIRCUITS

There is a possibility of having up to two heat exchangers. Each heat exchanger will have two contactors in them. Each contactor will control a zone within the heat exchanger. Zone A will be a single fan. Zone B will be the two remaining fans.

If a pump is running, the CPLD will make all of the heat exchanger control signals active. HEAT_EX_1_ON will energize K1 by turning Q7 on. HEAT_EX_2_ON will energize K2 by turning Q8 on. Having K1 or K2 energized does not mean that the fans will be running. There are thermocouples in series with the contactor coils. The thermocouple in Zone A closes when coolant temperature reaches 32C. The thermocouple in Zone A closes when coolant temperatures reaches 38C. Once the thermocouples are closed and the relays are energized, current will then be able to flow through the contactor coil. This will turn on the fan by energizing the contactor.

39

220

10K

100

3K J2-9 J5-6

J3-5J4-5K1:4

+15VDC

GND_B

+3.3VDC

S1

/PUMP_A_ON_CPLD

PUMP_A_STAT

PUMP_A_CONT_STAT

REM_PUMP_A_STAT

J5-5

PUMP

MODULE

COOLING

CTRL BOX

XMTR

EXTERNAL I/O

PUMP STATUS



Figure 4-17 Cooling Control Board Heat Exchanger Control Circuit

4.6.4.9.5 HEAT EXCHANGER STATUS CHAIN

The reason for dividing the heat exchangers into two zones is to insure that the only status that can be received is from the contactor’s fourth contact. Because of this, the front panel will use the following status LED’s: EXCHANGER 1 ZONE A ON, EXCHANGER 1 ZONE B ON, EXCHANGER 2 ZONE A ON, and EXCHANGER 2 ZONE B ON.

When a contactor is energized, its contacts will close. This will complete a current path that starts at the +5V power supply on the Cooling Controller board. This current will flow out to the contactor located in the heat exchanger. It will go through the closed contacts and be returned to an opto-coupler back on the Cooling Controller board. This will turn on the transistor in the opto-coupler pulling the status line for that fan down to ground. The CPLD will then see the status line is now in its active state and will then light the desired status LED.

HEAT EXCH 1 ZONE A

100

1K

0.1

K1

240VAC

T1

+5VDCJ5-14

J5-12

HEAT_EX_1_ON

K1HEAT_EX_ON_RTN

HEAT_EX_ON_SRC

24VAC

HEAT EXCHANGER

CONTROL



Figure 4-18 Cooling Control Board Heat Exc 1 Zone A Status

10K

475 J5-1J5-2

+3.3VDC

/FAN_A_ON_CPLD

FAN_A_STAT

HEAT EXCH 1

ZONE A

HEAT EXCH STATUS

+5VDC


Section 5Maintenance and Alignments


5
5.1 Introduction
This section contains all of the maintenance and alignment procedures for the Atlas ISDB-T UHF transmitter. This includes routine maintenance, PA module replacement, PA Module repair, transmitter calibration and PC Board replacement procedures.

5.2 PA Module Removal and Replacement

! CAUTION:TOXIC BERYLLIUMSOME COMPONENTS IN THE MODULE CONTAIN TOXIC BERYLLIUM. THIS LIMITS MODULE REPAIR TO A MODULAR LEVEL CONSISTING OF PALLETS AND PC BOARDS ONLY.HOT SURFACETHE ATLAS PA MODULES ARE DESIGNED TO HANDLE VERY HIGH TEMPERATURES AND MAY BE EXTREMELY HOT, UP TO 90O F (50O C) ABOVE ROOM TEMPERATURE. DO NOT TOUCH THE MODULES WITH BARE HANDS AFTER THE TRANSMITTER HAS BEEN RUNNING, ESPECIALLY IN HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ENVIRONMENTS. SPECIAL GLOVES HAVE BEEN PROVIDED IN THE REAR OF THE CABINET OR CAN BE OBTAINED FROM HARRIS, PART #0990006483 OR GRAINGER ITEM #4JF36.HEAVY WEIGHTTHE PA MODULE WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 25KG AND CAN BE AWKWARD TO HANDLE. USE PROPER LIFTING TECHNIQUES WHEN REMOVING AND REPLACING PA MODULES.

5-1 to servicing.

Section 5 Maintenance and Alignments ATLAS ISDB-T

RADIO FREQUENCY HAZARDDO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPERATE THE PA MODULE WITH THE COVER REMOVED.

5.2.1 PA Module Removal

PA Modules can be removed (or installed) while the transmitter is turned on, but the module needs to be shut off via the GUI (Graphical User Interface) first.

STEP 1 Prepare a clear path to a location to put the module once it has been removed.

STEP 2 To initiate the removal process, navigate to the Power Amp Service screen in Figure 5-1, using the key presses shown below. This screen allows you to disable the module by pressing the individual module button on the touchscreen (Figure 5-2 shows the module numbers and location). This will mask any faults that could be generated by the following steps.

Figure 5-1 PA Module ON/OFF Controls

STEP 3 Open the rear door.

STEP 4 Turn off corresponding circuit breaker on the rear mid-deck.

Key Presses

To turn a PA module back ON,press its button again - or pressthe Transmitter ON button.

NOTE:


Section 5 Maintenance and AlignmentsATLAS ISDB-T

STEP 5 Put on the protective gloves provided. Turn the top hose coolant valve to the off position first, then turn the bottom hose coolant valve to the off position.

STEP 6 Disconnect the quick coupler connecting the top hose to the back of the module first, then disconnect the quick coupler connecting the bottom hose to the back of the module. Have a rag or towel handy to clean up any drips from the module or hoses.

! CAUTION:DO NOT LET THE MODULE SWING DOWN WHEN PULLING THE MODULE OUT WITH THE FRONT HANDLE. THIS COULD CAUSE SEVERE DAMAGE TO THE CONNECTORS ON THE BACK OF THE MODULE.

STEP 7 Grab the handle on the front of the module, press down the latch and slide the module out about halfway. With the other hand, grab the handle located in the middle of the module. Then press the 2nd (halfway) latch and, using proper lifting techniques, slide out the module while lifting.

5.2.2 Installing a PA Module

To install a PA Module simply reverse the above procedure, noting below suggestions

NOTE:In some cases it has been noted that it can be difficult to connect the coolant hoses to a hot PA module. Reconnecting the coolant hoses in the proper reverse order - reconnecting the bottom hose first and opening its valve, then connecting the top hose and opening its valve - should help. If the connection is still difficult, simply allow the module to cool sufficiently before reconnecting the coolant hoses.

NOTE:It is helpful to have an assistant maintain pressure on the module from the front of the transmitter as the coolant hoses are being attached in the rear.

Valve Open

Valve Closed

Module Latch



Reapply pressure from the front of module. To make sure the connections are securely made, return to the front of the transmitter and again press each of the modules toward the rear.

Figure 5-2 PA Module and Circuit Breaker Locations

Once the PA Module is back in place, coolant flow restored, its circuit breaker turned on, and it has been enabled via the GUI, the phasing will need to be checked and possibly adjusted. Since only one module has been changed, simply go to the PA Reject Service screen in Figure 5-4, and note the bargraph and numerical reading above the number of the new module. The numerical value above the module number indicates the reject load temperature. For example, a display of 0236 would indicate a reject load temperature of 23.6 degrees C. A properly phased pair of modules would indicate a reject load temperature that is approximately 3 degrees C. above coolant temperature. If the temperature is approximately 3 degrees above coolant temperature then the phasing is OK and no further adjustment is necessary. However, if the reading is more than 3 degrees above the water temperature, then press the button with the PA Module number on it. Now use the Phase Adjust +/- buttons to get the temperature reading above the button, to a value that is as low as possible (approximately 3 degrees above the coolant temperature). For a complete phasing procedure see "5.4 PA Module Phasing".

PA M

odul

e #1

PA M

odul

e #2

PA M

odul

e #3

PA M

odul

e #4

PA M

odul

e #5

PA M

odul

e #6

PA M

odul

e #7

PA M

odul

e #8

Disconnect

CB9

AC Mains

PA M

odul

e #8

PA M

odul

e #7

PA M

odul

e #6

PA M

odul

e #5

PA M

odul

e #4

PA M

odul

e #3

PA M

odul

e #2

PA M

odul

e #1

CB1CB2CB3CB4CB5CB6CB7CB8

Front View Rear View

Mid Deck



5.2.3 Operation With Inoperative PA Modules

The PA module reject loads, located inside the module combiner, are sized with enough margin to allow operation under any imbalance condition that may be encountered, with only one acception. In cases where four consecutive PA modules (1 thru 4 or 5 thru 8) are off or missing the reject load in the final stage of the combiner will see maximum power. The transmitter will continue to operate in this condition for for one minute before the transmitter shuts down to protect the combiner reject loads.

NOTE:When four consecutive PA modules are inoperative they will need to be reposi-tioned so that there are no longer four failed modules in either postions 1 thru 4 or 5 thru 8. Any combination of four failed modules is acceptable except for locat-ing them all in 1 thru 4 or 5 thru 8.

5.3 PA Module Auto Bias Procedure

Due to natural drift of LDMOS devices with age, periodic re-biasing of the pallets within the modules is recommended. However, this procedure has been automated and is done with the press of a button, and only takes a few seconds. The schedule for this procedure is as follows:

• Once every 2 weeks for the first 2 months of operation

• Once a month for the next 4 months after that

• Once every 6 months of operation from then on

NOTE:Transmitter carrier power will be removed for about 5 seconds. However, lock up times on receivers may be as much as 3-5 seconds after that. Therefore, it is not recommended that this procedure be done during regular broadcast hours.

To perform the Auto Bias of the PA Modules, you will need to access the screen shown in Figure 5-3. The quickest way to get there is to press the Power Amp quick button to the right of the GUI, then press - PA SERVICE - PA MOD ALIGN.

Key Presses



Figure 5-3 Auto Bias, PA Module Alignment Screen

To activate the Re-Bias procedure simply press the Re-Bias button on the screen. Please be sure to read the Warning note on the screen above. And remember, even though the carrier will only be removed for about 5 seconds, many receivers may take several more seconds to re-gain lock and start decoding pictures again. In other words, this procedure should only be done when an interruption of service is not critical.

5.4 PA Module Phasing

Due to the use of a Wilkinson combining system, each pair or group of modules is being combined with an in phase relationship. Except for the 6-way combiner, this requires adjustment to the phase of individual modules and module groups while monitoring temperature at each of the reject loads and adjusting for a minimum reading. Once this is done at a particular operating frequency, it should not need to be re-adjusted except on an annual or semi-annual basis to optimize the transmitter efficiency. Access Figure 5-4 as follows:

NOTE:Before adjusting the module phasing to reduce the reject load temperatures, check the power output of the PA modules to make sure they are all producing approximately the same power level.

Key Presses



Figure 5-4 PA Module Phasing Screen(single cabinet model shown)

The temperatures from each of the combiner reject loads are displayed in degrees centigreade below the bar graphs in Figure 5-4. A displayed value of 0294 would correspond to a 29.4 degrees centigrade temperature.

5.4.1 Phase Control Voltage

Each module has a Phase number at the bottom of the screen which has a range of 0000 to 1023, with 0512 being the ideal. This is a reference number which is relative to the phase control voltage used to adjust the module phase. This number will change as the Phase Adjust +/- buttons are pressed. There is no correct value for this number. It is just a reference to allow the operator to see the changes being made and how far he has gone in a particular direction. However, it is always going to be better if the number is close to center to give maximum adjustment range when needed. Final phasing is based on reject load temperature, not the phase number.

5.4.2 Module Phasing Procedure

NOTE:Steps 1 through 5 are not applicable to the 6-way module combiner of a 6 module cabinet. However, STEP 6 may be performed on cabinets equipped with the 6-way module combiner.

GOAL: Get all reject load temperature readings as low as possible ( typically 3 degrees C. higher than coolant temperature). (A secondary goal would be to leave all modules as close to a 0512 phase reading as possible, although this is not required and will not actually improve performance).

Temperature levelin degs. C. without


GOAL: To get the temperature level readings as low as possible (typically about 3 degrees above coolant temperature.

Module Groupselect buttons

Reject Loads

decimal. 23.6o here.




STEP 1 Start on the left side with buttons 1 or 2 and work your way to the right. Changing module phasing will affect the phasing of the module groupings further to the right.

STEP 2 Check the tempeature reading just below the bargraph. Adjust the +/- buttons until the temperature value reaches a minimum level then go on to the next one.

STEP 3 Move to the right and press one of the buttons below that reading, such as the #4 module button shown here or you could choose the #3 (either one will work). Note the phase numbers at the bottom of the screen before you start.

STEP 4 Press the +/- phase adjust buttons to try to lower the temperature reading (and bargraph level). Tap for fine adjustment or press and hold the button for faster action. Go back an forth between the 2 buttons under the bargraph and try to minimize the reading using the phase adjust buttons. Try to keep the DAC readings at the bottom of the screen close to or centered around 0512.

STEP 5 Once the individual modules are phased (1-8), keep working to the right, phasing the pairs and the groups of four. Repeat STEP 3 and STEP 4 until each temperature value is minimized.

STEP 6 For multi-cabinet models: Once a cabinet phasing procedure has been completed sucessfully, select NEXT CAB to perform the phasing procedure on the next cabinet by repeating above steps. The Next CAB and PREV CAB buttons will be visible in multi cabinet models to the right of the PA REJECT SERVICE screen shown in Figure 5-4If a 3rd cabinet is present, repeat the above steps to optimize its PA module phasing. Once all cabinets are individually phase balanced, select CAB COMB (button on the right hand side of the PA Reject Service screen) to balance the outputs, minimizing the combiner reject load reading, using the same method as previous steps.

5.4.3 Automatic Module Phasing Procedure

NOTE:This function is not available for 6-way equipped cabinets.

Module select buttons

Phase adjust buttons

Combiner Groupings(pairs and foursomes)



The Atlas Series transmitter features auto phasing to minimize power to module reject loads. Auto phasing is initiated by pressing the auto phase button located to the right of the +/- buttons on the PA Reject Service Screen shown in Figure 5-4.

STEP 1 Make sure all PA modules are operating and have approximately the same power from each module.

STEP 2 Press the auto phase OFF button on the PA Reject Service screen. Once the OFF button is pressed it will change to say ON and auto phasing will be initiated. In addition to seeing the ON button the user will note that the PA module phase control voltages (DAC values on the bottom of the screen) will all change to read 0512. As the phasing progresses the DAC values will begin to change and the module reject load temperatures will begin to vary. Eventually, the reject load temperatures will begin to reduce.

STEP 3 The auto phase process will take approximately 15 minutes to complete. Upon completion the ON button will change to OFF indicating that the phasing process has finished. Upon completion the temperature of the reject loads should be minimized to a level that is approximately 3 degrees C. above the temperature of the coolant.

STEP 4 For multicabinet transmitters the auto module phasing must be completed for each cabinet. Once all cabinets are individually auto phase balanced, select CAB COMB (button on the right hand side of the PA Reject Service screen) to manually balance the cabinet outputs, minimizing the combiner reject load reading, using the same method as descubed in the 5.4.2 Module Phasing Procedure. Auto phasing is not available for cabinet phasing.

5.5 Power Calibrations

Other than for installation, power calibration should only be required if the controller containing the calibration settings is replaced, or if a directional coupler is replaced. However, calibration is very simple and can be done whenever it is deemed necessary. The only required power calibrations are:

a. Total System Forward Power (after filters)

b. PA Cabinet Forward Power (before filters)

c. Total System Reflected Power (after filters)

d. PA Cabinet Reflected Power (before filters)



NOTE:Forward and Reflected power calibrations should only be done while operating the transmitter into a known good load or a low VSWR antenna system.

5.5.1 Forward Calibrate

Equipment Used:

• Included Atlas ISDB-T precision directional couplers (precision meaning that the coupling ratio has been measured at the exact operating frequency).

• Averaging power meter with power probe

Initial Steps:

a. Remove the sample cable from the external Forward directional coupler to be cal-ibrated (see Figure 5-5, below).

Figure 5-5 Typical Output Power Coupler

b. Connect the averaging power meter probe to the coupler.

c. Set the meter offset to that printed on the coupler, or as supplied with the Factory Test Data.

ReflectedCoupler

ForwardCouplers



5.5.1.1 Calibrate Forward Total Power:

a. Turn on and adjust Atlas ISDB-T transmitter to licensed Nominal Power as pro-grammed previously in the System Setup screen.

b. Note the average power meter reading of the sample signal.

c. Reconnect sample cable to transmitter.

d. To access the Calibration screens, use the following key presses:

Figure 5-6 Forward Power Meter Calibration Screen

e. Click on the corresponding window for Total Power, opening a numeric entry box

f. Enter the value (in kW) determined in step [e] above

g. Click on DONE to store the changes, or CANCEL to ignore all changes made

Key Presses Or



5.5.1.2 Calibrate Forward Cabinet Power:

a.Repeat the entire above procedure using the internal transmitter Incident sample (shown to left), entering the data in the corre-sponding PA Cabinet window.

NOTE:Be sure to enter the Incident coupler’s offset into the meter.

5.5.2 Reflected Calibrate

This procedure establishes the values used to calculate the VSWR protection thresholds for Foldback and Fault events. These values are based on the "Nominal Power Output" value entered into the System Setup screen in Figure 3-31 on page 3-31.

• The foldback level (based on Total power) is calculated using a VSWR = 1.4:1. Therefore the actual foldback power can be calculated as:

To determine the Nominal Output factor:

Foldback Power = Nominal Power Output x 0.0278

• The fault threshold (trips, based on Total or Cabinet reflected power) is calculated using a VSWR = 1.9:1. Therefore the actual fault threshold can be calculated as:

VSWR Fault Threshold = Nominal Power Output x 0.0963

2

1

1

VSWR

VSWR



5.5.2.1 Calibrate Reflected Total Power

a. Turn on and adjust Atlas ISDB-T transmitter to 100% rated power according to the bar graph

b. Turn transmitter off

c. Remove the sample cable from the external Forward directional coupler (see Figure 5-5, above)

d. Remove the sample cable from the external Reflected directional coupler

e. Attach the Reflected cable (to Controller) to the external Forward directional coupler through a 10dB attenuator pad

f. Press the OUTPUT button, then OUTPUT SERVICE on the GUI, followed by REF CAL to view screen show below:

Figure 5-7 Reflected Power Meter Calibration Screen

g. Turn transmitter on

h. Click on the corresponding window for Total Power, opening a numeric entry box

i. Enter the value that is 10% of licensed nominal output power

j. Click on DONE to store the changes, or CANCEL to ignore all changes made

NOTE:At this time the VSWR protection could be verified by pressing the BACK key. The transmitter should fault off.



k. Return all cables to the proper connectors

l. Adjust Atlas ISDB-T transmitter to licensed nominal output power

5.5.2.2 Calibrate Reflected Cabinet Power

a. Repeat the entire above procedure using the internal Incident and Reflected cou-pler samples (see photo under the 5.5.1.2 Calibrate Forward Cabinet Power: heading) to calibrate the reflected power at the cabinet output

NOTE:For this procedure, enter the 10% value in the window for PA Cabinet

5.5.3 RFU Calibration

The RF Unit or RFU has a forward power directional coupler for each exciter to measure exciter power output. This power reading shows up on the RFU Setup screen in Figure 3-6 on page 3-9, also shown below (Figure 5-8). This screen is used to calibrate the display readings. To access this screen press the following buttons:

Calibration Procedure:

STEP 1 With the transmitter operating at nominal power, measure the output of the RFU with an averaging power meter

STEP 2 Press in the window of the reading to be calibrated

STEP 3 Enter the value determined during STEP 1 with the numeric entry box

STEP 4 Press DONE to store the changes or CANCEL to discard the changes

Key Presses



Figure 5-8 RFU Setup Screen



5.6 Miscellaneous Maintenance

5.6.1 Cooling System Checks

Inspect the cooling system monthly for coolant leaks and check the coolant level.

The heat exchanger fins and pump motor housing fins should be examined for dust and dirt buildup once a month. Clean as necessary with water hose or compressed air.

Every three months select the opposite Pump to run in order to keep both pumps in a proper working state. Also, this is a good time to manually operate all valves to assure proper movement and closure.

NOTE:See the cooling system drawings, manufacturers component manuals and the cooling system Technical Manual for details.

5.6.1.1 Pump Module Strainer Cleaning

The strainer is shown in Figure 5-9. Monthly inspection and cleaning of the cooling system strainer is recommended. The strainer must be disassembled and cleaned when the transmitter is off the air since the coolant flow must be disrupted prior to opening the strainer assembly. Follow the steps that follow to clean the strainer:

a. Turn off the transmitter and pump.

b. Remove strainer housing cap

NOTE:A small amount of liquid will still be present in the pipe and strainer housing, and a receptacle will be necessary to contain the spillage.

c. Pull strainer

d. Inspect and clean strainer as needed

e. Replace the strainer, and perform the above steps in reverse order to restore the cooling system to normal operation



Figure 5-9 Strainer and Check Valve

5.6.1.2 Water Filter Replacement

The side stream filter element can be changed without interrupting the coolant flow so that the transmitter can stay on the air.

a. Close the side stream throttling valve. Place a drip pan under the filter canister.

b. Remove the lower canister by turning it clockwise (looking from top) and down.

c. Empty the lower canister half and discard the coolant if it is dirty. Clean any sediment from the bottom of the lower canister.

d. Check the condition of the sealing gasket that goes in between the lower half of the canister and the canister head. Remove any trace of dirt from the gasket. Apply a light coating of silicon grease to the gasket.

e. Place a new filter element in the lower canister and thread the lower canister onto the canister head. Harris part number for the 10 micron filter is 358-3456-000. Tighten the lower canister hand tight.

f. Open the throttling valve 1/8 turn, or as needed for normal cooling system operation. Check for leaks.

SupplyCheckValve

Filter Supply Hose

Strainer

ThrottlingValve

Side StreamFilter



Figure 5-10 Filter and Side Stream Throttling Valve

5.6.1.3 Coolant Tank Level Management:

The coolant level must be a minimum of 3 inches from the bottom of the tank for the pump to take up coolant. The coolant fault level switch will open at this level. The coolant warning switch opens when the coolant level in the tank is less than 6 inches [152 mm]. These levels equal the capacity in gallons or liters of coolant as shown in Table 5-1 below.

The coolant tank should be filled so that when the pump is operating the coolant level is

slightly above the warning level.

Table 5-1 Coolant Tank Capacity

Level Status Coolant Volume

0-3 in [0-76 mm] Coolant fault 0-13.7 USG [0-52 l]

3-6 in [76-152 mm] Coolant low warning 13.7-27.4 USG [52-104 l]

6-12.5 in [152-318 mm]

Normal operation 27.4-57 USG [104-217 l]

Over 12.5in [318 mm]

Overflow Over 57 USG [217 l]

ThrottlingValve



5.6.1.4 Cooling System Maintenance Notes

5.6.1.4.1 Changing Pumps:

All bolts which go into the tank top must be treated with anti-seize compound. This includes the 4 pump flange mounting bolts on each pump, the mounting bolts for the level sight gauge, the level switch unit, and all of the top mounting bolts.

! WARNING:DO NOT LOOSEN THE 4 LARGE NUTS ON THE PUMP FLANGE; THEY CLAMP THE PUMP SECTIONS IN PLACE. IF THIS CLAMP IS DISTURBED, THE PUMP MAY NOT BE FIELD REPARABLE. THE PUMP MOUNTING BOLTS ARE SMALLER AND ON A LARGER BOLT CIRCLE THAT SEE FIGURE FIGURE 5-11

Figure 5-11 Pump Base Details

Refer to Figure 5-12. Remove the adapter nipple, elbow, and flange adapter as a unit from the old pump and install it on the new pump. For an adapter nipple with the O-ring seal, use a new seal and lubricate it with silicon grease.

Pump Flange NutsDo Not Remove

Pump Mounting BoltsRemove to Change Pump



Figure 5-12 Pump Pipe Fittings

When installing an adapter nipple with tapered pipe threads, use pipe joint compound. Tapered pipe thread is usually installed on 60 Hz units.

Set the pump with mounting flanges on the tank without the mushroom clamps. Rotate it counter-clockwise into the flange and attach the flange bolts 1 turn looser than finger tight. Rotate the pipe threaded el and the pump slightly as required to get the pipe flanges to align within 0.020 inches [0.5 mm]. Install the four brass mushroom clamps to the pump mounting plate. Turn the clamps so that the bolt holes in the stainless steel tank top align with the slots. Bolt them to the tank top. Tighten the flange bolts evenly, alternating from side to side.

The coolant level sight gauge, shown in Figure 5-13 on page 5-21, should be protected from direct sunlight. Direct sunlight will eventually reduce the transparency of the PVC tube and make it difficult to read. The sight gauge displays liters (left side) and gallons (right side). Normal operational level is slightly above the 30 gallon level

Flange Adapter

Elbow

Adapter Nipple

Tank Cap(Fill/Drain/Vent)



Figure 5-13 Sight Gauge

The top of the tank has a lip that forms a tray to contain minor spills of coolant. Keep this tank top clean. If the tank top is kept clean, it is possible to recover spilled coolant from it for reuse.

5.6.1.5 Pump Module Operation Without Transmitter

The pump module can be operated independently, without being attached to the transmitter. In order to operate properly, without the transmitter connected, jumpers are required on the X3 terminal board inside the Cooling Control Box. Jumper X3-1 to X3-6, X3-2 to X3-3 to X3-9, and X3-9 to X3-10. See jumpers in Figure 5-14.

SightGauge



Figure 5-14 X3 Jumpers in Cooling Control Box

! CAUTION:THE X3 JUMPERS DESCRIBED IN FIGURE 5-14 SHOULD ONLY BE INSTALLED WHEN THE TRANSMITTER I/O PANEL IS NOT CONNECTED TO THE COOLING CONTROL PANEL. INSTALLING THE JUMPERS WITH THE TRANSMITTER ATTACHED TO THE COOLING CONTROL BOX MAY DAMAGE THE TRANSMITTER I/O BOARD OR THE COOLING CONTROLLER.

X3-6X3-1

X3-10



5.6.2 Air Filter Replacement

Monthly inspection and cleaning of the air filter is recommended.

a.Open rear cabinet door

b.Remove top 3 screws

c.Only loosen lower 3 screws

d.Lift off filter frame cover

e.Remove air filter

f.Clean with compressed air, wash with detergent/water, or replace as necessary

g.Reinstall by reversing the order of the above steps

5.6.3 LCD Contrast Adjustment

The contrast of the LCD display can be adjusted by accessing the Control Setup screen shown in Figure 5-15. Touch the white text box for the LCD Contrast and a pop up window will appear to allow the setting to be adjusted. To get to this screen press the following keys:

KeyPresses



Figure 5-15 Date & Screen Setup Screen

NOTE:The Date, Time, and Screen saver time-out can also be set in this screen by sim-ply touching the white box for each segment.

5.6.4 Touch Screen Calibration

If the touch screen soft buttons on the GUI are working and seem to be accurate, then this procedure is not required. If the soft buttons on the touch screen do not seem to work or can only be activated by pressing outside the button graphic, then a simple touch screen calibration will have to be done as follows:

STEP 1 Go to the touch screen calibration setup screen by pressing the Touch Cal button in Figure 5-16.

NOTE:If you are not able to get to the screen, open the control panel and press and hold the Remote Enable and Disable buttons at the same time and momentarily press the reset button on the Main Controller. Keep the Enable and Disable buttons pressed until the display is up and running. After the micro resets, the Main Con-troller will prompt the operator to calibrate the touch screen.

KeyPresses



Figure 5-16 System Setup Screen

STEP 2 Once you see the screen in Figure 5-17 (a), simply touch the X in the first 2 screens. This will get you to the first screen in Figure 5-18.

STEP 3 To test the calibration simply touch the screen in several places to make sure an X shows up where you touched (see Figure 5-18b).

STEP 4 If the calibration is good, then press ACCEPT. If not, press CANCEL and the calibration procedure will be started over.

NOTE:The procedure can be aborted by pressing any of the 5 hardware Quick keys on the control panel.

Figure 5-17 Touchscreen Calibration Screens

(b)(a)



Figure 5-18 Touchscreen Calibration Test Screen

5.7 Apex Exciter Adjustments

Apex exciters feature RTAC which stands for "real time adaptive correction". RTAC automatically compensates for power amplifier nonlinearity and for group delay resulting from filtering added at installation. Refer to the Apex exciter manual for setup, operation and troubleshooting information.

(b)(a)


Section 6Diagnostics


6
6.1 Introduction
This section contains diagnostic and troubleshooting information for the Atlas Series UHF transmitter. Included is a complete description of all faults which can be displayed via the transmitter front panel display or GUI (Graphical User Interface). Due to the complexity of the control system and the extensive use of surface mount components, the scope of this diagnostics section is to isolate the problem down to a PC board or module which can then be easily exchanged.

The GUI buttons and icons use a symbol and color code system. Some examples are given below:

a. Green with a 1 (or bar) - ON and operating normally.

b. Dark Gray with an O - Shut off (not faulted off)

c. Light Gray - "Grayed Out" - Not communicating or not available.

d. Yellow - Warning - A non-critical sub-system or parameter is out of tolerance and should be addressed by engineering personnel.

1. Yellow with a 1 (or bar) - Warning condition - Still on

2. Yellow with an O (circle) - Warning condition - Shut off

e. Red - Critical fault - This could be a sub-system fault in which the sub-system is muted or shut off (such as a PA Module) or could be a system level fault which could mute or shut the transmitter off.

1. Red or Red with an O (circle) - Critical Fault - Shut module off

When a fault occurs one of the LED’s next to the five Quick buttons will illuminate RED. To track down the cause of the fault, press the quick button. This will take you to one of the 5 main menu screens. There will be a red button or icon on this screen which will allow you to track the problem deeper into the system. The other option is to start

6-1 to servicing.

Section 6 Diagnostics ATLAS ISDB-T

by going to the System Log and seeing what faults have occurred and in what order. If you are not familiar with GUI navigation, refer to Section 3.

6.2 GUI System Log

The GUI contains a System Log which is a listing of all faults which have occurred. To see the System Log press SYSTEM then SYSTEM LOG. This will bring up the screen in Figure 6-1. The System Log gives the following information:

a. # - This gives the number of the fault. There can be up to 99 faults in the log, then it is FIFO (First IN, First Out)

b. Fault Type - This is simply the name of the fault.

c. Time and Date - This gives the exact time and date that the fault occurred.

d. Active or Inactive - If the fault is highlighted in red, it is still active and cannot be cleared. If the fault is not highlighted, then the fault is gone and can be cleared if so desired.

Function Buttons:

a. RESET - Will erase all inactive faults in the log.

b. NEXT and PREV - These buttons allow you to scroll through the entire fault list if necessary.

c. BACK - Will take you back to the System main menu.

NOTE:Tables 6-1 and 6-2 give a complete listing of all possible faults in the Atlas trans-mitter. They also give a brief description of each fault, the trip point and the transmitter action taken in response to the fault.


Section 6 DiagnosticsATLAS ISDB-T

Figure 6-1 Fault Log Screen

6.3 Atlas Three-Strike Fault Actions

6.3.1 Reflected Power Faults

The RFU Controller monitors reflected power at the Cabinet output and at the System output. When the reflected power level (typically 10% of the rated power or a 1.9:1 VSWR) is exceeded the RFU Controller generates an RF MUTE. If after three attempts to restart (three strikes) subsequent faults occur, the transmitter will turn OFF and operator intervention will be needed to turn it back ON. The three strike counter resets after 30 seconds with no faults.

Reflected power faults that initiate a three strike procedure are:

• Cabinet Reflected Power

• System Reflected Power

6.3.2 Module Faults

Should a module failure occur (say a power glitch) the PA Module Controller will use a three-strike action on its own –independently from the transmitter’s Main Controller. This action will cause a reset of only the PA Module experiencing the fault and not the entire transmitter.



The module three strike policy is:

• The PA Module Controller will try to restart the module three times within a 10 secondwindow. After that, if a fault is still present, the module will be turned OFF until it receives the restart command from the Main Controller (ON Command).

• There is a 3 second delay between restart attempts.

• The fault-strike restart process is the same as the system restart command, all of the module faults will be reset.

• During the 10 second three-strike window, any of the nuisance faults will be reported to the Main Controller.

These are the module faults which will be allowed three strikes:

• Over Voltage Pallet

• Under Voltage Pallet

• Over Temperature Module Controller

• Over Current Module Driver

• Over Temperature Pre-driver Heatsink

• Over Drive Module RF Input

• Over Drive Module RF Output

• Under Current Phase and Gain Board

• Over Current Phase and Gain Board

• Over Currrent Pallet

• Under Current Pre-Driver

• Over Current Pre-Driver

• Over Temperature Power Supply Board

• Low Voltage Output DC Converter

• Short Circuit

• High Module Reflected Power



6.4 Fault Tables

The following tables provide a listing of Atlas Transmitter faults along with a brief description, the fault level or threshold and the action taken by the transmitter.

Table 6-1 Atlas Transmitter Fault List

TYPE Description Fault Level or Threshold

Transmitter Action

Three Strike

+15 VDC FLT +15 Bus Voltage Failure

Value is more than +/-15% of normal reading

WARNING NO

+7.5 VDC FLT +7.5 Bus Voltage Failure


WARNING NO

-15 VDC FLT -15 Bus Voltage Failure


WARNING NO

AC Mains High

AC Mains voltage has exceeded 10% above nominal

RF_MUTE and PS_MUTE

NO

AC Mains Low

AC Mains voltage has exceeded 15% below nominal

RF_MUTE and PS_MUTE

NO

AC Phase Imbal

AC line imbalance phase to phase

If any phase is greater than +/- 5% of the average of all three phases

RF_MUTE and PS_MUTE

NO

AC Phase Sqnc AC 3-phase lines connected in improper sequence

Correct or Incorrect Pump and Heat exchanger turned OFF

NO

Air Temp Ambient control enclosure air temperature has exceeded 65oC

65oC WARNING NO

Cab Reflct LVL

Cabinet Reflected Power has exceeded 10% of rated power

Trip point is set at VSWR = 1.9:1

RF MUTE, PS MUTE

YES



Coolant Flow Coolant flow is less than the minimum Liters per minute (lpm) flow rate under normal operation

See Cooling System Layout Diagram:843-5585-153 for 1 Cabinet Systems.843-5585-163 for 2 Cabinet Systems.843-5585-173 for 3 cabinet systems.

RF MUTE and PS MUTE followed by pump switchover. If still insufficient flow RF MUTE and PS MUTE stay active until proper flow is restored.

NO

Coolant Leak Coolant leak detected inside transmitter cabinet

N/A Transmitter Fault OFF. A manual turn ON is required for recovery

NO

CoolantIn Tmp

Input coolant temperature has exceeded 55oC

Warning at 55oC, Fault at 65oC

WARNING. RF MUTE and PS MUTE if coolant temperature reaches 65°C

NO

CoolantOut Tmp

Output coolant temperature has exceeded 55oC

Warning at 55oC, Fault at 65oC

WARNING. RF MUTE and PS MUTE if coolant temperature reaches 65°C

NO

Driver A LVL Drive A power level low

Trip point is 50% of nominal

Drive Chain Switch to alternate exciter if available

NO

Driver B LVL Drive B power level low

Trip point is 50% of nominal

Drive Chain Switch to alternate exciter if available

NO

EXCA KO Communication error Temporary error WARNING NO

EXCA NOCOMM

Exciter A not communicating with Main Controller

No serial communications traffic detected

WARNING NO

EXCB KO Communication error Temporary error WARNING NO

EXCB NOCOMM

Exciter B not communicating with Main Controller

No serial communications traffic detected

WARNING NO



Transmitter Action

Three Strike



EXT Interlock One of the general purpose Interlocks in the External I/O Board is OPEN

Open circuit Transmitter Fault OFF. A manual turn ON is required for recovery.

NO

EXTIO COMM

Communications with External I/O Board have stopped

NO CAN (Controller Area Network) traffic detected

WARNING NO

Fan# Tach Low

Fan# 1-3. Fan Speed is too low

WARNING NO

FAULT OFF The transmitter was forced to OFF by a critical fault

This fault can be triggered by a number of critical faults such as coolant system faults, temperature faults and VSWR faults

Transmitter Fault OFF. A manual turn ON is required for recovery

NO

LVPS 1 AC FLT

No AC line voltage present at input to LVPS #1

AC_OK signal from the low voltage power supply unit

WARNING if LVPS2 is operational. RF and PS_MUTE, and AC_LOW if both supplies have failed.

NO

LVPS 1 DC FLT

LVPS #1DC output fault+15, -15 or +7.5Vdc

BUS_OK signal from low voltage power supply unit


NO

LVPS 2 AC FLT

No AC line voltage present at input to LVPS #2

AC_OK signal from the low voltage power supply unit


NO



Transmitter Action

Three Strike



LVPS 2 DC FLT

LVPS #2DC output fault+15, -15 or +7.5Vdc

BUS_OK signal from low voltage power supply unit


NO

MOV # Fuse Fuse failed on MOV# board

FUSE OPEN WARNING NO

OVP Fuse Fuse failed on OVP board

FUSE OPEN WARNING NO

PA 1-2 Rejt Reject Load 1 dissipation exceeded 1kW

100mW at output of 1kW attenuator


NO




NO




NO




NO




NO




NO



Transmitter Action

Three Strike



PA Cab Rejt 5kW internal liquid-cooled load dissipation exceeded

160mW at output of 45 dB coupler


NO

PBC C# COMM

Communications with PB Controller Board have stopped


WARNING NO

PS MUTE The PA modules power supply is forced to OFF by a critical transmitter fault


The PS MUTE fault will automatically cleared when the fault condition is removed.

NO

Pump Interlock

The pumps are turned OFF by a command from the transmitter, or due to the cable from the transmitter to the Cooling Control Panel being disconnected

Open circuit Transmitter Fault OFF. A manual turn ON is required for recovery

NO

RF MUTE The transmitter RF power is MUTED (OFF) due to a critical transmitter fault


The RF MUTE fault will automatically cleared when the fault condition is removed.

NO

RF Mute Intlck One of the RF Interlocks in the External I/O Board is OPEN

Open circuit RF MUTE, PS MUTE. The fault will automatically cleared when the interlock is closed

NO

RFU C# COMM

Communications with RFU Board have stopped


WARNING NO

Sys Reflct LVL

System Reflected Power has exceeded 10% of rated power

Trip point is set at VSWR = 1.9:1 (Foldback starts at 1.4:1)

RF MUTE, PS MUTE

YES



Transmitter Action

Three Strike



Tank Level FLT

The tank in the pump module is empty

Open circuit Transmitter Fault OFF. A manual turn ON is required for recovery

NO

Tank LVL Warn

The coolant in the tank is low

Open circuit WARNING NO

Transformer Temp

Core temperature of power transformer has exceeded 155º C

155º C Transmitter Fault OFF. A manual turn ON is required for recovery.

NO

Table 6-2 Atlas PA Module Fault List

TYPE Description Fault Level or Threshold Transmitter Action

Three Strike

M# +12V Fail Module #1-8+12Vdc Regulator Failed


WARNING NO

M# +15V Fail Module #1-8Loss of +15Vdc from LVPS


WARNING NO

M# -12V Fail Module #1-8-12Vdc Regulator Failed


WARNING NO

M# -15V Fail Module #1-8Loss of -15Vdc from LVPS


WARNING NO

M# 32V High Module #1-8PA Power Supply Voltage too high

Power Supply voltage to the pallets has exceeded 34Vdc

MODULE OFF YES

M# 32V Low Module #1-8PA Power Supply Voltage too Low

Power Supply voltage to the pallets is less than 25Vdc

MODULE OFF YES



Transmitter Action

Three Strike



M# 5V Fail Module #1-8+5Vdc Regulator Failed


WARNING NO

M# 7V Fail Module #1-8Loss of +7.5Vdc from LVPS


WARNING NO

M# ALC Unlock

Module #1-8 Automatic Level Control Unlock. Module cannot maintain desired power output

Power output is too low or too high, AND the I or Q vector signal equal to limit of "0" or "4095" at DAC output

WARNING NO

M# CAN COMM

Module #1-8PA Module not communicating with transmitter main controller


WARNING NO

M# Ctl Brd OT Module #1-8Controller Board Over-Temperature

Temperature on Module Controller Board has exceeded 95°C

MODULE OFF YES

M# Drv# Bias Module #1-8Driver 1 or Driver 2 Bias fault

IDB ±20% WARNING NO

M# Drv1OC M# Drv2 OC

Module #1-8Driver #1-2 Over-Current

Driver Current has exceeded 17A

MODULE OFF YES

M# Drv1M# Drv2

Module #1-8Driver 1 or Driver 2 LDMOS fault

One LDMOS failure when pallet current is less than 60% of the nominal pallet bias current (1.75 A). Two LDMOS failures when pallet current is less than 40% of the nominal pallet bias current (1.75).

1. If one driver failed, the module will be operated at reduced power at 25% of reference power. 2. If both driver fail the module shuts off

NO

M# Heatsink Module #1-8 Heatsink Over-Temperature

Module heatsink below pre-driver has exceeded 70oC

MODULE OFF YES



Three Strike



M# In Overdrv Module #1-8RF Input Over-Drive

Module RF drive input level has exceeded 10 mW

MODULE OFF YES

M# Input Low Module #1-8RF input Low

Module RF input is less than 0.1mW

WARNING NO

M# Out Overdrv

Module #1-8RF Output Over-Drive

1. Module RF output has exceeded 1170W for PAL/NTSC. 2. Module RF output has exceeded 750W for 8VSB. 3. Module RF output has exceeded 550W for OFDM.

MODULE OFF YES

M# P&G Drv Module #1-8Phase and Gain Driver LDMOS Failure

P & G driver current is lower than 60% of the nominal current (1.2A)

MODULE OFF YES

M# P&G Drv OC

Module #1-8Phase and Gain Driver Over-Current

Current on Phase and Gain Board has exceeded 8A

MODULE OFF YES

M# Pallet # Module #1-8Pallet #1-8 LDMOS Fault

One LDMOS failure when pallet current is less than 60% of the highest pallet current. Two LDMOS failures when pallet current is less than 40% of the highest pallet current.

1. One or two and three LDMOS failures gives a WARNING. 2. Four LDMOS failures causes module to shut OFF.

NO

M# Pallet# Bias

Module #1-8 Pallet# Bias Fault

IPB ±20% WARNING NO

M# Pallet# OC Module #1-8Pallet #1-8 Over-Current

Amplifier Pallet current has exceeded 17A

MODULE OFF YES

M# PreDrv Module #1-8 Predriver LDMOS failure

Pre-Driver current is lower than 60% of the nominal Bias current (3.0 A)

MODULE OFF YES

M# PreDrv Bias

Module #1-8 Bias Fault

IDB ±20% WARNING NO



Three Strike



M# PreDrv OC Module #1-8 Pre-Driver Over-Current

Pre-Driver Current has exceeded 8A

MODULE OFF YES

M# PS Brd OT Module #1-8Power Supply Board Over-Temperature

Temperature on Power Supply Board has exceeded 95°C

MODULE OFF YES

M# PS# Fail Module #1-8, PS# 1-7 The DC converter output voltage is too low

Low voltage output threshold depends on the transmitter frequency (21V to 24V)

The power amplifier folds back RF power output to 300W with one converter failure and to 130W with two converter failures. It shuts down if more than two converters fail.

YES

M# Short Module #1-8 Power Supply short-circuit detected

Module short circuit (Before applying bias voltage, current in any pallet exceeds threshold current 17A)

MODULE OFF YES

M# Sync Loss Module #1-8The Backporch Sychronization pulse is missing

No pulse detection. This fault applies only to Atlas Analogue systems.

WARNING NO

M# VSWR Module #1-8 Reflected power overload

Module reflected power has exceeded 100W

MODULE OFF YES



Three Strike


Section 7Parts List

January 20, 2009 888-2684-001WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior

7
7.1 Replaceable Parts List
Model Parts List IndexTable 7-1 FORMAT, DVI 9000 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 994 9948 003 (C) 7-2Table 7-2 TYPICAL KIT, PLUMBING, 2" HOSE, ATLAS DVA 3 PA CAB - 774 0156 043 (C) 7-3Table 7-3 KIT, PREAMP, ATLAS DUAL SYSTEMS - - - - - - - - - - - - 943 5275 985 (B) 7-3Table 7-4 KIT, 3 WAY SPLITTER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 943 5275 986 (B) 7-3Table 7-5 ATLAS DIGITAL PH3 FIRMWARE; BOTH DUAL/SINGLE ENDED961 1123 000 (C) 7-4Table 7-6 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (DELTA) - - - - - - - - - - - - 971 0022 013 (K) 7-4Table 7-7 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (WYE) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 971 0022 014 (K) 7-4Table 7-8 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (DELTA) - - - - - - - - - - - - 971 0022 015 (K) 7-5Table 7-9 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (WYE) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 971 0022 016 (K) 7-6Table 7-10 KIT, DUAL EXCITER, ATLAS DIGITAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - 971 0022 056 (G) 7-6Table 7-11 KIT, 8 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 971 0062 008 (A) 7-7Table 7-12 BASIC CONTROL/PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS - - - - - - - 971 0066 001 (C) 7-7Table 7-13 COMMON COMPONENTS, DVA BASICS - - - - - - - - - - - 981 0009 003 (AJ) 7-7Table 7-14 RFU, BASIC DIGITAL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 981 0009 153 (B) 7-10Table 7-15 RFU, BASIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 981 0009 150 (B) 7-10Table 7-16 BASIC ADDITIONAL PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS - - - - - 971 0067 001 (B) 7-10Table 7-17 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, 3 PA CAB, ATLAS DVI7.5K/9K - - - - - - 992 9138 042 (A) 7-11Table 7-18 KIT, INSTALL MATERIAL 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB ATLAS - - - 992 9139 071 (D) 7-11Table 7-19 NEPTUNE DIGITAL 5 VICOR MODULE- - - - - - - - - - - - - 992 9991 549 (F) 7-11Table 7-20 MODULE, BASIC, RF AMP, UHF BAND - - - - - - - - - - - - 992 9991 548 (Z) 7-12Table 7-21 FORMAT, TANK BASE DUAL PUMP, CRK16 - - - - - - - - - - 995 0062 200 (M) 7-13Table 7-22 FORMAT, DVI 7500 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 994 9947 003 (C) 7-13Table 7-23 KIT, 4 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 971 0062 004 (B) 7-15Table 7-24 FORMAT, DVI 6800 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 994 9939 003 (C) 7-15Table 7-25 TYPICAL KIT, PLUMBING, 2" HOSE, DVA20, TWO PA CABINET774 0156 042 (B) 7-16Table 7-26 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, 2 PA CAB, ATLAS DVI 5K/6.8K - - - - - - 992 9138 041 (A) 7-17Table 7-27 KIT, 2 WAY SPLITTER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 992 9991 034 (D) 7-17Table 7-28 FORMAT, TANK BASE DUAL PUMP CRK8 - - - - - - - - - - - 995 0062 100 (N) 7-17Table 7-29 FORMAT, DVI 5000 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 994 9938 003 (C) 7-17Table 7-30 KIT, 6 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 971 0062 006 (B) 7-19Table 7-31 FORMAT, DVI 3400 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 994 9937 003 (C) 7-19Table 7-32 KIT, PLUMBING, ATLAS DVA PHASE 3, 1 CABINET - - - - - - 774 0156 040 (C) 7-20Table 7-33 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, SINGLE PA, ATLAS DVI 1.7K/2.5K/3.4K- - 992 9138 040 (B) 7-21Table 7-34 FORMAT, DVI 2500 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 994 9936 003 (C) 7-21Table 7-35 FORMAT, DVI 1700 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 994 9935 003 (C) 7-22Table 7-36 FORMAT, DVI 850 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 994 9934 003 (C) 7-23

7-1 to servicing.

Section 7 Parts List ATLAS ISDB-T

Table 7-37 KIT, 2 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 971 0062 002 (A) 7-24

7-2 888-2684-001 January 20, 2009 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

Section 7 Parts ListATLAS ISDB-T

Table 7-1 FORMAT, DVI 9000 - 994 9948 003 (C)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref484 0820 000 FILTER, UHF ISDTV, (REFLECTIVE) 0 EA N/A646 0665 000 LABEL, INSPECTION 1 EA700 0672 000 LOAD, RF, 20KW, BIRD 8745 1 EA700 0763 000 LOAD, DUMMY 30KW 0 EA700 0778 000 LOAD, RF, 10KW, BIRD 8730A 1 EA704 0007 000 PATCH PANEL, 3-1/8" 4 PORT DPDT 0 EA N/A706 0002 000 HYBRID, 3DB 20KW UHF TV 1 EA706 0048 000 HYBRID 4.77DB, 3 1/8", 550-860 MHZ 0 EA N/A706 0088 000 HYBRID 4.77DB, 3 1/8", 470-550 MHZ 0 EA N/A708 0030 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT350M, 3 FAN, 380V/ 50HZ 0 EA708 0048 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT-350Y48 0 EA774 0156 043 TYPICAL KIT, PLUMBING, 2" HOSE, ATLAS DVA 3 PA CAB 0 EA N/A792 0127 000 NON-DIR COUPLER, 3-1/8" UHF, 1-PORT 1 EA N/A792 0128 000 NON-DIR COUPLER, 1-5/8" UHF, 1-PORT 1 EA N/A917 2515 410 LABEL, 208/240V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 411 LABEL, 380/415V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 440 LABEL, 208/240V DIGITAL 3400W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 441 LABEL, 380/400V DIGITAL 3400W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2558 012 ATLAS, ECDI INSTALL KIT 1 EA917 2575 029 CONDUCTOR, INNER 1 EA N/A943 5275 985 KIT, PREAMP, ATLAS DUAL SYSTEMS 3 EA N/A943 5275 986 KIT, 3 WAY SPLITTER 1 EA N/A943 5547 288 PANEL, FRONT 1 EA943 5575 535 PANEL, SIDE 4 EA N/A943 5575 538 HOOK, PANEL 8 EA N/A943 5575 753 BRACKET, REAR CABINET JOINING 12 EA N/A943 5575 754 BRACKET, FRONT, CABINET JOINING 12 EA N/A961 1123 000 ATLAS DIGITAL PH3 FIRMWARE; BOTH DUAL/SINGLE ENDED XMTRS 0 EA N/A971 0022 013 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 014 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 015 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 016 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 056 KIT, DUAL EXCITER, ATLAS DIGITAL 0 EA971 0062 008 KIT, 8 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER 3 EA N/A971 0066 001 BASIC CONTROL/PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS 1 EA N/A971 0067 001 BASIC ADDITIONAL PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS 2 EA N/A971 0068 001 KIT, SYSTEM INTERCONNECT CABLE 3 CAB ATLAS DVI XMTR 1 EA981 0202 001 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 002 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 003 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 004 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A988 2004 025 DP, ATLAS SINGLE ISDB-T 3 PA DIGITAL XMTR 2 EA N/A988 2517 001 DP ECDI 2 EA988 2686 001 DP, APEX ISDB-TB 2 EA N/A990 2436 001 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 002 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 003 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 004 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 005 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 006 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 007 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 008 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A992 9138 042 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, 3 PA CAB, ATLAS DVI7.5K/9K 0 EA N/A992 9139 071 KIT, INSTALL MATERIAL 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB ATLAS TRANSMITTER 0 EA992 9991 549 NEPTUNE DIGITAL 5 VICOR MODULE 24 EA

January 20, 2009 888-2684-001 7-3 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


992 9995 035 *PWA, UHF EXTERNAL I/O 0 EA994 9912 003 EXCITER, APEX ISDB-T 0 EA995 0062 200 FORMAT, TANK BASE DUAL PUMP, CRK16 0 EA N/AMYA301-138-3-2DPATCH PNL 3-1/8 3PORT 2 DPDT 0 EA992 7259 001 BASIC, ECDI 1 EA

Table 7-2 TYPICAL KIT, PLUMBING, 2" HOSE, ATLAS DVA 3 PA CAB - 774 0156 043 (C)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref021 7510 001 HOSE, RUBBER 3/4" RED 30 FT N/A021 7510 025 HOSE, GEN PURPOSE, EPDM, 1"ID, RED 50 FT N/A021 7510 045 HOSE, RUBBER, 2" ID 200 FT N/A063 1030 021 * PIPE SEALANT "PST" LOCTITE 565 1 EA063 1030 022 PASTE, PIPE THREAD TEFLON 1 EA299 0018 000 THREAD-TAPE, TEFLON 1.00’’W 1 RL843 5585 177 LAYOUT, LIQUID COOLING SYS, ATLAS PH3 SINGLE 3 PA CAB XMTR 0 DWG943 5585 212 ASSY, MANIFOLD 2 EA N/A943 5585 217 ASSY, 3/4 BALL VALVE 3 EA N/A943 5585 218 ASSY, 3/4" NIPPLE 3 EA N/A629 0114 000 FLOW MTR, 10GPM/40LPM, 3/4" FNPT 2 EA N/A943 5585 220 ASSY, 2" LONG ELL 2 EA N/A943 5585 215 ASSY, BALL VALVE 1" 3 EA N/A943 5585 214 ASSY, GLOBE VALVE 1" 3 EA N/A943 5585 216 ASSY, 3/4 GLOBE VALVE 3 EA N/A943 5585 221 ASSY, FLUSHING BALL VALVE 1 EA N/A359 1167 000 BUSHING, MXF, 2-IN X 3/4-IN 2 EA358 3026 000 HOSE BARB 3/4 H X 3/4 MPT 8 EA358 3038 000 HOSE BARB 1" H X 1" MPT 6 EA359 1776 000 HOSE BARB, 2" 6 EA N/A359 0997 000 BOILER DRAIN, 1/2" 3 EA359 1560 000 NIPPLE, BRASS, 2" NPT 2 EA N/A943 5585 210 ASSY, HEAT EXCHANGER(RETURN) 2" 1 EA N/A359 1213 000 BUSHING, MXF, 2-1/2 IN X 2 IN 2 EA943 5585 209 ASSY, HEAT EXCHANGER(SUPPLY) 2" 1 EA N/A359 1043 000 BALL VALVE 2 IN FNPT 2 EA943 5585 219 ASSY, HARD LINE TO LOAD 2 EA N/A359 1775 000 CLAMP, HOSE, 2" HEAVY DUTY 6 EA N/A358 1722 000 HOSE CLAMP, SST, SAE-20 16 EA629 0115 000 FLOW MTR, 15GPM/55LPM 3/4" FNPT 1 EA N/A359 1550 000 HOSE BARB, 3/4" HID X 1/2" MPT 6 EA N/A

Table 7-3 KIT, PREAMP, ATLAS DUAL SYSTEMS - 943 5275 985 (B)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref358 2635 000 CABLE TIE, PUSH MOUNT SNAP IN 1 EA516 0054 000 CAP, DISC 0.001UF 1KV 10% Z5U 1 EA522 0591 000 CAP 47UF 25V 20% 1 EA556 0134 000 *ATTEN, SMA, 12DB, 0.5W, 50 OHM 1 EA556 0143 000 *ATTEN, SMA, 3DB, 0.5W, 50 OHM 1 EA620 3165 000 RF AMP, +25DBM, SMA 1 EA917 2416 830 CBL, PREAMP DC POWER 1 EA N/A917 2416 831 COAX CBL, PREAMP OUT TO SPLITTER INPUT 1 EA N/A922 1345 012 BRKT, ATTENUATOR/AMP MTG 1 EA N/A

Table 7-4 KIT, 3 WAY SPLITTER - 943 5275 986 (B)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref620 3175 000 ADAPTER, SMA-JACK TO SMA-JACK 1 EA N/A700 1422 019 LOAD, 50 OHM, 1/2W 1 EA917 2416 852 CBL KIT, RFU 3-WAY SPLITTER 1 EA917 2550 559 CABLE KIT, RFU 3-WAY SPLITTER 1 EA



922 1325 010 STANDOFF, MALE/FEMALE 4 EA992 7301 001 PWA, DCU 3DB HYBRID 3 EA

Table 7-5 ATLAS DIGITAL PH3 FIRMWARE; BOTH DUAL/SINGLE ENDED - 961 1123 000 (C)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref817 2551 023 SOFTWARE, EXTERNAL IO 0 DWG817 2551 506 SOFTWARE, PA MODULE CONTROLLER 0 DWG817 2551 507 FIRMWARE, MAIN CTLR PH III, FOR USE W/6 MODULE PA CABINETS 0 DWG817 2570 018 ISP2 APPLICATION SW PC 0 DWG861 1015 045 SW, ECDI, DUALCONTROLLER ATLAS 0 DWG861 1122 071 SOFTWARE, POWER SUPPLY MONITOR 0 DWG861 1132 021 SW/FW,RFU CONTROLLER ATLAS ATSC 0 DWG861 1132 651 FIRMWARE, MAIN CTLR, ATLAS ATSC PHASE III 0 DWG888 2566 001 TM ATLAS ISP INSTR 0 DWG

Table 7-6 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (DELTA) - 971 0022 013 (K)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref349 1104 016 SCREW, M4 X .7 X 16 4 EA358 3490 000 END STOP, 264 TERM BLOCK 2 EA358 3491 000 END PLATE, ORANGE (264) 1 EA358 3637 000 PLATE, END STOP, DIN RAIL MTG 6 EA358 3793 000 BOLT, SHOULDER AXLE 4 EA358 3797 000 PLATE, END COVER (283, 2-COND) 1 EA447 0001 000 HANDLE, PULL, OVAL, BLACK, M5 2 EA448 1064 000 CASTER, WHEEL ONLY 4 EA472 1868 000 XFMR, AUTO DUAL PHASE OUTPUT 208/240V 1 EA N/A606 1079 000 CKT BRKR, 125A 3POLE 480VAC 1 EA614 0793 000 TERM BLOCK,3C MODULAR 281 3 EA614 0794 000 JUMPER, 2-POLE STEP-DOWN 283 3 EA614 0810 000 JUMPER, 2-POLE ADJACENT 283 6 EA614 0892 000 TERM BLK, THRU, 4-POLE, BLUE (264) 2 EA614 0930 000 TERM BLK, 2C MODULAR 283 15 EA614 0954 000 TERM BLK, 2C MODULAR 285-635 12 EA917 2413 500 RAIL, CARRIER, 3.0" 1 EA917 2567 003 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 108MM 1 EA917 2567 004 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 144MM 1 EA917 2567 110 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 360MM 1 EA922 1325 237 BRACKET, SLED MTG 1 EA943 5575 163 SPACER, NYLON 6.35 DIA X 9MMLG 4 EA943 5575 276 COVER, MOV SAFETY 1 EA943 5575 399 SUPPORT, SHIELD 1 EA N/A943 5575 401 SHIELD, SAFETY OVP BD 1 EA N/A943 5575 403 PANEL, MOV BD MTG 1 EA N/A943 5575 502 INSULATOR, PS 8 EA N/A943 5575 522 CHASSIS, PS 1 EA N/A943 5575 523 BRKT, MOV BD MTG 1 EA N/A943 5575 524 TRAY, OVP BD MTG 1 EA N/A943 5576 367 STANDOFF, MALE-FEMALE, M4 2 EA952 9235 053 CABLE TRANSFORMER 1 EA N/A971 0022 008 3PH, 208V MOV PKG (DELTA) 1 EA992 9991 036 *PWA, OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION UNTESTED 2 EA

Table 7-7 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (WYE) - 971 0022 014 (K)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref349 1104 016 SCREW, M4 X .7 X 16 4 EA358 3490 000 END STOP, 264 TERM BLOCK 2 EA358 3491 000 END PLATE, ORANGE (264) 1 EA



358 3637 000 PLATE, END STOP, DIN RAIL MTG 6 EA358 3793 000 BOLT, SHOULDER AXLE 4 EA358 3797 000 PLATE, END COVER (283, 2-COND) 1 EA447 0001 000 HANDLE, PULL, OVAL, BLACK, M5 2 EA448 1064 000 CASTER, WHEEL ONLY 4 EA472 1868 000 XFMR, AUTO DUAL PHASE OUTPUT 208/240V 1 EA N/A606 1079 000 CKT BRKR, 125A 3POLE 480VAC 1 EA614 0793 000 TERM BLOCK,3C MODULAR 281 3 EA614 0794 000 JUMPER, 2-POLE STEP-DOWN 283 3 EA614 0810 000 JUMPER, 2-POLE ADJACENT 283 6 EA614 0892 000 TERM BLK, THRU, 4-POLE, BLUE (264) 2 EA614 0930 000 TERM BLK, 2C MODULAR 283 15 EA614 0954 000 TERM BLK, 2C MODULAR 285-635 12 EA917 2413 500 RAIL, CARRIER, 3.0" 1 EA917 2567 003 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 108MM 1 EA917 2567 004 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 144MM 1 EA917 2567 110 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 360MM 1 EA922 1325 237 BRACKET, SLED MTG 1 EA943 5575 163 SPACER, NYLON 6.35 DIA X 9MMLG 4 EA943 5575 276 COVER, MOV SAFETY 1 EA943 5575 399 SUPPORT, SHIELD 1 EA N/A943 5575 401 SHIELD, SAFETY OVP BD 1 EA N/A943 5575 403 PANEL, MOV BD MTG 1 EA N/A943 5575 502 INSULATOR, PS 8 EA N/A943 5575 522 CHASSIS, PS 1 EA N/A943 5575 523 BRKT, MOV BD MTG 1 EA N/A943 5575 524 TRAY, OVP BD MTG 1 EA N/A943 5576 367 STANDOFF, MALE-FEMALE, M4 2 EA952 9235 053 CABLE TRANSFORMER 1 EA N/A971 0022 009 3PH 208V, MOV PKG (WYE) 1 EA992 9991 036 *PWA, OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION UNTESTED 2 EA

Table 7-8 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (DELTA) - 971 0022 015 (K)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref349 1104 016 SCREW, M4 X .7 X 16 4 EA358 3490 000 END STOP, 264 TERM BLOCK 2 EA358 3491 000 END PLATE, ORANGE (264) 1 EA358 3637 000 PLATE, END STOP, DIN RAIL MTG 6 EA358 3793 000 BOLT, SHOULDER AXLE 4 EA358 3797 000 PLATE, END COVER (283, 2-COND) 1 EA447 0001 000 HANDLE, PULL, OVAL, BLACK, M5 2 EA448 1064 000 CASTER, WHEEL ONLY 4 EA472 1874 000 XFMR, AUTO DUAL PHASE OUTPUT 380/415V 1 EA N/A606 1034 000 CKT BRKR, 80A 3POLE 3PH 480VAC 1 EA614 0793 000 TERM BLOCK,3C MODULAR 281 3 EA614 0794 000 JUMPER, 2-POLE STEP-DOWN 283 3 EA614 0810 000 JUMPER, 2-POLE ADJACENT 283 6 EA614 0892 000 TERM BLK, THRU, 4-POLE, BLUE (264) 2 EA614 0930 000 TERM BLK, 2C MODULAR 283 15 EA614 0954 000 TERM BLK, 2C MODULAR 285-635 12 EA917 2413 500 RAIL, CARRIER, 3.0" 1 EA917 2567 003 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 108MM 1 EA917 2567 004 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 144MM 1 EA917 2567 110 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 360MM 1 EA922 1325 237 BRACKET, SLED MTG 1 EA943 5575 163 SPACER, NYLON 6.35 DIA X 9MMLG 4 EA943 5575 276 COVER, MOV SAFETY 1 EA943 5575 399 SUPPORT, SHIELD 1 EA N/A943 5575 401 SHIELD, SAFETY OVP BD 1 EA N/A943 5575 403 PANEL, MOV BD MTG 1 EA N/A



943 5575 502 INSULATOR, PS 8 EA N/A943 5575 522 CHASSIS, PS 1 EA N/A943 5575 523 BRKT, MOV BD MTG 1 EA N/A943 5575 524 TRAY, OVP BD MTG 1 EA N/A943 5576 367 STANDOFF, MALE-FEMALE, M4 2 EA952 9235 053 CABLE TRANSFORMER 1 EA N/A971 0022 010 3PH, 400V, MOV PKG (DELTA) 1 EA992 9991 036 *PWA, OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION UNTESTED 2 EA

Table 7-9 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (WYE) - 971 0022 016 (K)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref349 1104 016 SCREW, M4 X .7 X 16 4 EA358 3490 000 END STOP, 264 TERM BLOCK 2 EA358 3491 000 END PLATE, ORANGE (264) 1 EA358 3637 000 PLATE, END STOP, DIN RAIL MTG 6 EA358 3793 000 BOLT, SHOULDER AXLE 4 EA358 3797 000 PLATE, END COVER (283, 2-COND) 1 EA447 0001 000 HANDLE, PULL, OVAL, BLACK, M5 2 EA448 1064 000 CASTER, WHEEL ONLY 4 EA472 1874 000 XFMR, AUTO DUAL PHASE OUTPUT 380/415V 1 EA N/A606 1034 000 CKT BRKR, 80A 3POLE 3PH 480VAC 1 EA614 0793 000 TERM BLOCK,3C MODULAR 281 3 EA614 0794 000 JUMPER, 2-POLE STEP-DOWN 283 3 EA614 0810 000 JUMPER, 2-POLE ADJACENT 283 6 EA614 0892 000 TERM BLK, THRU, 4-POLE, BLUE (264) 2 EA614 0930 000 TERM BLK, 2C MODULAR 283 15 EA614 0954 000 TERM BLK, 2C MODULAR 285-635 12 EA917 2413 500 RAIL, CARRIER, 3.0" 1 EA917 2567 003 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 108MM 1 EA917 2567 004 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 144MM 1 EA917 2567 110 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 360MM 1 EA922 1325 237 BRACKET, SLED MTG 1 EA943 5575 163 SPACER, NYLON 6.35 DIA X 9MMLG 4 EA943 5575 276 COVER, MOV SAFETY 1 EA943 5575 399 SUPPORT, SHIELD 1 EA N/A943 5575 401 SHIELD, SAFETY OVP BD 1 EA N/A943 5575 403 PANEL, MOV BD MTG 1 EA N/A943 5575 502 INSULATOR, PS 8 EA N/A943 5575 522 CHASSIS, PS 1 EA N/A943 5575 523 BRKT, MOV BD MTG 1 EA N/A943 5575 524 TRAY, OVP BD MTG 1 EA N/A943 5576 367 STANDOFF, MALE-FEMALE, M4 2 EA952 9235 053 CABLE TRANSFORMER 1 EA N/A971 0022 011 3PH 400V, MOV PKG (WYE) 1 EA992 9991 036 *PWA, OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION UNTESTED 2 EA

Table 7-10 KIT, DUAL EXCITER, ATLAS DIGITAL - 971 0022 056 (G)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref556 0134 000 *ATTEN, SMA, 12DB, 0.5W, 50 OHM 2 EA583 0159 000 RELAY, COAX TRANSFER 1 EA700 1422 019 LOAD, 50 OHM, 1/2W 1 EA843 5585 003 WIRING DIAGRAM RFU DIGITAL 0 DWG917 2550 179 KIT, RFU DUAL EXC 1 EA943 5575 464 DEFLECTOR 1 EA N/A943 5575 699 BRACKET, SUPPORT RAIL 4 EA N/A992 7299 001 PWA, DCU DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 1 EA

Table 7-11 KIT, 8 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER - 971 0062 008 (A)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref



250 0595 000 CABLE, FFC, 24C 2ROW 8 EA250 0645 000 PLUG, 600VAC 3-WIRE 12AWG W/GND 8 EA N/A296 0264 000 TUBING, SHRINK 1/2 WHITE 12.4 FT359 1269 000 HOSE, 3/8’’ ID, BLUE 0.91 ME606 1137 200 CKT BRKR 20 AMPS 3P 480VAC 8 EA N/A610 1362 000 HEADER, 12C 2 ROW STRAIGHT 16 EA612 1554 000 HSG, SIZE 8 CAVITY, PIN SIDE 8 EA620 0498 000 ADAPTOR 3-1/8 FL TO UNFL 1 EA620 0581 000 COUPLING, SLEEVE, 3-1/8 1 EA792 0020 000 DIR COUPLER, 3-1/8" UHF, 3-PORT 1 EA N/A843 5575 131 WAVECRIMP ASSY DWG 0 DWG917 2550 186 CABLE COAX, PA TO BACKPLANE 8 EA922 1325 009 SCREW, SHOULDER 16 EA922 1325 016 ALIGNMENT PIN 16 EA943 5575 455 HOSE ASSY, SUPPLY 16 EA N/A943 5575 649 PLATE, AC CONN 8 EA N/A943 5575 666 GASKET, AC CONN 8 EA N/A943 5575 683 COVER, PLATE, 3.125" DIA. 2 EA N/A943 5575 685 TUBE, RF, CUT TO LENGTH, 3.125" DIA. 1 EA N/A943 5575 723 ANGLE, COMBINER SUPPORT, 8-WAY 1 EA N/A971 0022 044 COMBINER, 8 WAY, UHF 1 EA N/A971 0053 312 ASSY, BUSBAR 3P 4-BRKR (12TAP) 2 EA N/A556 0045 000 *ATTEN, BNC, 1DB, 2W, 50 OHM 4 EA N/A556 0134 000 *ATTEN, SMA, 12DB, 0.5W, 50 OHM 1 EA556 0137 000 *ATTEN, SMA, 15DB, 0.5W, 50 OHM 1 EA556 0140 000 *ATTEN, SMA, 6DB, 0.5W, 50 OHM 2 EA620 0208 000 ADAPTER, N-TYPE JACK-JACK 1 EA620 0300 000 TEE, BNC, 274U 4 EA620 2964 000 POWER SPLITTER, 2-WAY 2 EA N/A620 3008 000 ADAPTER, SMA FEM TO SMA MALE 2 EA700 1404 000 TERMINATION, 50 OHM 0.25W BNC 2 EA843 5276 084 DIAG, WIRING ATLAS DVI DIGITAL CONTROL/PA CABINET 0 DWG922 1345 011 BRKT, SPLITTER MTG 2 EA943 5575 464 DEFLECTOR 1 EA N/A952 9236 006 CABLE RFU/EXC CTRL ATLAS DVI 1 EA N/A

Table 7-12 BASIC CONTROL/PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS - 971 0066 001 (C)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref021 7510 002 HOSE, 1/2’’ ID, BLUE 8.7 FT296 0399 000 POLYURETHANE TUBE, 9MM ID 1.25 ME943 5575 146 PANEL, BLANK, 6U 1 EA943 5575 994 PANEL, ATLAS DIGITAL INPUT PLATE 1 EA N/A943 5575 995 PANEL, I/O 1 EA981 0009 003 COMMON COMPONENTS, DVA BASICS 1 EA981 0009 153 RFU, BASIC DIGITAL 1 EA

Table 7-13 COMMON COMPONENTS, DVA BASICS - 981 0009 003 (AJ)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref021 7510 025 HOSE, GEN PURPOSE, EPDM, 1"ID, RED 17.5 FT N/A026 6010 003 GROMMET STRIP, 0.125 6 FT N/A061 0045 000 FILTER, AIR (430 X 300 X 22.3MM) 1 EA073 0008 001 LUBRICANT, RUBBER EMULSION 1-GAL 0 EA N/A099 0006 483 GLOVES, THERMAL 1 EA279-486-000 SPLITTER 0,30-1,0GHZ 8X SMA MICL 1 EA296 0399 000 POLYURETHANE TUBE, 9MM ID 0.55 ME300 2910 000 SCREW, M5 X 16MM, BLK W/WASHER 46 EA335 0348 000 O-RING, NITRILE, #916, ID 1.171" 2 EA N/A336 1242 000 SCR, 4 X 1/2 TAPPING 2 EA336 1254 000 *HOSE CLAMP, (MINI) SST, SAE-6 1 EA



350 0063 000 RIVET PULL THRU .093 0 EA350 0105 000 RIVET 3/16 ALUM .126/.25 0 EA350 0114 000 RIVET, POP, DOME 0.125 DIA 0 EA N/A350 0128 000 RIVET, POP 3/16" DIA 0 EA353 0344 000 CAGE NUT, M5-0.8, 12-15 GA. 55 EA357 0140 000 PLUG, SHIPPING, 1-1/4 IN 2 EA N/A358 0473 000 HOSE CLAMP, SST, SAE-28 2 EA358 1316 000 HOSE CLAMP, SST, SAE-24 10 EA358 1866 000 BUMPER, MOLDED 4 EA358 2589 000 MOUNT, RIBBON CABLE, 2’’ 3 EA N/A358 3186 000 PLUG, WHT 1.375" HOLE 2 EA358 3187 000 PLUG, WHITE 1.75" HOLE 5 EA358 3490 000 END STOP, 264 TERM BLOCK 4 EA358 3491 000 END PLATE, ORANGE (264) 2 EA358 3637 000 PLATE, END STOP, DIN RAIL MTG 4 EA358 3797 000 PLATE, END COVER (283, 2-COND) 1 EA408 0368 000 GASKET, EMI SHIELDING, 1.0MM X 3.0MM 4 FT N/A408 0398 000 GASKET, EMI, 3.5MM X 12.7MM, D 1 PC N/A408 0399 000 GASKET, EMI, 2MM X 12.7MM, D 2.7 FT N/A414 0344 000 CORE, EMI SUPRESSION, 0.275 ID 1 EA N/A416 0003 000 CORE, EMI SUPRESSION, 0.750" ID 2 EA424 0360 000 GROMMET 1-3/4 MTG DIA 3 EA424 0502 000 BUMPER 5/8 DIA X 1/4 THK 1 EA430 0192 000 FINGER GUARD, 119MM FAN 5 EA N/A430 0313 000 FAN, 12V 110CFM 119MM SQ 5 EA N/A448 1082 000 GASKET, EMI/RFI SHIELDING, 1.38 FT N/A542 0002 000 RES 2 OHM 5% 8W 2 EA556 0134 000 *ATTEN, SMA, 12DB, 0.5W, 50 OHM 2 EA560 0121 009 POSISTOR 0.75 AMP 60VDC 11MM DISC 2 EA606 1136 080 CKT BRKR 8 AMPS 2P 480VAC 2 EA N/A610 1247 000 PLUG, MALE 4C 1ROW STRAIGHT 2 EA610 1250 000 PLUG, MALE 16C 1ROW STRAIGHT 1 EA610 1262 000 JUMPER, 2-POLE, GREY (264) 6 EA614 0892 000 TERM BLK, THRU, 4-POLE, BLUE (264) 11 EA614 0893 000 TERM BLK, THRU, 2-POLE, GREY (264) 9 EA614 0930 000 TERM BLK, 2C MODULAR 283 6 EA614 0931 000 TERM BLK, 2C MODULAR 283 1 EA614 0954 000 TERM BLK, 2C MODULAR 285-635 3 EA629 0093 000 SENSOR, LIQUID LEVEL, FLOAT 1 EA629 0104 000 FLOWMETER, 0.5-40 GPM 1"SAE 1 EA646 1353 000 NAMEPLATE, XMTR EQUIPMENT 1 EA N/A646 1698 000 NAMEPLATE, DOMED, HARRIS LOGO 1 EA646 1698 100 NAMEPLATE, DOMED, ’ATLAS’ 1 EA646 1706 000 LABEL, GLYCOL WARNING 1 EA736 0315 000 SWITCHER, AUTORANGING 115/230V 2 EA778-686-003 ACCESSORIES-TORX-TAPPING SCREW BZ5,5X13 120 EA839 8222 142 SKID, DRIVER, POWER SUPPLY 1 DWG901 0202 101 PWA, AA3 BACKPLANE 1 EA917 2142 143 CABLE, GROUND 0 EA917 2413 500 RAIL, CARRIER, 3.0" 1 EA917 2558 081 PATENT LABEL-ATLAS ANALTV XMTR 1 EA917 2567 003 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 108MM 1 EA917 2567 010 DIN RAIL, CUT LENGTH 360MM 1 EA922 1325 033 ADAPTER, HOSE 1 EA922 1325 040 RAIL, DIN 180MM LG 1 EA922 1340 006 RESTRAINT 1 EA922 1340 008 STRAP, GROUND 1 EA943 5547 301 DRIP TRAY 1 EA943 5575 020 SUPPORT, CAGE SHELF 4 EA



943 5575 021 STRAP, CAGE GROUND 1 EA943 5575 023 DEFLECTOR, CAGE AIR 8 EA943 5575 032 MOUNTING PANEL [3 FAN] 1 EA943 5575 035 PAN, DRIP 1 EA943 5575 036 CUP, FLOAT DRIP 1 EA943 5575 042 PANEL, CAGE MIDDLE FRONT 1 EA943 5575 049 BRACE, CAGE TOP 3 EA943 5575 050 ROLLER, MODULE ALIGNMENT 14 EA943 5575 053 BRACKET, P.A. MOD C.B. SUPPORT 1 EA943 5575 059 GUIDE, MODULE, BLACK PVC 16 EA943 5575 079 SPACER, XFMR SHOULDER 1 EA943 5575 107 BAR, RF CONN, PA CAGE 1 EA N/A943 5575 179 DIN RAIL, 428 MM LONG 1 EA943 5575 186 TEMPERATURE SENSORS [PAIR] 1 EA943 5575 285 PANEL, UPPER DUCT 2 EA943 5575 320 TRAY, TB MTG 1 EA943 5575 321 COVER, TB 1 EA943 5575 322 CHANNEL, TB WIRE ROUTING 1 EA943 5575 324 PLATE, GROUND 3 EA943 5575 422 BRACKET, FAN MTG 1 EA N/A943 5575 423 PANEL, FILTER HOLDING 1 EA N/A943 5575 425 PANEL, BAFFLE 1 EA N/A943 5575 526 FLOOR, RACK 1 EA N/A943 5575 533 STRIP, CAGE FRONT 2 EA N/A943 5575 534 BRACKET, SIDE PANEL MTG. 8 EA N/A943 5575 561 PANEL, SPLITTER/BACKPLANE MTG 1 EA N/A943 5575 621 PANEL, UPPER REAR, PA CAGE 1 EA N/A943 5575 622 PLATE, PA MODULE CATCH 1 EA N/A943 5575 648 CABLES, RIBBON 1 EA N/A943 5575 653 SHELF, PA CAGE 1 EA N/A943 5575 654 PLUMBING, SUPPLY MANIFOLD 1 EA N/A943 5575 655 PLUMBING, RETURN MANIFOLD 1 EA N/A943 5575 657 COVER, PA CAGE 1 EA N/A943 5575 659 ANGLE, FRONT PANEL SUPPORT 1 EA N/A943 5575 663 PANEL, RACK TOP 1 EA943 5575 664 PANEL, MAIN C.B. 1 EA943 5575 671 PANEL, TOP ACCESS 1 EA943 5575 672 PANEL, I/O 1 EA943 5575 673 PANEL, PA CAGE, LEFT 1 EA N/A943 5575 674 PANEL, PA CAGE, RIGHT 1 EA N/A943 5575 678 PANEL, CB COVER 1 EA N/A943 5575 680 BLOCK, MANIFOLD SPACER 1 EA N/A943 5575 682 BRKT, MANIFOLD MTG 2 EA N/A943 5575 689 PANEL, AC COVER 1 EA N/A943 5575 700 BRACKET, SUPPORT RAIL 2 EA943 5575 722 BRACKET, SUPPORT RAIL 2 EA943 5575 724 PANEL, HOSE DISCONNECT 1 EA943 5575 736 SHIELD, TEMP. SENSOR 2 EA N/A943 5575 741 GUIDE, COMBINER MTG 1 EA N/A943 5575 743 BRACKET, LOWER ADJUSTING, DIR.COUPLER 1 EA N/A943 5575 744 FLANGE, UPPER DIR. COUPLER 1 EA N/A943 5575 882 STRAP, FRONT TO BACK GROUND 1 EA943 5575 971 HOSE ADAPTER 2 EA N/A943 5575 979 ANGLE, BASE 3 EA N/A943 5575 983 SPACER, 3 HOLE 4 EA N/A943 5585 015 PLATE, AIR DAM 0 EA952 9230 900 CABINET ASSY, UNIVERSAL 1 EA N/A952 9235 072 CABLE, LVPS AC 1 EA N/A952 9235 074 CABLE, LVPS DC CTRL 1 EA N/A



952 9235 078 CABLE CABINET CONTROL 1 EA N/A971 0022 081 CONTROL UNIT 1 EA981 0009 007 COMMON FAB PARTS, ATLAS PHASE 3A 1 EA N/A992 9991 301 *PWA, PA BLOCK CONTROLLER 1 EA N/A

Table 7-14 RFU, BASIC DIGITAL - 981 0009 153 (B)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref943 5575 098 FACEPLATE, RFU 1 EA981 0009 150 RFU, BASIC 1 EA

Table 7-15 RFU, BASIC - 981 0009 150 (B)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref335 0109 000 WASHER PLAIN .25 ID 14 EA336 1242 000 SCR, 4 X 1/2 TAPPING 2 EA620 3014 000 ADAPTER, BULKHEAD SMA 1 EA843 5585 003 WIRING DIAGRAM RFU DIGITAL 0 DWG861 1132 021 SW/FW,RFU CONTROLLER ATLAS ATSC 0 DWG917 2550 193 CABLE RFU ATSC 1 EA N/A943 5575 099 COVER 1 EA943 5585 005 CHASSIS, RFU, ATLAS ATSC 1 EA N/A943 5585 006 BRACKET, DIR. COUPLER, RFU, ATLAS ATSC 1 EA N/A943 5585 007 FACEPLATE, RFU, ATLAS ATSC 1 EA N/A992 7299 001 PWA, DCU DIRECTIONAL COUPLER 1 EA992 9991 151 *PWA, RFU CONTROLLER 1 EA992 9991 210 *PWA, RFU FRONT PANEL PCB 1 EA

Table 7-16 BASIC ADDITIONAL PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS - 971 0067 001 (B)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref021 7510 002 HOSE, 1/2’’ ID, BLUE 8.7 FT296 0399 000 POLYURETHANE TUBE, 9MM ID 1.25 ME358 1316 000 HOSE CLAMP, SST, SAE-24 6 EA843 5275 996 WIRING DIA, BASIC ADDITIONAL PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS 0 DWG943 5575 141 PANEL, BLANK, 1U 1 EA943 5575 143 PANEL, BLANK, 3U 1 EA943 5575 146 PANEL, BLANK, 6U 2 EA943 5575 892 PANEL, BLANK, I/O 1 EA981 0009 005 COMMON COMP, ADDITIONAL CABINET 1 EA981 0009 153 RFU, BASIC DIGITAL 1 EA



Table 7-17 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, 3 PA CAB, ATLAS DVI7.5K/9K - 992 9138 042 (A)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref358 0498 000 *HOSE CLAMP, SST, SAE-48 10 EA618 0304 000 LINE, XMISSION 3-1/8 3 EA620 0233 000 HARDWARE SET 1-5/8 IN 1 EA620 0498 000 ADAPTOR 3-1/8 FL TO UNFL 15 EA620 0544 000 CONN, ANCHOR INS 3-1/8; 50 OHM 5 EA620 0573 000 CONN, ANCHOR INS 1-5/8 1 EA620 0581 000 COUPLING, SLEEVE, 3-1/8 10 EA620 0908 000 HARDWARE KIT, 3-1/8 3 EA620 1893 000 ELBOW 90 DEG 3-1/8 5 EA620 1903 000 ELBOW 90 DEG 1-5/8 1 EA620 2275 000 ELBOW, EQUAL, 3-1/8, 90 DEG 5 EA843 5585 234 LAYOUT, EQUIPMENT ATLAS DVI 7.5K/9K 0 DWG

Table 7-18 KIT, INSTALL MATERIAL 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB ATLAS - 992 9139 071 (D)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref086 0004 038 SOLDER, SILVER SIZE 0.062 1 LB086 0004 040 FLUX, STAY-CLEAN 1 EA086 0004 046 * FLUX, SILVER BRAZING 1 EA086 0004 047 SOLDER, SILVER SIZE .125" 1 LB086 0004 060 SOLDER, HARD SILVER, 1/16DIA 1 TZ302 0318 000 SCR, 3/8-16 X 1.0 75 EA302 0320 000 SCR, 3/8-16 X 1-1/2 75 EA306 0046 000 NUT, HEX 3/8-16 75 EA306 0047 000 NUT, HEX 3/8-16 75 EA310 0011 000 WASHER, FLAT 3/8 75 EA314 0011 000 WASHER, SPLIT-LOCK 3/8 75 EA356 0089 000 CABLE TIE, 5.6’’ NYLON NATURAL 100 EA N/A356 0218 000 CABLE TIE PLT3S-M 50 EA358 1131 000 NUT W/SPRING 3/8-16 30 EA358 2179 000 ROD, THREADED 3/8-16 X 10FT LG 12 EA358 2188 000 FLAT PLATE FITTING 20 EA358 2202 000 NUT COUPLER 3/8-16 6 EA358 2266 000 FITTING FLAT PLATE 4 EA358 2432 000 BRACKET U TYPE 2 EA358 2598 000 CABLE TIE MOUNT, 4-WAY 50 EA N/A358 3308 000 CHANNEL 1-5/8 SQ 10FT LG 7 EA359 1054 000 PIPE HANGER 3.5IN LAY-IN 10 EA843 5577 016 ASSY INST, FRAME, PATCH PANEL, TYPICAL 0 DWG

Table 7-19 NEPTUNE DIGITAL 5 VICOR MODULE - 992 9991 549 (F)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref410 0463 000 THERMAL INTERFACE, DC-DC CONV 5 EA566 0044 000 CONVERTER, DC/DC 375V/32V 600W 5 EA N/A618 0929 000 ASSY, COAX, SMA-SMA 50 OHM 32" 1 EA646 0665 000 LABEL, INSPECTION 1 EA943 5547 389 FACEPLATE, PA MODULE 1 EA N/A992 9991 548 MODULE, BASIC, RF AMP, UHF BAND 1 EA



Table 7-20 MODULE, BASIC, RF AMP, UHF BAND - 992 9991 548 (Z)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref007 4060 084 BRZ, PH FGR STOCK 4.4 EA007 4060 089 FINGERSTOCK, BOTTOM LANCE, CLIP ON 0.3 EA026 6010 002 GROMMET STRIP, 0.090 0.668 FT033 4010 013 TAPE, KAPTON 0.001 X 1.0W 0 RL053 0011 000 MODULE CARTON ATLAS / NEPTUNE 0 EA055 0100 005 *THERMAL COMPOUND, 8OZ JAR 0 EA063 1030 022 PASTE, PIPE THREAD TEFLON 0 EA088 0001 089 TAPE, ELEC 1.75 IN W 0 RL2413-015-11066 CLAMP RIBBON CABLE S/A 3 EA N/A250 0644 000 RECP, 600VAC,THREE LUG W/GND 1 EA252 0465 000 WIRE, RIBBON 5 X 50 MIL 0.90 FT N/A296 0262 000 TUBING, SHRINK 1/4 WHITE 0.17 FT299 0018 000 THREAD-TAPE, TEFLON 1.00’’W 0 RL302 0800 005 SCREW, PHIL FHMS M2.5-0.45 X5 14 EA302 0801 000 SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 6 4 EA302 0803 000 SCREW SEMS M3 X 8 SKT HD SS 77 EA302 0803 006 SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 6 SEMS 191 EA302 0803 008 SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 8 SEMS 9 EA302 0803 010 SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 10 SEMS 28 EA302 0804 008 SCREW, MACH M4-0.7 X 8 SEMS 11 EA302 0804 010 SCREW, MACH M4-0.7 X 10 SEMS 4 EA302 0804 012 SCREW, MACH M4-0.7 X 12 SEMS 24 EA303 0164 000 SCREW, SKT BUTTON HD M4X8 S/ST 14 EA303 4103 005 SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 5 1 EA303 4103 008 SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 8 1 EA303 4103 012 SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 12 2 EA303 4103 016 SCREW, MACH M3-0.5 X 16 2 EA303 4104 016 SCREW, MACH M4-0.7 X 16 1 EA303 4203 006 SCREW MACH M3-0.5 X 6 37 EA303 4203 008 SCREW MACH M3-0.5 X 8 27 EA303 4203 010 SCREW MACH M3-0.5 X 10 4 EA303 4205 012 SCREW, MACH M5-0.8 X 12 2 EA303 7103 008 SCREW SKT HD CAP M3 X 8 77 EA303 7125 006 SCREW SKT HD CAP M2.5 X 6 55 EA310 0003 000 WASHER, FLAT NO. 4 19 EA310 0006 000 WASHER FLAT 8 34 EA312 0009 000 WASHER, INT LOCK 1/4 1 EA314 0003 000 WASHER, SPLIT-LOCK 4 8 EA315 0021 030 WASHER, SPLIT-LOCK M3 50 EA315 0021 040 WASHER, SPLIT-LOCK M4 38 EA328 0074 000 WASHER, STEEL COMPRESSION 2 EA335 0297 000 WASHER, SHOULDER 0.118 ID NOM 6 EA336 1256 000 ROLL PIN, 2.5MM DIA X 6MM LONG 13 EA350 0039 000 RIVET POP .125X.375 12 EA354 0141 000 LUG SHAKE .123 MTG 1 EA356 0113 000 CABLE CLAMP, NYLON 1.000" DIA 1 EA356 0255 000 CLAMP, FLAT CABLE, 0.5" W 3 EA359 1272 000 NIPPLE, 3/8", STAINLESS STEEL 2 EA N/A359 1777 000 NIPPLE, BRASS PIPE 3/8 NPT 2 EA N/A384 1165 000 DIODE, SCHOTTKY 60V 80AMP 3 EA404 0921 000 PAD, THERMAL INTERFACE 21 EA408 0368 000 GASKET, EMI SHIELDING, 1.0MM X 3.0MM 18.2 FT N/A408 0397 000 GASKET,EMI,11.8MM X 10.7MM, V 34 IN N/A410 0464 000 THERMAL INTERFACE, 12 X 40 MM 3 EA410 0467 000 STANDOFF NYLON F-F M3 X15 LONG 4 EA



410 0470 000 STANDOFF, NYLON SNAP-IN 2 EA424 0598 000 BUSHING, SPLIT, GUIDE PIN 2 EA N/A447 0001 000 HANDLE, PULL, OVAL, BLACK, M5 1 EA522 0680 000 CAP 360UF 450V -10/+50% 105C 1 EA N/A548 2382 000 RES, 2.5 OHM 100W 1% TO-247 2 EA N/A620 3195 000 RECEPTACLE, BLIND-MATE 7/16" 1 EA700 1409 000 TERMINATION 50 OHM 100W 5% 2 EA700 1411 000 TERMINATION 50 OHM 10W 5% 2 EA843 5575 055 WIRING DIAGRAM MODULE 0 DWG917 2550 024 MODULE RIBBON CABLE 1 EA917 2550 188 ASSY, 50 CONTACT RIBBON CABLE 1 EA917 2550 189 ASSY, 20 CONTACT RIBBON CABLE 1 EA917 2550 190 ASSY, 20-CONTACT RIBBON CABLE 1 EA917 2550 495 WIRES, DC POWER 1 EA917 2550 496 CABLE, FWD POWER SAMPLE 1 EA917 2550 497 CABLE, RFL POWER SAMPLE 1 EA917 2550 498 CABLE, P&G RF OUTPUT 1 EA917 2550 512 JUMPER, DC 2 EA917 2550 568 CAPACITOR CABLE 1 EA N/A917 2575 010 CABLE, GATE BIAS 1 EA917 2575 012 STANDOFF, HEX M4 X 15, M/F 9 EA917 2575 017 CABLE, MTA-100 6 WIRE 1 EA922 1300 019 CABLE, RF INPUT 1 EA922 1325 009 SCREW, SHOULDER 2 EA952 9235 098 COLDPLATE/MANIFOLD ASSY 1 EA N/A992 7289 501 PWA, SPLITTLER, PORTS 1-4 1 EA992 7290 501 PWA, SPLITTLER, PORTS 5-8 1 EA992 9415 101 MECHANICAL KIT ATLAS PA MODULE 1 EA992 9991 001 MK2 UHF BROADBAND PALLET 10 EA992 9991 521 PWA, PHASE & GAIN 1 EA992 9991 531 PWA, PS FRONT END 1 EA992 9991 533 PWA, POWER SUPPLY 1 EA992 9991 541 PWA, PREDRIVER PALLET 1 EA992 9991 611 PWA, MODULE CONTROLLER 1 EA992 9991 711 PWA, 8-WAY COMBINER 1 EA

Table 7-21 FORMAT, TANK BASE DUAL PUMP, CRK16 - 995 0062 200 (M)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref432 0628 000 PUMP, CRK16-60/3 60HZ 0 EA N/A570 0381 000 CNTOR, MCS, 1NO 5.5KW 24VDC 0 EA570 0406 000 CNTOR, MCS, 15KW 1NO 24VDC 0 EA N/A582 0080 000 RELAY, OVERLOAD 5.4-27A 0 EA N/A582 0081 000 RELAY, OVERLOAD 3.2-16A 0 EA N/A917 2416 612 LABEL, 208/240V, 12-32A, 7.5HP 0 EA N/A917 2416 654 LABEL, DUAL PUMP, 50 HZ 0 EA N/A943 5514 514 ADAPTER, 2 IN ANSI FLANGE TO 2 MIPT 0 EA N/A971 0022 064 COOL CTLR, C12 CONTACTOR, 3.7-12A 0 EA N/A971 0022 066 COOL CTLR, C30 CONTACTOR, 12-32A 0 EA N/A992 7150 052 PUMP MODULE PT, TANK BASE 1 EA432 0563 000 PUMP, IMMERSIBLE, CRK16 0 EA N/A432 0565 000 PUMP, CRK16-60/4 50HZ 0 EA N/A995 0062 002 KIT, ADAPTER, BSPP PUMP OUTPUT 2 EA N/A

Table 7-22 FORMAT, DVI 7500 - 994 9947 003 (C)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref484 0820 000 FILTER, UHF ISDTV, (REFLECTIVE) 0 EA N/A620 0360 000 TAPER 3-1/8 TO 1-5/8 2 EA646 0665 000 LABEL, INSPECTION 1 EA



700 0672 000 LOAD, RF, 20KW, BIRD 8745 1 EA700 0763 000 LOAD, DUMMY 30KW 0 EA700 0778 000 LOAD, RF, 10KW, BIRD 8730A 1 EA704 0007 000 PATCH PANEL, 3-1/8" 4 PORT DPDT 0 EA N/A706 0002 000 HYBRID, 3DB 20KW UHF TV 1 EA706 0090 000 HYBRID 6.99DB/0.97DB, UHF 0 EA N/A708 0030 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT350M, 3 FAN, 380V/ 50HZ 0 EA708 0048 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT-350Y48 0 EA774 0156 043 TYPICAL KIT, PLUMBING, 2" HOSE, ATLAS DVA 3 PA CAB 0 EA N/A792 0127 000 NON-DIR COUPLER, 3-1/8" UHF, 1-PORT 1 EA N/A792 0128 000 NON-DIR COUPLER, 1-5/8" UHF, 1-PORT 1 EA N/A917 2515 410 LABEL, 208/240V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 411 LABEL, 380/415V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 438 LABEL, 208/240V DIGITAL 1700W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 439 LABEL, 380/400V DIGITAL 1700W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 440 LABEL, 208/240V DIGITAL 3400W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 441 LABEL, 380/400V DIGITAL 3400W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2558 012 ATLAS, ECDI INSTALL KIT 1 EA917 2575 029 CONDUCTOR, INNER 1 EA N/A943 5275 985 KIT, PREAMP, ATLAS DUAL SYSTEMS 3 EA N/A943 5275 986 KIT, 3 WAY SPLITTER 1 EA N/A943 5547 288 PANEL, FRONT 1 EA943 5575 535 PANEL, SIDE 4 EA N/A943 5575 538 HOOK, PANEL 8 EA N/A943 5575 753 BRACKET, REAR CABINET JOINING 12 EA N/A943 5575 754 BRACKET, FRONT, CABINET JOINING 12 EA N/A961 1123 000 ATLAS DIGITAL PH3 FIRMWARE; BOTH DUAL/SINGLE ENDED XMTRS 0 EA N/A971 0022 013 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 014 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 015 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 016 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 056 KIT, DUAL EXCITER, ATLAS DIGITAL 0 EA971 0062 004 KIT, 4 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER 1 EA N/A971 0062 008 KIT, 8 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER 2 EA N/A971 0064 001 KIT, CONTROL/PA CAB. SINGLE DIGITAL ATLAS XMTR 1 EA N/A971 0066 001 BASIC CONTROL/PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS 1 EA N/A971 0067 001 BASIC ADDITIONAL PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS 2 EA N/A971 0068 001 KIT, SYSTEM INTERCONNECT CABLE 3 CAB ATLAS DVI XMTR 1 EA981 0202 001 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 002 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 003 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 004 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A988 2004 025 DP, ATLAS SINGLE ISDB-T 3 PA DIGITAL XMTR 2 EA N/A988 2517 001 DP ECDI 2 EA988 2686 001 DP, APEX ISDB-TB 2 EA N/A990 2436 001 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 002 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 003 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 004 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 005 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 006 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 007 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 008 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A992 9138 042 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, 3 PA CAB, ATLAS DVI7.5K/9K 0 EA N/A992 9139 071 KIT, INSTALL MATERIAL 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB ATLAS TRANSMITTER 0 EA992 9991 549 NEPTUNE DIGITAL 5 VICOR MODULE 20 EA992 9995 035 *PWA, UHF EXTERNAL I/O 0 EA994 9912 003 EXCITER, APEX ISDB-T 0 EA995 0062 200 FORMAT, TANK BASE DUAL PUMP, CRK16 0 EA N/A



MYA301-138-3-2DPATCH PNL 3-1/8 3PORT 2 DPDT 0 EA992 7259 001 BASIC, ECDI 1 EA

Table 7-23 KIT, 4 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER - 971 0062 004 (B)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref250 0595 000 CABLE, FFC, 24C 2ROW 4 EA250 0645 000 PLUG, 600VAC 3-WIRE 12AWG W/GND 4 EA N/A296 0264 000 TUBING, SHRINK 1/2 WHITE 6.2 FT359 1269 000 HOSE, 3/8’’ ID, BLUE 0.5 ME606 1137 200 CKT BRKR 20 AMPS 3P 480VAC 4 EA N/A610 1362 000 HEADER, 12C 2 ROW STRAIGHT 8 EA612 1554 000 HSG, SIZE 8 CAVITY, PIN SIDE 4 EA620 0276 000 ADAPTER 1-5/8 IN. 1 EA N/A620 0662 000 COUPLING, SLEEVE, 1-5/8 4 EA620 1910 000 ELBOW 45 DEG 1-5/8" 2 EA620 3269 000 DIR COUPLER, 1-5/8", UHF 1 EA700 1422 019 LOAD, 50 OHM, 1/2W 4 EA843 5575 131 WAVECRIMP ASSY DWG 0 DWG917 2550 186 CABLE COAX, PA TO BACKPLANE 4 EA922 1325 009 SCREW, SHOULDER 8 EA922 1325 016 ALIGNMENT PIN 8 EA922 1345 005 LATCH, PA MODULE 4 EA943 5547 277 FACEPLATE, BLANK PA MODULE 4 EA943 5575 075 PLATE, C.B. BLANK 4 EA943 5575 196 SUPPORT, FRONT PANEL - BLANK 4 EA943 5575 197 BRACE, FRONT PANEL - BLANK 4 EA943 5575 454 PLUG, HOSE BARB 8 EA N/A943 5575 455 HOSE ASSY, SUPPLY 8 EA N/A943 5575 649 PLATE, AC CONN 4 EA N/A943 5575 666 GASKET, AC CONN 4 EA N/A943 5575 667 COVER, AC CONN 4 EA N/A943 5575 723 ANGLE, COMBINER SUPPORT, 8-WAY 1 EA N/A943 5575 745 COVER, PLATE, 1.625" DIA. 2 EA N/A943 5575 746 TUBE, RF, CUT TO LENGTH, 1-5/8 DIA. 1 EA N/A943 5575 747 TUBE, RF, CUT TO LENGTH, 1-5/8 DIA. 1 EA N/A943 5575 813 FILLER, 2WAY & 4WAY COMBINER 1 EA N/A943 5575 899 PLUG, HOSE BARB, FLANGED, 1/2" HOSE 2 EA N/A971 0022 080 COMBINER, 4-WAY 1 EA N/A971 0053 306 ASSY, BUSBAR 3P 2-BRKR (6TAP) 2 EA N/A

Table 7-24 FORMAT, DVI 6800 - 994 9939 003 (C)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref484 0820 000 FILTER, UHF ISDTV, (REFLECTIVE) 0 EA N/A620 0573 000 CONN, ANCHOR INS 1-5/8 1 EA646 0665 000 LABEL, INSPECTION 1 EA700 0672 000 LOAD, RF, 20KW, BIRD 8745 0 EA700 1422 055 RES, 5KW LOAD, 8726 1 EA704 0007 000 PATCH PANEL, 3-1/8" 4 PORT DPDT 0 EA N/A706 0002 000 HYBRID, 3DB 20KW UHF TV 1 EA708 0030 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT350M, 3 FAN, 380V/ 50HZ 0 EA708 0035 000 HEAT EXCHANGER DNT225-26 0 EA N/A774 0156 042 TYPICAL KIT, PLUMBING, 2" HOSE, DVA20, TWO PA CABINET 0 EA N/A792 0128 000 NON-DIR COUPLER, 1-5/8" UHF, 1-PORT 1 EA N/A917 2515 410 LABEL, 208/240V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 411 LABEL, 380/415V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 440 LABEL, 208/240V DIGITAL 3400W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 441 LABEL, 380/400V DIGITAL 3400W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2558 012 ATLAS, ECDI INSTALL KIT 1 EA



917 2575 029 CONDUCTOR, INNER 1 EA N/A943 5547 288 PANEL, FRONT 1 EA943 5575 535 PANEL, SIDE 4 EA N/A943 5575 538 HOOK, PANEL 8 EA N/A943 5575 753 BRACKET, REAR CABINET JOINING 12 EA N/A943 5575 754 BRACKET, FRONT, CABINET JOINING 12 EA N/A961 1123 000 ATLAS DIGITAL PH3 FIRMWARE; BOTH DUAL/SINGLE ENDED XMTRS 0 EA N/A971 0022 013 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 014 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 015 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 016 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 056 KIT, DUAL EXCITER, ATLAS DIGITAL 0 EA971 0062 008 KIT, 8 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER 2 EA N/A971 0064 001 KIT, CONTROL/PA CAB. SINGLE DIGITAL ATLAS XMTR 1 EA N/A971 0066 001 BASIC CONTROL/PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS 1 EA N/A971 0067 001 BASIC ADDITIONAL PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS 1 EA N/A971 0069 001 KIT, SYSTEM INTERCONNECT CABLE 2 CAB ATLAS DVI XMTR 1 EA981 0202 001 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 002 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 003 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 004 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A988 2004 024 DP, ATLAS SINGLE ISDB-T 2 PA DIGITAL XMTR 2 EA N/A988 2517 001 DP ECDI 2 EA988 2686 001 DP, APEX ISDB-TB 2 EA N/A990 2436 001 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 002 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 003 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 004 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 005 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 006 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 007 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 008 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A992 9138 041 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, 2 PA CAB, ATLAS DVI 5K/6.8K 0 EA992 9139 071 KIT, INSTALL MATERIAL 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB ATLAS TRANSMITTER 0 EA992 9991 034 KIT, 2 WAY SPLITTER 1 EA992 9991 549 NEPTUNE DIGITAL 5 VICOR MODULE 16 EA992 9995 035 *PWA, UHF EXTERNAL I/O 0 EA994 9912 003 EXCITER, APEX ISDB-T 0 EA995 0062 100 FORMAT, TANK BASE DUAL PUMP CRK8 0 EA N/AMYA301-138-3-2DPATCH PNL 3-1/8 3PORT 2 DPDT 0 EA992 7259 001 BASIC, ECDI 1 EA

Table 7-25 TYPICAL KIT, PLUMBING, 2" HOSE, DVA20, TWO PA CABINET - 774 0156 042 (B)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref063 1030 021 * PIPE SEALANT "PST" LOCTITE 565 1 EA063 1030 022 PASTE, PIPE THREAD TEFLON 1 EA299 0018 000 THREAD-TAPE, TEFLON 1.00’’W 1 RL843 5585 160 LAYOUT, LIQUID COOLING SYSTEM, ATLAS DVA20, PHASE 3 0 DWG943 5585 212 ASSY, MANIFOLD 2 EA N/A943 5585 217 ASSY, 3/4 BALL VALVE 2 EA N/A943 5585 218 ASSY, 3/4" NIPPLE 2 EA N/A629 0114 000 FLOW MTR, 10GPM/40LPM, 3/4" FNPT 1 EA N/A943 5585 065 ASSY INSTR, BOILER DRAIN, SUPPLY/RETURN 4 EA N/A943 5585 215 ASSY, BALL VALVE 1" 2 EA N/A943 5585 214 ASSY, GLOBE VALVE 1" 2 EA N/A943 5585 216 ASSY, 3/4 GLOBE VALVE 2 EA N/A943 5585 221 ASSY, FLUSHING BALL VALVE 1 EA N/A359 1167 000 BUSHING, MXF, 2-IN X 3/4-IN 2 EA



358 3026 000 HOSE BARB 3/4 H X 3/4 MPT 6 EA358 3038 000 HOSE BARB 1" H X 1" MPT 4 EA359 1776 000 HOSE BARB, 2" 6 EA N/A359 0997 000 BOILER DRAIN, 1/2" 5 EA359 1560 000 NIPPLE, BRASS, 2" NPT 2 EA N/A943 5585 210 ASSY, HEAT EXCHANGER(RETURN) 2" 1 EA N/A359 1798 000 ADAPTER, 2", P X F 2 EA N/A943 5585 209 ASSY, HEAT EXCHANGER(SUPPLY) 2" 1 EA N/A359 1043 000 BALL VALVE 2 IN FNPT 2 EA646 1253 604 LABEL, WARNING ROTATING BLADES 1 EA359 1775 000 CLAMP, HOSE, 2" HEAVY DUTY 6 EA N/A358 1722 000 HOSE CLAMP, SST, SAE-20 14 EA646 1488 000 LABEL, CAUTION 2 EA359 1794 000 PLUG, PIPE, BRASS 1"NPTM 6 EA N/A629 0115 000 FLOW MTR, 15GPM/55LPM 3/4" FNPT 1 EA N/A359 1550 000 HOSE BARB, 3/4" HID X 1/2" MPT 4 EA N/A021 7510 001 HOSE, RUBBER 3/4" RED 30 FT N/A021 7510 045 HOSE, RUBBER, 2" ID 200 FT N/A

Table 7-26 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, 2 PA CAB, ATLAS DVI 5K/6.8K - 992 9138 041 (A)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref618 0304 000 LINE, XMISSION 3-1/8 3 EA620 0233 000 HARDWARE SET 1-5/8 IN 2 EA620 0498 000 ADAPTOR 3-1/8 FL TO UNFL 6 EA620 0544 000 CONN, ANCHOR INS 3-1/8; 50 OHM 2 EA620 0581 000 COUPLING, SLEEVE, 3-1/8 6 EA620 0908 000 HARDWARE KIT, 3-1/8 3 EA620 1893 000 ELBOW 90 DEG 3-1/8 9 EA620 1903 000 ELBOW 90 DEG 1-5/8 1 EA620 2275 000 ELBOW, EQUAL, 3-1/8, 90 DEG 3 EA843 5585 233 LAYOUT, EQUIPMENT ATLAS DVI 5K/6.8K 0 DWG

Table 7-27 KIT, 2 WAY SPLITTER - 992 9991 034 (D)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref843 5575 100 WIRING DIAGRAM, RFU ANALOG 0 DWG917 2550 558 CABLE KIT, RFU 2-WAY SPLITTER 1 EA992 7301 001 PWA, DCU 3DB HYBRID 1 EA

Table 7-28 FORMAT, TANK BASE DUAL PUMP CRK8 - 995 0062 100 (N)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref432 0562 000 PUMP, IMMERSIBLE, CRK8, MULTISTAGE 0 EA N/A432 0564 000 PUMP, IMMERSIBLE, 50 HZ, 5 STAGE 0 EA N/A570 0379 000 CNTOR, MCS, 11KW 1NO 24VDC 0 EA N/A570 0381 000 CNTOR, MCS, 1NO 5.5KW 24VDC 0 EA582 0081 000 RELAY, OVERLOAD 3.2-16A 2 EA N/A917 2416 652 LABEL, DUAL PUMP, 50 HZ 0 EA N/A943 5514 514 ADAPTER, 2 IN ANSI FLANGE TO 2 MIPT 0 EA N/A992 7150 052 PUMP MODULE PT, TANK BASE 1 EA995 0062 002 KIT, ADAPTER, BSPP PUMP OUTPUT 0 EA N/A995 0062 003 KIT, ADAPTER, NPT PUMP OUTPUT 0 EA N/A

Table 7-29 FORMAT, DVI 5000 - 994 9938 003 (C)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref484 0820 000 FILTER, UHF ISDTV, (REFLECTIVE) 0 EA N/A620 0360 000 TAPER 3-1/8 TO 1-5/8 2 EA620 0573 000 CONN, ANCHOR INS 1-5/8 1 EA646 0665 000 LABEL, INSPECTION 1 EA



700 0672 000 LOAD, RF, 20KW, BIRD 8745 0 EA700 1422 055 RES, 5KW LOAD, 8726 1 EA704 0007 000 PATCH PANEL, 3-1/8" 4 PORT DPDT 0 EA N/A706 0002 000 HYBRID, 3DB 20KW UHF TV 1 EA708 0030 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT350M, 3 FAN, 380V/ 50HZ 0 EA708 0035 000 HEAT EXCHANGER DNT225-26 0 EA N/A774 0156 042 TYPICAL KIT, PLUMBING, 2" HOSE, DVA20, TWO PA CABINET 0 EA N/A792 0128 000 NON-DIR COUPLER, 1-5/8" UHF, 1-PORT 1 EA N/A917 2515 410 LABEL, 208/240V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 411 LABEL, 380/415V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 442 LABEL, 208/240V DIGITAL 2500W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 443 LABEL, 380/400V DIGITAL 2500W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2558 012 ATLAS, ECDI INSTALL KIT 1 EA917 2575 029 CONDUCTOR, INNER 1 EA N/A943 5547 288 PANEL, FRONT 1 EA943 5575 535 PANEL, SIDE 4 EA N/A943 5575 538 HOOK, PANEL 8 EA N/A943 5575 753 BRACKET, REAR CABINET JOINING 12 EA N/A943 5575 754 BRACKET, FRONT, CABINET JOINING 12 EA N/A961 1123 000 ATLAS DIGITAL PH3 FIRMWARE; BOTH DUAL/SINGLE ENDED XMTRS 0 EA N/A971 0022 013 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 014 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 015 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 016 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 056 KIT, DUAL EXCITER, ATLAS DIGITAL 0 EA971 0062 006 KIT, 6 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER 2 EA N/A971 0064 001 KIT, CONTROL/PA CAB. SINGLE DIGITAL ATLAS XMTR 1 EA N/A971 0066 001 BASIC CONTROL/PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS 1 EA N/A971 0067 001 BASIC ADDITIONAL PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS 1 EA N/A971 0069 001 KIT, SYSTEM INTERCONNECT CABLE 2 CAB ATLAS DVI XMTR 1 EA981 0202 001 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 002 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 003 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 004 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A988 2004 024 DP, ATLAS SINGLE ISDB-T 2 PA DIGITAL XMTR 2 EA N/A988 2517 001 DP ECDI 2 EA988 2686 001 DP, APEX ISDB-TB 2 EA N/A990 2436 001 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 002 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 003 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 004 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 005 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 006 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 007 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 008 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A992 9138 041 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, 2 PA CAB, ATLAS DVI 5K/6.8K 0 EA992 9139 071 KIT, INSTALL MATERIAL 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB ATLAS TRANSMITTER 0 EA992 9991 034 KIT, 2 WAY SPLITTER 1 EA992 9991 549 NEPTUNE DIGITAL 5 VICOR MODULE 12 EA992 9995 035 *PWA, UHF EXTERNAL I/O 0 EA994 9912 003 EXCITER, APEX ISDB-T 0 EA995 0062 100 FORMAT, TANK BASE DUAL PUMP CRK8 0 EA N/AMYA301-138-3-2DPATCH PNL 3-1/8 3PORT 2 DPDT 0 EA992 7259 001 BASIC, ECDI 1 EA



Table 7-30 KIT, 6 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER - 971 0062 006 (B)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref250 0595 000 CABLE, FFC, 24C 2ROW 6 EA250 0645 000 PLUG, 600VAC 3-WIRE 12AWG W/GND 6 EA N/A296 0264 000 TUBING, SHRINK 1/2 WHITE 9 FT359 1269 000 HOSE, 3/8’’ ID, BLUE 0.91 ME606 1137 200 CKT BRKR 20 AMPS 3P 480VAC 6 EA N/A610 1362 000 HEADER, 12C 2 ROW STRAIGHT 12 EA612 1554 000 HSG, SIZE 8 CAVITY, PIN SIDE 6 EA620 0276 000 ADAPTER 1-5/8 IN. 1 EA N/A620 0662 000 COUPLING, SLEEVE, 1-5/8 3 EA620 1910 000 ELBOW 45 DEG 1-5/8" 2 EA620 3269 000 DIR COUPLER, 1-5/8", UHF 1 EA700 1422 019 LOAD, 50 OHM, 1/2W 2 EA843 5575 131 WAVECRIMP ASSY DWG 0 DWG917 2550 186 CABLE COAX, PA TO BACKPLANE 6 EA922 1325 009 SCREW, SHOULDER 12 EA922 1325 016 ALIGNMENT PIN 12 EA922 1345 005 LATCH, PA MODULE 2 EA943 5547 277 FACEPLATE, BLANK PA MODULE 2 EA943 5575 075 PLATE, C.B. BLANK 2 EA943 5575 196 SUPPORT, FRONT PANEL - BLANK 2 EA943 5575 197 BRACE, FRONT PANEL - BLANK 2 EA943 5575 454 PLUG, HOSE BARB 6 EA N/A943 5575 455 HOSE ASSY, SUPPLY 12 EA N/A943 5575 490 INSULATOR, OUTPUT ADAPTER 1 EA N/A943 5575 638 OUTPUT ADAPTER, 1-5/8 1 EA N/A943 5575 649 PLATE, AC CONN 6 EA N/A943 5575 666 GASKET, AC CONN 6 EA N/A943 5575 667 COVER, AC CONN 2 EA N/A943 5575 745 COVER, PLATE, 1.625" DIA. 2 EA N/A943 5575 756 TUBE, RF, CUT TO LENGTH, 1-5/8 DIA. 1 EA N/A943 5575 860 GUIDE, COMBINER MTG, 6-WAY 1 EA N/A943 5575 861 BRACKET, COMBINER MTG, 6-WAY 1 EA N/A943 5575 862 FILLER, 6-WAY COMBINER 1 EA N/A943 5575 899 PLUG, HOSE BARB, FLANGED, 1/2" HOSE 2 EA N/A943 5575 980 INNER CONDUCTOR, 1-5/8 2 & 4 WAY COMBINERS 1 EA N/A943 5577 055 ADAPTER, HOSE BARB, 1/2" HID TO 3/8" 2 EA N/A971 0053 309 ASSY, BUSBAR 3P 3-BRKR (9TAP) 2 EA N/A977-491-001 COMBINER 6 WAY COM 640L-2500D/6 1 EA N/A

Table 7-31 FORMAT, DVI 3400 - 994 9937 003 (C)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref484 0820 000 FILTER, UHF ISDTV, (REFLECTIVE) 0 EA N/A700 1422 041 RF LOAD, 10KW, WATER COOLED 0 EA704 0007 000 PATCH PANEL, 3-1/8" 4 PORT DPDT 0 EA N/A708 0027 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT139Y, 2 FAN, 208-240V /60HZ 0 EA N/A708 0028 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT174M, 2 FAN, 380V/50HZ 0 EA N/A774 0156 040 KIT, PLUMBING, ATLAS DVA PHASE 3, 1 CABINET 0 EA N/A917 2515 410 LABEL, 208/240V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 411 LABEL, 380/415V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 440 LABEL, 208/240V DIGITAL 3400W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 441 LABEL, 380/400V DIGITAL 3400W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2558 012 ATLAS, ECDI INSTALL KIT 1 EA943 5547 288 PANEL, FRONT 1 EA943 5575 535 PANEL, SIDE 4 EA N/A943 5575 538 HOOK, PANEL 8 EA N/A



961 1123 000 ATLAS DIGITAL PH3 FIRMWARE; BOTH DUAL/SINGLE ENDED XMTRS 0 EA N/A971 0022 013 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 014 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 015 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 016 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 056 KIT, DUAL EXCITER, ATLAS DIGITAL 0 EA971 0062 008 KIT, 8 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER 1 EA N/A971 0064 001 KIT, CONTROL/PA CAB. SINGLE DIGITAL ATLAS XMTR 1 EA N/A971 0066 001 BASIC CONTROL/PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS 1 EA N/A981 0202 001 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 002 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 003 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 004 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A988 2004 018 DP, ATLAS SINGLE ISDB-T DIGITAL TRANSMITTER 2 EA N/A988 2517 001 DP ECDI 2 EA988 2686 001 DP, APEX ISDB-TB 2 EA N/A990 2436 001 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 002 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 003 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 004 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 005 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 006 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 007 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 008 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A992 9138 040 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB, ATLAS DVI 1.7K/2.5K/3.4K 0 EA992 9139 071 KIT, INSTALL MATERIAL 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB ATLAS TRANSMITTER 0 EA992 9511 680 KIT, SYSTEM INTERCONNECT 1 EA992 9991 549 NEPTUNE DIGITAL 5 VICOR MODULE 8 EA992 9995 035 *PWA, UHF EXTERNAL I/O 0 EA994 9912 003 EXCITER, APEX ISDB-T 0 EA995 0062 100 FORMAT, TANK BASE DUAL PUMP CRK8 0 EA N/AMYA301-138-3-2DPATCH PNL 3-1/8 3PORT 2 DPDT 0 EA992 7259 001 BASIC, ECDI 1 EA

Table 7-32 KIT, PLUMBING, ATLAS DVA PHASE 3, 1 CAB - 774 0156 040 (C)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref021 7510 001 HOSE, RUBBER 3/4" RED 20 FT N/A021 7510 003 HOSE, RUBBER, 1-1/2" ID 150 FT N/A021 7510 025 HOSE, GEN PURPOSE, EPDM, 1"ID, RED 10 FT N/A063 1030 021 * PIPE SEALANT "PST" LOCTITE 565 1 EA063 1030 022 PASTE, PIPE THREAD TEFLON 1 EA299 0018 000 THREAD-TAPE, TEFLON 1.00’’W 1 RL359 1794 000 PLUG, PIPE, BRASS 1"NPTM 2 EA N/A843 5585 146 LAYOUT, LIQUID COOLING SYSTEM, ATLAS, DVA PHASE 3 SINGLE PA 0 DWG943 5585 064 ASSY INSTR, MANIFOLD, ATLAS MOBILE (SUPPLY/RETURN) 2 EA N/A943 5585 217 ASSY, 3/4 BALL VALVE 1 EA N/A943 5585 218 ASSY, 3/4" NIPPLE 1 EA N/A629 0114 000 FLOW MTR, 10GPM/40LPM, 3/4" FNPT 1 EA N/A943 5585 065 ASSY INSTR, BOILER DRAIN, SUPPLY/RETURN 2 EA N/A943 5585 215 ASSY, BALL VALVE 1" 1 EA N/A943 5585 214 ASSY, GLOBE VALVE 1" 1 EA N/A943 5585 216 ASSY, 3/4 GLOBE VALVE 1 EA N/A943 5585 221 ASSY, FLUSHING BALL VALVE 1 EA N/A359 1795 000 BUSHING, MXF, 1-1/2-IN X 3/4-IN 2 EA N/A358 3026 000 HOSE BARB 3/4 H X 3/4 MPT 4 EA358 3038 000 HOSE BARB 1" H X 1" MPT 2 EA359 1573 000 HOSE BARB, 1-1/2" 6 EA N/A359 0997 000 BOILER DRAIN, 1/2" 2 EA



359 1596 000 NIPPLE, 1.5’’ X 2’’LG 2 EA N/A943 5585 229 ASSY, HEAT EXCHANGER, (RETURN), 2" FPT CONNECTION 1 EA N/A943 5585 228 ASSY, HEAT EXCHANGER, (SUPPLY), 2" FPT CONNECTION 1 EA N/A359 1550 000 HOSE BARB, 3/4" HID X 1/2" MPT 2 EA N/A359 1597 000 ADAPTER, 1.5’’ FPT TO 2’’ MPT 2 EA N/A646 1253 604 LABEL, WARNING ROTATING BLADES 1 EA359 1735 000 CLAMP, HOSE, 1-1/2" HEAVY DUTY 6 EA N/A358 1722 000 HOSE CLAMP, SST, SAE-20 10 EA359 1592 000 VALVE, BALL, 1.5’’ FPT 2 EA N/A

Table 7-33 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, SINGLE PA, ATLAS DVI 1.7K/2.5K/3.4K - 992 9138 040 (B)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref618 0304 000 LINE, XMISSION 3-1/8 2 EA620 0498 000 ADAPTOR 3-1/8 FL TO UNFL 10 EA620 0544 000 CONN, ANCHOR INS 3-1/8; 50 OHM 4 EA620 0581 000 COUPLING, SLEEVE, 3-1/8 2 EA620 1893 000 ELBOW 90 DEG 3-1/8 4 EA843 5585 175 LAYOUT, RF EQUIPMENT ATLAS DIGITAL SINGLE CABINET XMTR 0 DWG

Table 7-34 FORMAT, DVI 2500 - 994 9936 003 (C)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref484 0820 000 FILTER, UHF ISDTV, (REFLECTIVE) 0 EA N/A620 0360 000 TAPER 3-1/8 TO 1-5/8 1 EA700 1422 041 RF LOAD, 10KW, WATER COOLED 0 EA704 0007 000 PATCH PANEL, 3-1/8" 4 PORT DPDT 0 EA N/A708 0027 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT139Y, 2 FAN, 208-240V /60HZ 0 EA N/A708 0028 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT174M, 2 FAN, 380V/50HZ 0 EA N/A774 0156 040 KIT, PLUMBING, ATLAS DVA PHASE 3, 1 CABINET 0 EA N/A917 2515 410 LABEL, 208/240V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 411 LABEL, 380/415V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 442 LABEL, 208/240V DIGITAL 2500W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 443 LABEL, 380/400V DIGITAL 2500W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2558 012 ATLAS, ECDI INSTALL KIT 1 EA943 5547 288 PANEL, FRONT 1 EA943 5575 535 PANEL, SIDE 4 EA N/A943 5575 538 HOOK, PANEL 8 EA N/A961 1123 000 ATLAS DIGITAL PH3 FIRMWARE; BOTH DUAL/SINGLE ENDED XMTRS 0 EA N/A971 0022 013 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 014 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 015 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 016 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 056 KIT, DUAL EXCITER, ATLAS DIGITAL 0 EA971 0062 006 KIT, 6 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER 1 EA N/A971 0064 001 KIT, CONTROL/PA CAB. SINGLE DIGITAL ATLAS XMTR 1 EA N/A971 0066 001 BASIC CONTROL/PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS 1 EA N/A981 0202 001 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 002 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 003 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 004 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A988 2004 018 DP, ATLAS SINGLE ISDB-T DIGITAL TRANSMITTER 2 EA N/A988 2517 001 DP ECDI 2 EA988 2686 001 DP, APEX ISDB-TB 2 EA N/A990 2436 001 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 002 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 003 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 004 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 005 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 006 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A



990 2436 007 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 008 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A992 9138 040 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB, ATLAS DVI 1.7K/2.5K/3.4K 0 EA992 9139 071 KIT, INSTALL MATERIAL 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB ATLAS TRANSMITTER 0 EA992 9511 680 KIT, SYSTEM INTERCONNECT 1 EA992 9991 549 NEPTUNE DIGITAL 5 VICOR MODULE 6 EA992 9995 035 *PWA, UHF EXTERNAL I/O 0 EA994 9912 003 EXCITER, APEX ISDB-T 0 EA995 0062 100 FORMAT, TANK BASE DUAL PUMP CRK8 0 EA N/AMYA301-138-3-2DPATCH PNL 3-1/8 3PORT 2 DPDT 0 EA992 7259 001 BASIC, ECDI 1 EA

Table 7-35 FORMAT, DVI 1700 - 994 9935 003 (C)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref484 0820 000 FILTER, UHF ISDTV, (REFLECTIVE) 0 EA N/A620 0360 000 TAPER 3-1/8 TO 1-5/8 1 EA700 1422 041 RF LOAD, 10KW, WATER COOLED 0 EA704 0007 000 PATCH PANEL, 3-1/8" 4 PORT DPDT 0 EA N/A708 0027 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT139Y, 2 FAN, 208-240V /60HZ 0 EA N/A708 0028 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT174M, 2 FAN, 380V/50HZ 0 EA N/A774 0156 040 KIT, PLUMBING, ATLAS DVA PHASE 3, 1 CABINET 0 EA N/A917 2515 410 LABEL, 208/240V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 411 LABEL, 380/415V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 438 LABEL, 208/240V DIGITAL 1700W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 439 LABEL, 380/400V DIGITAL 1700W AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2558 012 ATLAS, ECDI INSTALL KIT 1 EA943 5547 288 PANEL, FRONT 1 EA943 5575 535 PANEL, SIDE 4 EA N/A943 5575 538 HOOK, PANEL 8 EA N/A961 1123 000 ATLAS DIGITAL PH3 FIRMWARE; BOTH DUAL/SINGLE ENDED XMTRS 0 EA N/A971 0022 013 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 014 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 015 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 016 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 056 KIT, DUAL EXCITER, ATLAS DIGITAL 0 EA971 0062 004 KIT, 4 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER 1 EA N/A971 0064 001 KIT, CONTROL/PA CAB. SINGLE DIGITAL ATLAS XMTR 1 EA N/A971 0066 001 BASIC CONTROL/PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS 1 EA N/A981 0202 001 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 002 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 003 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 004 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A988 2004 018 DP, ATLAS SINGLE ISDB-T DIGITAL TRANSMITTER 2 EA N/A988 2517 001 DP ECDI 2 EA988 2686 001 DP, APEX ISDB-TB 2 EA N/A990 2436 001 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 002 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 003 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 004 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 005 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 006 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 007 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 008 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A992 9138 040 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB, ATLAS DVI 1.7K/2.5K/3.4K 0 EA992 9139 071 KIT, INSTALL MATERIAL 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB ATLAS TRANSMITTER 0 EA992 9511 680 KIT, SYSTEM INTERCONNECT 1 EA992 9991 549 NEPTUNE DIGITAL 5 VICOR MODULE 4 EA992 9995 035 *PWA, UHF EXTERNAL I/O 0 EA



994 9912 003 EXCITER, APEX ISDB-T 0 EA995 0062 100 FORMAT, TANK BASE DUAL PUMP CRK8 0 EA N/AMYA301-138-3-2DPATCH PNL 3-1/8 3PORT 2 DPDT 0 EA992 7259 001 BASIC, ECDI 1 EA

Table 7-36 FORMAT, DVI 850 - 994 9934 003 (C)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref484 0820 000 FILTER, UHF ISDTV, (REFLECTIVE) 0 EA N/A620 0360 000 TAPER 3-1/8 TO 1-5/8 1 EA700 0797 000 RES, 5KW LOAD, 8926 0 EA704 0007 000 PATCH PANEL, 3-1/8" 4 PORT DPDT 0 EA N/A708 0027 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT139Y, 2 FAN, 208-240V /60HZ 0 EA N/A708 0028 000 HEAT EXCH, DNT174M, 2 FAN, 380V/50HZ 0 EA N/A774 0156 040 KIT, PLUMBING, ATLAS DVA PHASE 3, 1 CABINET 0 EA N/A917 2515 410 LABEL, 208/240V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2515 411 LABEL, 380/415V 2.5-10KW AC MAINS INPUT 0 EA917 2558 012 ATLAS, ECDI INSTALL KIT 1 EA943 5547 288 PANEL, FRONT 1 EA943 5575 535 PANEL, SIDE 4 EA N/A943 5575 538 HOOK, PANEL 8 EA N/A961 1123 000 ATLAS DIGITAL PH3 FIRMWARE; BOTH DUAL/SINGLE ENDED XMTRS 0 EA N/A971 0022 013 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 014 POWER SUPPLY, 208-240VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 015 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (DELTA) 0 EA971 0022 016 POWER SUPPLY, 380-415VAC, (WYE) 0 EA971 0022 056 KIT, DUAL EXCITER, ATLAS DIGITAL 0 EA971 0062 002 KIT, 2 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER 1 EA N/A971 0064 001 KIT, CONTROL/PA CAB. SINGLE DIGITAL ATLAS XMTR 1 EA N/A971 0066 001 BASIC CONTROL/PA CABINET, DIGITAL ATLAS 1 EA N/A981 0202 001 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 002 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 003 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A981 0202 004 FILTER, LOW PASS DTV IN-SYSTEM 0 EA N/A988 2004 018 DP, ATLAS SINGLE ISDB-T DIGITAL TRANSMITTER 2 EA N/A988 2517 001 DP ECDI 2 EA988 2686 001 DP, APEX ISDB-TB 2 EA N/A990 2436 001 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 002 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 003 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 004 SPK, BASIC; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 005 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 006 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 208V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 007 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V DELTA MAINS 0 EA N/A990 2436 008 SPK, EXTENDED; ATLAS DIGITAL FOR 380V WYE MAINS 0 EA N/A992 9138 040 KIT, RF LINE, 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB, ATLAS DVI 1.7K/2.5K/3.4K 0 EA992 9139 071 KIT, INSTALL MATERIAL 10FT, SINGLE PA CAB ATLAS TRANSMITTER 0 EA992 9511 680 KIT, SYSTEM INTERCONNECT 1 EA992 9991 549 NEPTUNE DIGITAL 5 VICOR MODULE 2 EA992 9995 035 *PWA, UHF EXTERNAL I/O 0 EA994 9912 003 EXCITER, APEX ISDB-T 0 EA995 0062 100 FORMAT, TANK BASE DUAL PUMP CRK8 0 EA N/AMYA301-138-3-2DPATCH PNL 3-1/8 3PORT 2 DPDT 0 EA992 7259 001 BASIC, ECDI 1 EA



Table 7-37 KIT, 2 WAY DIGITAL COMBINER - 971 0062 002 (A)Harris PN Description Qty UM Ref250 0595 000 CABLE, FFC, 24C 2ROW 2 EA250 0645 000 PLUG, 600VAC 3-WIRE 12AWG W/GND 2 EA N/A296 0264 000 TUBING, SHRINK 1/2 WHITE 3.2 FT359 1269 000 HOSE, 3/8’’ ID, BLUE .75 ME606 1137 200 CKT BRKR 20 AMPS 3P 480VAC 2 EA N/A610 1362 000 HEADER, 12C 2 ROW STRAIGHT 4 EA612 1554 000 HSG, SIZE 8 CAVITY, PIN SIDE 2 EA620 0276 000 ADAPTER 1-5/8 IN. 1 EA N/A620 0662 000 COUPLING, SLEEVE, 1-5/8 4 EA620 1910 000 ELBOW 45 DEG 1-5/8" 2 EA620 3269 000 DIR COUPLER, 1-5/8", UHF 1 EA700 1422 019 LOAD, 50 OHM, 1/2W 6 EA843 5575 131 WAVECRIMP ASSY DWG 0 DWG917 2550 186 CABLE COAX, PA TO BACKPLANE 2 EA922 1325 009 SCREW, SHOULDER 4 EA922 1325 016 ALIGNMENT PIN 4 EA922 1345 005 LATCH, PA MODULE 6 EA943 5547 277 FACEPLATE, BLANK PA MODULE 6 EA943 5575 075 PLATE, C.B. BLANK 6 EA943 5575 196 SUPPORT, FRONT PANEL - BLANK 6 EA943 5575 197 BRACE, FRONT PANEL - BLANK 6 EA943 5575 454 PLUG, HOSE BARB 12 EA N/A943 5575 455 HOSE ASSY, SUPPLY 4 EA N/A943 5575 649 PLATE, AC CONN 2 EA N/A943 5575 666 GASKET, AC CONN 2 EA N/A943 5575 667 COVER, AC CONN 6 EA N/A943 5575 745 COVER, PLATE, 1.625" DIA. 2 EA N/A943 5575 746 TUBE, RF, CUT TO LENGTH, 1-5/8 DIA. 1 EA N/A943 5575 747 TUBE, RF, CUT TO LENGTH, 1-5/8 DIA. 1 EA N/A943 5575 813 FILLER, 2WAY & 4WAY COMBINER 1 EA N/A943 5575 899 PLUG, HOSE BARB, FLANGED, 1/2" HOSE 2 EA N/A971 0022 120 COMBINER, 2-WAY 1 EA N/A


ATLAS ISDB-T

Appendix-aCutting & Soldering Transmission Line


a
a.1 Suggested Cutting And Soldering Procedure
The purpose for this procedure is to provide guidelines for field cutting and soldering of RF transmission line used to interconnect the transmitter to the RF system.

Try to cut and flange the longest pieces first. Complete one run at a time in order to avoid accumulated errors. (i.e.: Cut, solder, and hang line from antenna port of Bandpass filter to patch panel. Then cut, solder, and hang line from the Amplifier output to the input port of the Bandpass filter.)

Listed in Table 0-1 are some tools and materials that have proven effective for RF Feed Line Construction.

Table 0-1 Tools and Materials Needed For RF Feed Line Construction

Welding Torch Set Hacksaw and Extra Blades

Oxygen and Acetylene Tanks Plumb Bob

Welder’s Mask or Goggles Chalk Line

Power Band Saw (can be rented) and Extra Blades Wrenches

Silver Solder 1/16 inch diameter, 30%-45%, Hard Stay-Silv #45, Aladdin #45, HARRIS part number 086 0004 060

Crowbar

Paste flux (Engelhard Ultra-Flux 1 lb jar) HARRIS part number 099 0002 241 Rope

Stay Clean Flux, 16oz bottle (HARRIS part number 086 0004 040) Saw Horses or Cutting Table

Muriatic Acid (quart) Come-along or Chain-Fall Hoist

Baking Soda (two 1-pound boxes) Ladders

Three plastic 5-gallon buckets or containers with open tops Garden Hose

a-1 to servicing.

Appendix-a Cutting & Soldering ATLAS ISDB-T

a.2 Line Cutback and Flange Soldering Procedure

1. Determine the flange-face to flange-face length of the transmission line run needed. If the run includes an elbow, see Figure 0-1 to determine the elbow length.

2. Subtract twice the cutback dimension of the flange. This dimension varies with flange manufacturer. See Figure 0-2.

3. Using one of the suggested methods for cutting the line given in Section a.3, cut the outer conductor to the length just calculated.

4. If holes in the outer conductor are needed for directional couplers, tuning paddles, etc. they should be added now with the holes properly deburred.

5. Using the suggested techniques for installing the flanges given in Section a.4, solder a flange to each end of the outer conductor.

6. Measure the flange-face to flange-face dimension after soldering to confirm the prop-er length and to determine the initial length of the inner conductor.

7. Determine the length of the inner conductor by using the flange-face to flange-face dimension of the outer conductor and subtracting the dimension of the anchor connec-tor (bullet) shown in Figure 0-3. This dimension determines the proper cutback of the inner conductor for both ends of the line at the same time. do not double this dimen-sion when subtracting from the outer conductor length.

8. Cut the inner conductor and debur the cut edges.

9. Ensure the inside of the outer conductor is clean; then insert the inner conductor. The line is ready to install.

Scotch Brite 25-Ft Tape Measure

Steel Wool Files

Emery Cloth (roll type like plumber uses) Rubber Hammer

Carpenters Square Claw Hammer

Level Gloves

Hole Saw, 1-7/8 inches, for installing directional couplers Safety Glasses

NOTE: All-thread rod, hangers, angle iron or channel will be needed to support transmission line, dummy load, etc.

Table 0-1 Tools and Materials Needed For RF Feed Line Construction

a-2 888-2684-001 2/24/09 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


Figure 0-1 Measurements When Elbows Are Used

Figure 0-2 Outer Conductor Measurements

See Section Below

Cut LengthOuter Conductor

Flange to Flange Length

Flange

Silver Solder Ring(some suppliers maynot provide this grove) Outer Conductor

Cut Back For Each Flange

Groove ForO-ring

Mating Surface

Teflon Portionof Bullet

Note: The cutback will vary for differenttransmission line manufacturers.

2/24/09 888-2684-001 a-3 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


Figure 0-3 Measurement for Cutback of Inner Conductor

a.3 Cutting The Transmission Line

A square smooth cut is required. Several methods, listed below, may be used with the choice depending on tools and labor available.

1. Method 1. A hand hack saw and cast iron cutting guide are a good combination for making a cut with a minimum of tools for one or two pieces, but can be very labor in-tensive for putting up an entire system. See Figure 0-4.

2. Method 2. Hand Band Saw. These popular saws can be rented or purchased. See Fig-ure 0-5.

3. Method 3. Swing Arm Band Saw. This is a good way to go if one can be rented or borrowed. Many pipe fitters and electrical contractors own them. If the saw has an au-tomatic feed, cut slowly. It is critical that the support saw horses be made level with the saw. Test cuts should first be made using scrap pipe or a wood 4x4 to verify that the blade is not creeping and the saw is in alignment. See Figure 0-6.

CautionDO NOT OVER TIGHTEN THE VISE USED WITH THESE SAWS. IT WILL BE DIFFICULT TO PUT THE FLANGE ON AN OUT OF ROUND PIPE.

Cutbackfor innerconductor.

The amount of cutback vary for differenttransmission line manufacturers.



4. Method 4. Tubing Cutter. This is generally not recommended. Many cuts end up with crimped ends due to dull cutters or trying to cut too fast. Use with caution. Avoid if possible unless someone is available that has had a lot of experience using a tubing cutter on this type of installation. See Figure 0-7.

5. Method 5. Cut Off Saw. These saws are similar to radial arm saws. It is rare to find one big enough to cut 6-1/8” line. The set up is similar to the swing arm band saw. See Figure 0-6.

Figure 0-4 Guide For Use With Hand Hack Saw



Figure 0-5 Cutting With a Hand Band Saw

Correct Depth Cut Too Deep

Start Cut Stop Cut Turn LineApproximately

45 Degrees

Finish cut on second pass. Keeping the blade fromfalling too far below the surface keeps the cut smooth

On the first pass score the cut. Do not let the blade go below the surface.



Figure 0-6 Swing Arm Band Saw Cutting Tips



Figure 0-7 Use Of Tubing Cutter Results In Crimped Cut (Exaggerated)

a.4 Soldering Flanges

Transmission line flanges that are supplied with the optional transmission line kit are the silver solder type. Although the attachment of this type of flange may require more care and skill than the soft solder type, it has been found that the silver soldered flange provides much greater reliability. The services of a steam fitter or plumber may be helpful if personnel are not available that are experienced with silver soldering.

1.4.1 Soldering Procedure

1. The line should be free of burrs. The outer corner may be beveled slightly to make as-sembly of flange easier. See Figure 0-8.

2. Emery cloth should be used to clean the outside of the line where it will meet the flange. Also clean the inner surface of the flange with emery cloth.

3. Insert the solder ring into the groove on the flange. If solder rings are not included with the flange, they can be made from 0.062-inch diameter silver solder wire (30-45% silver).

4. Apply a thin coat of flux to the line and to the flange.

5. Slide the flange onto the end of the outer conductor.

WarningSKIN BURN HAZARD. TEMPERATURE OF THE HEATED LINE IN THE FOLLOWING STEPS IS QUITE HIGH AND PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN TO AVOID CONTACT WITH EXPOSED SKIN.

6. Stand the line on end (vertical) for soldering (flange to be soldered pointing down). Ensure that the flange remains square with the outer conductor.

7. Using a #3 or #4 torch tip, heat the entire circumference of the line and flange. Keep the torch moving and heat 2 or 3 inches of the line/flange at a time. Aim the torch at the copper just above the crack between the flange and the line. This will minimize the need for fill solder. If the brass flange is heated more than the copper line, the flange will expand and create an unnecessary gap to fill with solder. Use caution. There is a fine line between melting the solder and melting the brass flange or burning a hole in the copper. The solder will pull up into the joint from the solder ring by cap-illary action. Once it starts to flow, do not stop until the entire circumference of the joint has solder appearing in it. If the solder from the internal solder ring does not “wick up” and become visible at the joint after a few minutes, a small amount of sol-der can be applied to the joint to enhance the heat transfer. See Figure 0-9.



Figure 0-8 Bevel Cut End and Remove Burs

Figure 0-9 Torch Aiming Location

a.5 Cleaning The Soldered Joint

Vigorous scrubbing with a wire brush and steel wool will remove torch black with good results. In addition, cleaning with an acid solution can make this job easier. The procedure is as follows:

WarningMURIATIC ACID USED IN THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE IS HAZARDOUS. USE EYE AND SKIN PROTECTION WHEN HANDLING OR MIXING. KEEP AN EXTRA BOX OF BAKING SODA HANDY FOR FIRST AID OR TO NEUTRALIZE SPILLS. PERFORM THE PROCEDURES OUTDOORS IF POSSIBLE. IF THE WORK MUST BE DONE INDOORS, WORK ONLY IN WELL VENTILATED AREA.



WarningIN THE FOLLOWING MIXING PROCEDURE, ALWAYS PUT WATER IN THE CON-TAINER FIRST AND THEN ADD ACID TO THE WATER. ADDING WATER TO A CON-TAINER OF ACID MAY RESULT IN A VIOLENT & DANGEROUS REACTION.

1. Prepare three plastic 5 gallon buckets as follows:

A. Bucket #1 - Water

B. Bucket #2 - One quart muriatic acid in four gallons of water (See Warnings Above)

C. Bucket #3 - One pound baking soda in five gallons of water

2. After soldering is finished, dip the end of the line in the water to cool.

3. Set the cooled end of the line into the acid-water mixture for 5-10 minutes. This will loosen the film and brighten the silver.

4. Immerse the end of the line into the soda solution. This will stop the action of the ac-id.

5. Use a Scotch Bright pad or steel wool to scrub off the remaining torch black.

6. If the flux scale is particularly stubborn repeat the process.

7. When finished, rinse thoroughly when done with water and dry the line before assem-bling.

1.5.1 Alternate Cleaning Method

The following is an alternate procedure to clean the soldered transmission line. The following materials are needed.

• Water and Hose

• Small Paint Brush

• Rubber Gloves

• Scotch Brite Pad or BBQ Grill Cleaning Pad With Handle

• Naval Jelly (or equivalent rust remover).

WarningNAVAL JELLY CONTAINS PHOSPHORIC ACID AND CAN BE DANGEROUS IF IT COMES IN CONTACT WITH SKIN OR EYES OR IF IT IS SWALLOWED. READ AND FOLLOW THE PRECAUTIONS AND EMERGENCY PROCEDURES ON THE NAVAL JELLY CONTAINER BEFORE USING.

1. After soldering the flange, dip the end of the line into water or spray it with a hose un-til it is cool.



2. Using a small paint brush, apply a coating of Naval Jelly to the torch black and flux scale on the outside and inside of the line. Let the Naval Jelly set from 10 to 20 min-utes.

3. Scrub the line with Scotch Brite or the BBQ Grill pad to loosen the torch black and flux scale.

4. Flush with water until the Naval Jelly residue is gone.

5. Repeat the process until all the torch black and flux scale is removed.

The first application of the Naval Jelly will remove the torch black and some of the flux scale. Normally, if vigorous scrubbing is done, repeating the process a second time will completely clean the line.


Appendix-bCooling System Help


b
b.1 Coolant and Water Recommendations
The cooling loop uses a 50% mixture by volume of deionized water and industrial grade ethylene glycol. The recommended ethylene glycol product is called “Ucartherm”, made by Union Carbide.

Equivalent coolants from another manufacturer may be used as long as its inhibitors are similar. Also, information on the properties of the product must be obtained from the manufacturer in order to calculate the transmitter power output calorimetrically.

b-1 to servicing.

Appendix-b Cooling System Help ATLAS ISDB-T

Caution

DO NOT USE AUTOMOTIVE GRADE ANTI-FREEZE AS A SUBSTITUTION FOR INDUSTRIAL GRADE GLYCOL. IT DOES NOT CONTAIN THE PROPER INHIBITORS FOR THIS APPLICATION AND WILL LEAD TO EVENTUAL DAMAGE OF THE SYSTEM.

Caution

SINCE THE WATER USED TO MIX WITH THE GLYCOL WILL AFFECT THE CORROSIVITY OF THE MIXTURE, ONLY HIGH QUALITY DEMINERALIZED WATER THAT HAS BEEN DISTILLED, DEIONIZED OR REVERSE-OSMOSIS PROCESSED SHOULD BE USED. THIS WATER MUST HAVE A CONDUCTIVITY OF NO MORE THAN 5 MICROSIEMENS (OR HAVE A RESISTANCE OF LESS THAN 200K OHMS.

The quality of water mixed with glycol concentrate can impact system performance. Poor quality water can cause scale, sediment deposits, or sludge throughout the cooling which will reduce heat transfer efficiency. Poor quality water can also cause damage to the system by depleting the corrosion inhibitor and can lead to the creation of a number of corrosions including general and acidic attack corrosions.

Good quality processed water contains:

• Less than 50 ppm of calcium

• Less than 50 ppm of magnesium

• Less than 100 ppm (5 grains) of total hardness

• Less than 25 ppm of chloride

• Less than 25 ppm of sulfate

Table b-1 Recommended Coolants

Description Part Numbers

Ucartherm Cooling Fluid, ethylene glycol-based concentrated solution

Ethylene Gasket Kit

051-1010-001

335-0304-000

DOWFROST HD: Inhibited propylene glycol-based

heat transfer fluid

Propylene Gasket Kit

051-1012-000

335-0301-000

DOWTHERM SR-1: ethylene glycol-based concentrated solution

Ethylene Gasket Kit

051-1010-002

335-0304-000

b-2 888-2684-001 2/24/09 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

Appendix-b Cooling System HelpATLAS ISDB-T

b.2 Plumbing System Installation

B.0.1 Materials needed

• Mapp gas torch set

• Extra Mapp gas tanks

• Welders mask or goggles

• Tubing cutter for 2.5 inch tubing (a hacksaw may be used instead of the tubing cutter)

• Flux (Stay Clean Flux) or equivalent (Harris part number 086 0004 040; one 16 oz. bottle provided with plumbing kit)

• Soft silver solder (96.5% tin; 3.5% silver) such as Aladdin #450 (Harris part number 086 0004 038) is needed. Three 1 lb. rolls of 1/16 inch soft silver solder is supplied with plumbing kit. 1/8 inch silver solder (Harris part number 086-0004-047) is also available.

• Wire brush and rags

• Water hose

• Thread rod, angle iron or channel and hangers needed to support the plumbing

• Tubing cutter or a hack saw (always de-bur the line (remove any rough points or flared-in edges at the cut after cutting)

Warning

TEMPERATURE OF THE HEATED LINE IN THE FOLLOWING STEPS IS QUITE HIGH. PRECAUTIONS MUST BE TAKEN TO AVOID CONTACT WITH EXPOSED SKIN.

b.2.1 Pipe Sizing and Routing

If a typical system layout is not used, the typical plumbing layout should still be consulted for pipe size information and connection details and techniques at the amplifier cabinets, RF loads, pump module and outside heat exchanger. A custom plumbing installation must not unduly restrict flow rates or change the design of the cooling system. Locate the plumbing so that access to transmitter system components is not restricted.

NOTE:Pipes must be sized no smaller than shown on the typical plumbing layout draw-ing. Their routing should minimize turns and long runs.

2/24/09 888-2684-001 b-3 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


If additional amplifier cabinets are to be added to the system in the future, consider these plans when sizing and laying out the cooling system. Doing so now may slightly increase the installation cost, but will greatly lower the cost of conversion later.

The plumbing lines must be type “M” hard drawn copper with soft silver soldered joints (96.5% Tin, 3.5% Silver; Aladdin #450 silver solder or equivalent). An adequate amount of soft silver solder (Harris part 086-0004-038) is supplied with the plumbing kit. Good silver brazed joints are acceptable but not required. A poorly done brazed joint is much harder to repair than a soft silver solder joint.

b.2.2 Standard Coolant Plumbing Practices

Good plumbing equipment installation practice is required to ensure system integrity. Appropriately measured, cut, deburred, supported and soldered copper pipe sections, facilitate mechanical integrity of the coolant transportation system. The “glue” that holds the system together is quality soldering.

This process includes the need to condition all surfaces to be soldered by thorough cleaning with emery cloth or a non-sudsing scouring pad, with an even application of flux, liquid flux being preferred. This applies to all common surfaces of plumbing fittings and straight pipe sections. Any improperly cleaned and poorly fluxed surfaces, either one or both, will not allow the solder to flow properly for continuous adherence of the solder to the two surfaces being soldered. After cleaning and fluxing, a continuous and evenly distributed application of heat without overheating will result in an evenly distributed flow of solder between the surfaces being soldered for a plumbed system that does not leak. Remember that solder flows from a colder surface to a hotter surface no matter the orientation of the surfaces being soldered.

Since considerable heat is necessary to make the solder flow, some torch black and flaking may develop inside the pipe. Before hanging the line, it is recommended that a hose and wire brush or rag be used to clean and flush the inside of the line where possible. It is also recommended to wash the flux off the final soldered joint to prevent future tarnishing.

NOTE:Keep in mind that an over application of solder can result in solder balls falling in to the associated piping with the possibility of water flow restriction and/or blockage. Also, an under application of solder can result in water leakage paths between the common surfaces of the fitting being soldered.

Propane or Mapp gas is the recommended fuel for soldering copper plumbing pieces. These gasses are available in small metallic bottles that mate directly to appropriate torches. Also, a “Turbo Torch” or equivalent with appropriately sized regulator and hose combination can be used with larger gas tanks (large cooking stove tank). If these



gas sources are not available, use of acetylene gas with an acetylene only torch is acceptable. In any event, only skilled plumbing and soldering practitioners, knowledgeable of the specific soldering equipment being used, should perform the required work.

NOTE:A soldering combination of silver bearing solder, i.e. Harris (not Harris Broad-cast) Stay-Brite R (086-0004-038), and “Stay Clean” liquid soldering and tinning flux (086-0004-040) or equivalent, is recommended. Also, pipe thread joints should be conditioned with Teflon tape (299-0018-000) and a thin film applica-tion of a smooth, non-hardening thread sealing, compound with integrated Teflon is recommended, i.e. Locktite #565, or “Gasoila” (690-0017-000), prior to mat-ing any two threaded pieces together.

When connecting threaded plumbing fittings, use a layer of teflon tape and some pipe dope on the male fittings. Do not use pipe dope on the female fittings because it will bunch up on the inside surface of the plumbing and interfere with normal cooling system operation. It is difficult to remove excess pipe dope from inside the system.

A final comment about the installation process centers around the need for the discipline of personnel in and around the cooling system installation area. Under no circumstances should anyone, cooling system installer and/or workers in other disciplines and areas, walk on pipes and fittings that have or have not been positioned and soldered. Although probably convenient for passage between adjacent work areas, walking on already soldered pipe can and historically has led to premature loss of solder joint integrity, among other self evident undesirable integrity results.

Caution

IF FREEZING CONDITIONS EXIST DURING CHECKOUT AND FLUSHING PROCEDURES, FLUSHING PROCEDURE AND SUBSEQUENT FILL WITH FINAL GLYCOL/WATER MUST BE FINISHED BEFORE STILL WATER IS ALLOWED TO REMAIN IN HEAT EXCHANGER. IF PROCEDURE CANNOT BE FINISHED, CARE MUST BE TAKEN TO PREVENT WATER FROM FREEZING IN OUTSIDE COOLING SYSTEM EQUIPMENT. IF WATER REMAINS IN OUTSIDE EQUIPMENT LONG ENOUGH TO FREEZE, THE UNITS WILL BE DAMAGED. PUMP A MIXTURE OF GLYCOL/WATER INTO OUTSIDE EQUIPMENT TO PREVENT DAMAGE.



b.3 Routine System Operation and Maintenance

a. As a general rule of thumb, the entire system including all cabinets should be inspected for leaks on a routine basis. And any indication of a potential leak noted and corrected. The transmitter cabinet is equipped to detect internal leaks. For the rest of the system plumbing; however small leaks could evade detection.

If a system leak, is detected around a plumbed solder joint, the coolant should be drained, the leak point resoldered, and the system refilled and tested.

Repairs for a leak originating at a threaded joint may be initially attempted by tightening the affected joint without draining the system. If this tightening effort does not correct the problem, then the system must be drained, the problem area opened and replumbed as necessary, followed by a system refill and test.

b. Probably the single most important maintenance step: Inspect the bottom of the heat exchanger bi-monthly. Inspect the coil itself for any debris that may have become trapped on the coil face. This would block air flow and decrease cooling efficiency of the heat exchanger. Debris can be removed using a hose and pressurized water system. In dusty environments or areas where an abundance of vegetation is present this inspection will be required weekly

c. To achieve even usage time per unit and ascertain that back-up integrity exists, it is recommended that the pumps in the pump module are operated alternately one month at a time.

d. Check the pump module pressure gauge to ensure that a consistent stable pressure is indicated.

e. Inspect and clean the filtration loop.

f. Check flow rate.

g. Per the comment included in b.2.2 Standard Coolant Plumbing Practices section, mandate a continual discipline of NOT allowing plumbing pipe, fittings, etc., to be walked on.

h. The system must be analyzed for glycol concentration, annually. Analysis can be provided by the glycol manufacturer or via use of an analytical test kit supplied through the manufacturer.



b.3.1 Reserve Coolant Supply

A sufficient reserve supply of coolant and corresponding deinonized water should be kept on hand to refill the entire system in the event of a major leak.

b.3.2 Clean-Up Plan

A plan for containment and spill clean-up acceptable to local environmental regulations should be considered.

b.3.3 Operating Environment

Ambient air temperatures near the heat exchanger dry cooler should not rise above 45°C for typical installations.

b.3.4 Measuring Specific Gravity

Specific gravity can be measured with a conventional float hydrometer and jar or a MISCO DFR 200 (or equivalent) digital hydrometer to verify the 50/50 mixture. The hydrometer should be capable of measuring specific gravity in the 1.02 to 1.08 range.

Extract a sample of the coolant being used and cool it to 60oF (Note: this is the temperature to which your hydrometer has been calibrated.)

Read the specific gravity as accurately as possible. With this number the concentration or per cent of glycol in the solution can be determined. Let us assume the S.G. reads 1.060 on the hydrometer scale.

NOTE:The specific heat and specific gravity of water is not always equal to 1.0, see Tables B-2 and B-3 on page B-8.



Table b-2 Specific Gravity and Density of Water at Atmospheric Pressure

Temp. deg C Specific gravity Density lb/cu ft Temp. deg C Specific gravity Density lb/cu ft

0 0.99987 62.4183 40 0.99224 61.9428

2 0.99997 62.4246 42 0.99147 61.894

4 1.00000 62.4266 44 0.99066 61.844

6 0.99997 62.4246 46 0.98982 61.791

8 0.99988 62.4189 48 0.98896 61.737

10 0.99973 62.4096 50 0.98807 61.682

12 0.99952 62.3969 52 0.98715 61624

14 0.99927 62.3811 54 0.98621 61.566

16 0.99897 62.3623 56 0.98524 61.505

18 0.99862 62.3407 58 0.98425 61.443

20 0.99823 62.3164 60 0.98324 61.380

22 0.99780 62.2894 62 0.98220 61.315

24 0.99732 62.2598 64 0.98113 61.249

26 0.99681 62.2278 66 0.98005 61.181

28 0.99626 62.1934 68 0.97894 61.112

30 0.99567 62.1568 70 0.97781 61.041

32 0.99505 62.1179 72 0.97666 60.970

34 0.99440 62.0770 74 0.97548 60.896

36 0.99371 62.0341 76 0.97428 60.821

38 0.99299 61.9893 78 0.97307 60.745

Table b-3 Specific Heat of Water at 1 Atmosphere of Pressure (ICT)

Temp F 32 50 100 150 212

Cp 1.001 1.002 1.004 1.009 1.021



b.3.5 Example

The easiest way to understand this process is to work an example. The data used in this example is shown below.

• S.G. at 60oF = 1.060

b.3.5.1 Determining Percent of Ucartherm

Refer to Figure B-5, on page B -14 and the 60oF curve (interpolation will be required). Reading across the 1.06 S.G. line to the intersection of the 60oF curve (Point A) and then vertically down to the percent of UCARTHEM in the solution, shows that this particular sample is a 40% (by weight) glycol mixture.

b.4 Heat Transfer Solutions

b.4.1 Ethylene Glycol

Commercial Grade “Ucartherm” (Union Carbide Corporation) Ethylene Oxide/Glycol is the recommended heat transfer fluid to be used for the liquid portion of the cooling system. Ucartherm can be purchased from Harris in 55 Gallon lots using the following part numbers:

051-1010-021 - Ucartherm 50/50 solution

051-1010-001 - Ucartherm 100% concentrate

Automotive grade antifreeze is not recommended due to the silicon additives which can cause incompatibility problems with pump seals and other components within a system.

Due to a tendency of the glycol to break down over time when mixed with chlorinated water, it is recommended that distilled water be used for the solution.

The life expectancy of a “Ucartherm” system can be as long as 10-15 years for a clean system installed and monitored per the recommended procedures.

Glycols are excellent penetrants. Systems tested with water and checked to be tight sometimes will leak when glycol solutions are then added. Recheck the system for leaks after installing the glycol mixture.

Distribution information may be obtained by contacting Union Carbide Corporation (800-568-4000).



Figure B-1 Ucartherm Operating Practices



Figure B-2 Ucartherm Maintenance and Freeze Protection



Figure B-3 Ucartherm Freezing Points



Figure B-4 Ucartherm Physical Properties



Figure B-5 Specific Gravity of Ucartherm/Water Solution



Figure B-6 Boiling Point of Ucartherm/Water Solution


Appendix-cGrounding, Surge & Lightning Protection


c
c.1 Surge and Lightning Protection
A lightning storm can cause transients in excess of 2kV to appear on power or field signal lines. The duration of these transients varies from a few hundred nanoseconds to a few microseconds. Power distribution system transient protectors can efficiently protect the transmitter from transients of this magnitude. Transients are shunted to ground through the protection devices and do not appear on the output. To protect the transmitter from high transients on field cables, electronic surge protectors are recommended.

All lightning protection is defensive in nature, that is, reacting to a lightning strike that has already occurred; therefore, its effectiveness is limited. Nothing can provide total immunity from damage in the case of a direct lightning strike. However, surge protectors installed immediately after the main power disconnect switch in the power distribution panel will afford some protection from electrical surges induced in the power lines.

Surge protection devices are designed to operate and recover automatically. When operated within specifications, a surge protector does not require testing, adjustment, or replacement. All parts are permanently enclosed to provide maximum safety and flexibility of installation.

To assure the safety of equipment and personnel, primary power line transformers must be protected by lightning arrestors at the service entrance to the building. This will reduce the possibility that excessive voltage and current due to lightning will seek some low impedance path to ground such as the building metallic structure or an equipment cabinet. The most effective type of power line lightning protection is the one in which a spark gap is connected to each primary, secondary, and the case of the power line transformer. Each spark gap is then independently connected to earth ground. In cases where driven ground rods are used for building ground, the primary and secondary neutrals must be separated by a spark gap. If two separate ground rods are used, the rods

c-1 to servicing.

Appendix-c Grounding, Surge & Lightning ATLAS ISDB-T

must be at least 20 feet apart. All connections between lightning arrestors, line connections, and ground must be made as short and straight as possible, with no sharp bends.

c.2 System Grounding

Signals employed in transmitter control systems are on the order of a few microseconds in duration, which translates to frequencies in the megahertz region. They are therefore radio-frequency signals, and may be at levels less than 500 microvolts, making them susceptible to noise appearing on ground wires or adjacent wiring. Thus, all ground wiring must be low in impedance as well as low in resistance, without splices, and as direct as possible. Four basic grounds are required:

1. AC ground

2. DC ground

3. Earth ground

4. RF ground

c.2.1 Ground Wires

Ground wires should be at least as large as specified by the local electrical code. These leads must be low impedance direct runs, as short as possible without splices. In addition, ground conductors should be insulated to prevent intermittent or unwanted grounding points.

Connection to the earth ground connection must be made with copper clamps which have been chemically treated to resist corrosion. Care must be taken to prevent inadvertent grounding of system cabinets by any means other than the ground wire. Cabinets must be mounted on a support insulated from ground.

c.2.2 AC Ground

The suggested grounding method consists of two separately structured ground wires which are physically separated from each other but terminate at earth ground. The green ground wire from the AC power input must connect to the power panel and the ground straps of the equipment cabinets.

The primary electrostatic shield of the isolation transformer, if used, connects to the AC neutral wire (white) so that in the event of a transformer primary fault, fault current is returned directly to the AC source rather than through a common ground system. The AC neutral is connected to earth ground at the service entry.

c-2 888-2684-001 2/24/09 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

Appendix-c Grounding, Surge & ATLAS ISDB-T

Use of separate grounds prevents cross-coupling of power and signal currents as a result of any impedance that may be common to the separate systems. It is especially important in low-level systems that noise-producing and noise-sensitive circuits be isolated from each other; separating the grounding paths is one step.

Noise Grounding Plate. Where excessive high-frequency noise on the AC ground is a problem, a metal plate having an area of at least 10 square feet embedded in concrete and connected to the AC ground will assist in noise suppression. The connection to AC ground should be shorter than 5 feet, as direct as possible, and without splices. Local wiring codes will dictate the minimum wire size to be used.

Peripheral Equipment Grounds. All peripherals are supplied with a separate grounding wire or strap. All branch circuit receptacles must permit connection to this ground. This service ground must be connected through the branch circuit to a common grounding electrode by the shortest and most direct path possible. This is a safety ground connection, not a neutral.

Often, circuit common in test equipment is connected to power ground and chassis. In these cases, isolated AC power must be provided from a separate isolation transformer to avoid a ground loop.

c.2.3 DC Ground

DC grounds in the transmitter are connected to a ground bus, which in turn is routed to a common cabinet ground and then connected to an earth ground. The use of separate ground busses is a suggested method of isolation used to prevent cross-coupling of signals. These ground buses are then routed to the cabinet ground and to earth ground.

c.2.4 Earth Ground

The transmitter must be connected to earth ground. The connection must have an impedance of 5 ohms or less. For example, a one-inch metal rod driven 20 feet into moist earth will have a resistance of approximately 20 ohms, and a large ground counterpoise buried in moist earth will exhibit a resistance on the order of 1 to 5 ohms.

The resistance of an electrode to ground is a function of soil resistivity, soil chemistry and moisture content. Typical resistivity of unprepared soil can vary from approximately 500 ohms to 50kohms per square centimeter.

The resistance of the earth ground should be periodically measured to ensure that the resistance remains within installation requirements.

2/24/09 888-2684-001 c-3 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

Appendix-c Grounding, Surge & Lightning ATLAS ISDB-T

c.2.5 RF Ground

Electrical and electronic equipment must be effectively grounded, and shielded to achieve reliable equipment operation. The facility ground system forms a direct path of low impedance of approximately 10 ohms between earth and various power and communications equipment. This effectively minimizes voltage differentials on the ground plane to below levels which will produce noise or interference to communication circuits.

The basic earth electrode subsystem consist of driven ground rods uniformly spaced around the facility, interconnected with 2 or 4 inch copper strap. The strap and rods should be placed approximately 40 inches (1 meter) outside the roof drip line of the structure, and the strap buried at least 20 inches (0.5 meters). The ground rods should be copper-clad steel, a minimum of eight feet (2.5 meters) in length and spaced apart not more than twice the rod length. Brazing or welding should be used for permanent connections between these items.

Where a resistance of 10 ohms cannot be obtained with the above configuration, alternate methods must be considered.

Ideally, the best building ground plane is an equipotential ground system. Such a plane exists in a building with a concrete floor if a ground grid, connected to the facility ground system at multiple points, is embedded in the floor.

The plane may be either a solid sheet or wire mesh. A mesh will act electrically as a solid sheet as long as the mesh openings are less than 1/8 wavelength at the highest frequencies of concern. When it is not feasible to install a fine mesh, copper-clad steel meshes and wires are available. Each crossover point must be brazed to ensure good electrical continuity. Equipotential planes for existing facilities may be installed at or near the ceiling above the equipment.

Each individual piece of equipment must be bonded to its rack or cabinet, or have its case or chassis bonded to the nearest point of the equipotential plane. Racks and cabinets should also be grounded to the equipotential plane with a copper strap.

RF transmission line from the antenna must be grounded at the entry point to the building with 2 or 4 inch copper strap. Wire braid or fine-stranded wire must not be used.

All building main metallic structural members such as columns, wall frames, roof trusses, and other metal structures must be made electrically continuous and grounded to the facility ground system at multiple points. Rebar, cross over points, and vertical runs should also be made electrically continuous and grounded.

Conduit and power cable shields that enter the building must be bonded at each end to the facility ground system at each termination.

c-4 888-2684-001 2/24/09 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.

Appendix-dLightning Protection Recommendation


d
d.1 Introduction
What can be done with a 2 million volt pulse pushing 220,000 amps of current into your transmitting plant? Like the 500 pound gorilla it does what ever it wants to. There is not much that can be done to protect against a major direct lightning strike. This is called a significant impulse lightning stroke. It usually lasts less than 100 microseconds and is most destructive to electronic equipment because it contains huge amounts of high frequency energy.

Here are some examples of this damage:

• Melted ball and horn gaps.

• Ground straps burned loose.

• H.V. rectifier stacks shorted.

• Massive arc marks in the output circuit of AM transmitters.

• Ball lightning traveling into building on outer conductor of transmission line.

Figure 0-1 is a map of the United States that shows the number of lightning days expected in any year, with Colorado, New Mexico, and Florida leading the list.

Figure 0-2 shows the incidents to tall structures. A triggered event is one that happens because the tower was present. Without the tower the strike would not have occurred.

d-1 to servicing.

Appendix-d Lightning Protection ATLAS ISDB-T

Figure 0-1 Map Showing Lightning Days Per Year

Figure 0-2 Lightning Incidents to Tall Structures

Num

ber

Per

Yea

r

Structure Height In Feet

All Triggered Events

500 1000 1500 2000

Col

lect

edE

vent

s

40

30

20

10

d-2 888-2684-001 2/24/09 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


d.2 Environmental Hazards

There are devices and procedures that do offer protection from lessor environmental hazards than lightning. Some of these anomalies are listed and defined:

1. Over voltage/under voltage (brownout). Where the lines voltage differs from the nominal RMS for longer than one cycle.

Remedy - Automatic voltage regulators, preferably individual regulators on each phase. This can only be accomplished when the power feed line is delta or 4/wire wye connected, See Figure D-3.

2. Single phasing. This is where one leg of the three phase service is open.

Remedy - Protection afforded by a loss of phase detector. Without protection power transformers and 3 phase motors over heat.

3. Radio frequency interference (RFI). This is something we must design into all trans-mitters, however, equipment may be purchased that is susceptible, is not protected, and may develop problems.

Remedy - RFI filters on the ac lines and control lines are sometimes effective. Some-times the entire device must be enclosed in an RF free space.

4. Electromagnetic pulse (EMP). This is a interfering signal pulse that enters the system by magnetic coupling (transformer). Generally caused by lightning.

Lightning from cloud to cloud produces horizontally polarized waves while lightning from cloud to earth produce vertically polarized waves. The waves couple into the power lines and transmission lines causing large induced voltage that destroy high voltage rectifier stacks and output circuit faults. High frequency energy is coupled back into the transmitter causing VSWR overloads, See Figures D-4 and D-5.

Remedy - Ball or horn gaps at the base of the antenna prevent the voltage from ex-ceeding some high potential. Transient suppressor devices on the input power lines remove excessive voltage spikes. Buried power and transmission lines will reduce the amount of coupled energy to a great extent. This does not totally eliminate the prob-lem because there are currents traveling in the earth, which prefer to travel on the metal conductors, when lightning strikes close to the station.

5. Surge. A rapid increase in voltage on the power lines usually caused by lightning. The duration is less than 1/2 cycle and can be very destructive.

Remedy - Transient protectors are very effective in preventing damage to the equip-ment when properly designed and installed, See Figure D-6.

Table d-1 Significant Lightning Stroke Characteristic

Charge Range 2 to 200 coulombs

Peak Currents 2,000 to 400,000 Amperes

Rise Time to 90% 300 Nanoseconds to 10 Microseconds

2/24/09 888-2684-001 d-3 WARNING: Disconnect primary power prior to servicing.


Figure D-3 Regulators for Delta and 4-Wire WYE systems

Duration to 50% 100 Microseconds to 10 Milliseconds

Potential Energy at 99%

1010 Joules*

* Only a small portion is manifested in a surge, usually less than 10,000 Joules.

Table d-1 Significant Lightning Stroke Characteristic



Figure D-4 EM Flux Field

Figure D-5 Sample Surge Voltage as a Function of Distance From Stroke to Line

Vol

tage

kV

2400

2000

1600

1200

8000 1 2 3 4 5 6

Time in usec

A

B

C

A = 1/2 mile from stationB = 1 mile from stationC = 2 miles from station.



Figure D-6 Surge Protectors and Ferrite Chokes

d.3 What Can Be Done?

Installation of the transmitter building, antenna tuning unit if applicable, and antenna should be done so that the risk of destruction due to lightning is minimal and the efficiency of the over all system is maximized. To do this, separate ground systems should be installed for the building and antenna. This forces all of the RF return currents to flow in the transmission line shield. The coax can be buried below the antenna ground plane to still further reduce the RF current coupled to it.

In medium and short wave installations the antenna ground plane is very important as it is of the radiating element. RF current leaving the antenna must return via the ground path (ground wave). For this reason the “antenna coupling unit” must be close to the base of the tower and securely connected to the ground plane.

Figure D-7 shows the basic elements of a properly designed antenna system.

• Good ground plane.

• Ball gap on tower.

• Series inductor in tower feeder.

• Antenna coupling unit connected to antenna ground.

• The circuit is equivalent to the normal Tee used by Harris.

• Underground coax.



• Guy wire length broken by insulators and grounded at the bottom end.

The transmitter building must be given extra protection to insure reliable equipment operation. A low impedance safety ground system must be installed using 3 inch wide copper strap hard soldered at all joints and connected to multiple ground rods located at the perimeter of the building. The ground rods should be wet to make good connection to the earth water table. All equipment cabinets within the building must be connected to the ground straps for safety reasons.

Figure D-7 Basic Elements of a Properly Designed Antenna System

d.4 AC Service Protection

All incoming ac lines should have a choke connected in series to limit the high frequency surges on the lines followed by a surge protector. The surge protector must be connected to the building ground system by short direct connections, see Figure D-6.

A surge protector is a solid state device that has a high impedance until the voltage across it reaches its rated clamping voltage, at which time its impedance suddenly decreases. The protector will then conduct hundreds to thousands of amperes to ground. All protectors are rated for maximum voltage and maximum surge energy. If the surge energy exceeds rating of the device it will normally short and for this reason must be fused so it will disconnect itself from the line being protected. When this happens all protection is lost so some warning system must be used to tell the operators that a new protector should be installed.

Speed is essential to protect equipment from current surges with rates of rise exceeding 10,000 amps per microsecond and pulses that last no longer than 100 microseconds. Very short, low inductance ground straps are required to pass surges of this type.



The surge protectors must be selected for the line to ground voltage and the maximum energy to be diverted. Bigger is always better in this case. There are several manufacturers of surge protectors:

• Lightning Elimination Associates., Inc.

• Current Technology

• Control Concept

• MCG Electronics, Inc.

• EFI Corp.

• General Electric

All of these vendors provide parts and systems to protect broadcast transmitters.

All audio and control lines should be protected the same as described for ac lines with components sized accordingly.

All coaxial lines should have the shield connected to the system ground at the point of entrance and in addition have a ferrite choke around it located between the entrance point and the equipment rack. This will provide a high impedance for current flowing in the shield but does not affect the signal currents.

d.5 Conclusion

The 1% chance of a major lightning strike probably can not be protected against but the other 99% can be controlled and damage prevented. Install surge protection on all incoming and outgoing lines at the wall of the building connected to a well designed ground system. Properly install the antenna ground system with spark gap adjusted correctly and maintained. With this done you can sleep peacefully at night if your bed isn’t under the feed line.


Manual Trans Miss Or Atlas ISDB Series

Documents

Transcript of Manual Trans Miss Or Atlas ISDB Series